JP7125645B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines are triggered by the entry of a game ball into a starting opening (start chucker), and a pattern called a "special pattern" is variably displayed on a display unit such as a 7 segment, and the special pattern is specified. When it becomes a mode (for example, "7"), a special game state in which the profit state for the player is higher than that in the normal game state {a game in which the large winning opening (attacker), which is normally closed, is opened under a predetermined condition }, so-called "digipachi" (conventional "type 1 game machines") are common. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. In some cases, the symbol to be played may be variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Many of them are configured so that the player can clearly recognize that the transition to the special game is confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the reel-type game machine (slot machine) is triggered by the operation of a game start instruction device (start lever) after a predetermined number of game medals have been inserted, and a plurality of symbols are arranged in a plurality of rows on the outer circumference. The reel (reel) rotates, and as a result of stopping the reel by making full use of the reel stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotation, a combination of predetermined symbols on the effective line (for example "777") are lined up, the type of transition to a special game state {a game state in which the probability of winning a winning combination is higher than in the normal state} in which the profit state for the player is higher than in the normal game state is common. target. Here, in a slot machine, there are cases in which images for presentation, etc. are displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a manner synchronized with the reel rotation and stop motions to enhance the interest of the game. Many games are constructed so that when a stop button or the like is operated, the game results are predicted and enjoyed while comparing the symbols displayed on the reels with the images for presentation displayed on the display.

This kind of mechanism is common to many gaming machines of this type, but the capacity of the program that governs the operation control of the gaming machine, etc., is necessary to prevent the contamination of illegal programs (guaranteeing the legitimacy of the program provided by the gaming machine manufacturer). From the point of view, the upper limit of the capacity is strictly regulated, and in addition to the program for implementing the game specification, cheating is done to the game machine (for example, transmitting radio wave information to the start sensor) There are many anti-fraud programs to prevent illegal access to the slot for inserting or withdrawing game media to obtain game media by illegal means, etc.). Implemented.

Furthermore, due to reasons such as the angle of the game nail changing due to the collision of game balls flowing down the game board surface (game area), the ball entry efficiency of a game ball into a certain prize winning opening is assumed at the time of shipment of the game machine. In such a case, there is also the problem that it is not possible to determine the extent of the ball-entering efficiency.

JP 2011-147675 A JP 2016-116898 A JP 2010-158405 A

However, currently, programs for implementing game specifications and programs for preventing cheating are often mixed and placed on the ROM, and as a result, it is difficult to verify the legitimacy of these programs. There is a problem that

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
A game machine comprising a ROM (for example, a built-in ROM of a CPU mounted on a main control board M) and a RAM (for example, a built-in RAM of a CPU mounted on a main control board M ) ,
The ROM stores a program that controls commands to the CPU and data that is read according to the program,
The ROM (for example, in an example of the memory map of the main control chip shown as <memory map> in the embodiment) is
a first control area in which a program is stored (for example, a first control area in a first ROM area);
a first data area in which data is stored (for example, a first data area in a first ROM area);
a second control area in which a program is stored (for example, a second control area in a second ROM area);
a second data area in which data is stored (for example, a second data area in the second ROM area);
The RAM is
a first information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the first control area ;
a second information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the second control area ;
has
a first stack area in which data stored in a register can be saved and used for processing in a program stored in the first control area;
A second stack area where data stored in registers can be saved and used for processing in the program stored in the second control area
and
The storage capacity of the programs stored in the first control area is larger than the storage capacity of the programs stored in the second control area. is,
Among the processing by the program stored in the first control area and the processing by the program stored in the second control area, the program stored in the first control area to the program stored in the second control area A process that is performed when called, and is processed by a series of processing routes including saving of predetermined registers used by the program stored in the first control area by the program stored in the second control area. is configured to maximize the usage of the second stack area only when
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to easily verify the legitimacy of the program for implementing the game specification and the program for preventing fraud.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a unit configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a working diagram relating to the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flow chart of ball entry detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart of auxiliary game start entrance ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flow chart of the first (second) big winning hole entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of general winning hole entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flow chart of out-hole entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart of the number of prize balls determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game is finished on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the number-of-entered-balls determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is an image diagram of a prize ball payout command and payout-related information on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of payout control board side main processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flow chart of error control processing upon detection of payout motor operation abnormality on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of payout abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flow chart of error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of payout motor abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flow chart of error control processing when a payout stop abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flow chart of prize ball payout related information transmission/reception processing (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the start of prize ball payout/motor drive start) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of prize ball payout control processing (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of prize ball payout control processing (during motor drive execution) on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of motor error processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of reservation information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flow chart of decoration symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of error notification execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flow chart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of base determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the main game start entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flow chart of general winning hole entrance ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of base determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is a memory map configuration diagram in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the third embodiment. FIG. 76 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flow chart of the main game start entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flow chart of general winning hole entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the number-of-entered-balls determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flow chart of general winning hole entrance ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in a pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of maintenance mode execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of base determination processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of a pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of backup execution control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the main game starting entrance ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flow chart of general winning hole entry ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flow chart of the number-of-entered-balls determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flow chart of the main game discharge count confirmation process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flow chart of sub-game entry confirmation processing on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the sub-game entering ball determination process on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of sub-game side discharge number confirmation processing on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of RAM clear backup processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flow chart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flow chart of ball entry state calculation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a backup image diagram of entering ball information in a pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a display example of the ball entry state display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flow chart of ball entry state calculation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of password generation processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 114 is a flowchart of password authentication processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 115 is an example of arrangement of the main game start opening and the general winning opening in the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 116 is a list table 1 of a configuration relating to information relating to ball entry, which is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 117 is a list table 2 of the configuration related to ball entry information that can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 118 is a list table 3 of a configuration relating to information relating to entering a ball, which is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 119 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of non-time-saving prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of time-saving prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flow chart of ball entry state calculation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a display example of the ball entry state display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a back view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a flowchart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of a payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flow chart of payout control board side main processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flow chart of the number-of-entered-balls measurement process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of non-time-saving entering ball number measurement processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flow chart of time-saving entering ball number measurement processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a flow chart of ball entering state calculation processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 137 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of discharge ball detection processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of prize ball number determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of ball entry state calculation processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an image diagram of short-term payout rate calculation in a pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a flow chart of ball entry state determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of special game end demonstration time control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flow chart of excessive ball payout display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 150 is an image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment when detecting an excessive number of paid balls. FIG. 151 is an example 1 of error control applicable to the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 152 is an example 2 of error control applicable to the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 153 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram of the program configuration in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 156 is a list of test signals in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a flowchart of SW tallying processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 158 is a flowchart of counter addition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a configuration diagram of a register in a pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram of the register Q in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 161 is a flow chart of ball entry state display device arithmetic processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flowchart of section determination on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flowchart of section A time determination on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flow chart of determination after section B on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a flowchart of arithmetic processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flow chart of the ball entry state display device display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flowchart of display content update processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 168 is an image diagram of stack area switching in the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 169 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of a pachinko game machine according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 170 is an example of the maximum use route of the stack area in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a flowchart of main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a state in which the main control board is accommodated in the case and a cross section around the setting operation section in the pachinko game machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart of setting change processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode on the effect display device during setting change and setting confirmation in the pachinko game machine according to the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 177 is an image diagram relating to setting change button formula 1 (setting change). FIG. 178 is an image diagram relating to setting change button formula 1 (setting change). FIG. 179 is an image diagram relating to setting change button formula 2 (setting change). FIG. 180 is an image diagram relating to setting change button type 2 (setting change). FIG. 181 is an image diagram relating to the setting change button type (setting confirmation). FIG. 182 is an image diagram relating to the setting switch type (setting change). FIG. 183 is an image diagram relating to the setting switch type (setting change). FIG. 184 is an image diagram relating to the setting switch type (setting confirmation). FIG. 185 is an image diagram relating to the RAM clear button type (setting change). FIG. 186 is an image diagram relating to the RAM clear button type (setting confirmation).

form for implementation

First, the meaning of each term used in this specification will be explained. "Entering ball" includes not only prize winning in which a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. "Identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. and the like. In addition, in this specification, "identification information" may be referred to as main game design/special design (special design) or decoration design (design), but "special design (special design)" is the main control board The "decorative design (design)" is identification information as a performance displayed on the sub control board S side. The term “identification information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission from light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color), physical typical display (for example, a pattern drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Production” refers to display content that enhances the interest of the game, such as identification information change / stop, notice, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. Easy state. Also, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (on the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as a retracted state) ) (so-called tongue-type attacker), advance state=easy-win state, retreat state=non-easy-win state. “Random numbers” are random numbers used in lotteries (computer-based lotteries) to determine game content in pachinko machines, and include pseudo-random numbers in addition to strictly-defined random numbers (for example, random numbers are hard soft random numbers as random numbers, pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "random number (random number for lottery)" related to the transition to the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification pattern are determined. ``variation mode determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, ``symbol determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, and ``hit pattern determination random number'' for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, etc., but at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be expressed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bunch of random numbers such as winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, winning random number) may serve as another type of random number (for example, symbol determination random number). "Game state" means, for example, a special game state in which a large winning hole can be opened, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-probability variable game state in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high lottery probability, shift to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize to the starting port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal pattern time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In some cases, it is an arbitrary combination of one or more of the following: long open period of variable members, high winning probability of open variable members, short notification time of lottery results for open variable members, and the like. "Entering ball status display" is a display of information related to entering balls, such as display of the number of balls entered into a predetermined ball entrance, display of the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into a predetermined ball entrance, display of multiple Display of the cumulative number of balls entered into the ball entrance, display of the number of winning balls paid out based on the number of balls entered into multiple ball entrances, display of the base value, display of the base value in a predetermined game state, ball entry ratio , display of ball entry ratio in a predetermined game state, display of character ratio, display of continuous character ratio, display of cumulative number of discharged balls, and the like. The “predetermined operation to the operation member” means pressing of the sub-input button (in this example, it is determined that the button has been pressed once when OFF→ON for 0.5 seconds or less→OFF), sub-input Long press of the button (in this example, it is determined that the long press has been made when it changes from off to on for 10 seconds or more), pressing of the RAM clear button (in this example, off to on for 0.5 seconds or less) → It is determined that it was pressed once when it turned off), long press of the RAM clear button (in this example, it is determined that it was pressed long when it turned off → on for 10 seconds or longer) , the operation of the firing handle, etc. The “operable operation member provided on the back side of the game machine” is a member provided on the back side that is invisible while the player is playing, such as a RAM clear button. . "Operational member provided on the front side of the game machine" means a member provided on the front side that is visible when the player is playing, such as a sub-input button, a shooting handle, etc. , is.

The following embodiment is a model (first class first class compound machine) in which two conventional first class pachinko game machines are mixed. However, it is not limited to this in any way, and it is within the scope even if it is applied to other game machines (for example, conventional type 1, type 2, type 3, pachinko game machines such as general electric players) . Note that this embodiment is only an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. Moreover, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, variations on one embodiment should be understood as variations from another embodiment, and even if one variation is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of one variation with another variation are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limiting, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modified examples {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions between the first main game side and the second main game side, conditions between probability fluctuation games and non-probability fluctuation games, time reduction games and non- It is understood that the magnitude relationships and combinations of numerical values shown in the section "By conditions with time-shortened games, etc." Should. For example, between the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side, the probability of winning at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game have a magnitude relationship between the 1st main game side = 2nd main game side. Even if it is exemplified as such, the magnitude relationship can be changed as appropriate such as the first main game side < the second main game side, or the first main game side > the second main game side. Good (same for other numerical values and conditions). Also, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability variable gaming state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, is the number of continuations set to "65535" (configured to continue substantially)? Alternatively, even in the option of the implementation method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variable game state until the next big win occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modifications. should be understood to be subject to change as appropriate.

Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. A pachinko game machine is roughly divided into a game machine frame D and a game board Da, and the game machine frame D and the game board Da are each formed by assembling a plurality of units. Each unit constituting the game machine frame D and the game board Da will be described in order below.

First, the game machine frame D of the pachinko game machine includes an outer frame unit D12, a front frame unit D14, a transparent plate unit (also called glass unit) D16, a door unit (also called glass door) D18, and a ball tray unit D17. (The upper ball plate D20, the lower ball plate D22, and the shooting handle D44 are collectively referred to as D17).

The outer frame unit D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine to a position to be installed, and includes upper, lower, left, and right frame rods (upper frame rod D12d, lower frame rod D12e, left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b). and the curtain plate D12c are appropriately assembled in a frame shape to form a unit. Here, a set of upper and lower front frame hinges D12a-1 for assembling the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the left frame rod D12a, and an outer cover for locking the front frame unit D14 is attached to the right frame rod D12b. A locking metal fitting (not shown) on the frame side is fixed. In addition, in this embodiment, the curtain plate D12c is provided with a speaker D24 capable of outputting a sound according to the game state, and the left and right frame rods (left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b) are made of metal. The frame rods (upper frame rod D12d, lower frame rod D12e) are made of wood, and the curtain plate D12c is made of resin.

The front frame unit D14 is a frame whose outer size matches the opening of the outer frame unit D12. A hinge mechanism D14a-1 (corresponding to these) provided at an appropriate position of the frame unit D14 and a locking device (not shown) are attached to the outer frame unit D12 so that it can be laterally opened and closed and can be locked.

The front frame unit D14 includes a shooting mechanism for shooting game balls, a game board housing mechanism for detachably housing the game board Da, a prize ball payout mechanism for awarding prize balls, and a mechanism for guiding or guiding played balls. A played ball ejection mechanism or the like is provided for collecting the played balls. In this embodiment, a front frame main body D14a forming a base and forming a game board accommodating mechanism and having a shooting mechanism attached thereto, and detachably attached to the front frame main body D14a, a prize ball payout mechanism, and a game ball discharging mechanism are provided. A back mechanism unit D14b in which a mechanism is formed and a front frame unit D14 are formed. A set of upper and lower glass frame hinges D14a-2 for assembling a door unit D18, which will be described later, is provided on the left side of the front frame main body D14a, and the door unit D18 is attached to the right side of the front frame main body D14a. A glass frame locking device (not shown) is provided for locking. Furthermore, a sphere unit support mechanism (including a sphere hinge D14a-3) for assembling a sphere unit D17, which will be described later, is provided at the lower portion of the front frame main body D14a.

The transparent plate unit D16 is for holding a plurality of (for example, two) transparent plates D16a such as glass or acrylic plates in parallel with a predetermined interval (about 20 mm). After glass is inserted into a glass holding portion (not shown) formed in one member D16b, a second member D16c that shields the inserted portion is fitted and bonded to be integrated. The transparent plate unit D16 (particularly, the transparent plate D16a) allows the game area D30 of the game board Da to be seen through the opening surface of the door unit D18, which will be described later. Access to the game board Da and the game area D30 from the opening surface is difficult).

The door unit (glass door) D18 is provided at an appropriate position of the glass frame hinge D14a-2 and the glass frame locking device (not shown) provided in the front frame unit D14 and the door unit D18 (corresponding to these ), it is attached to the front frame unit D14 so that it can be laterally opened and closed and can be locked by a hinge mechanism and a locking metal fitting (not shown). The door unit D18 has an outer size that substantially matches the outer shape of the game board Da. A game board Da and a game area D30, which will be described later, can be visually recognized through D16.

The door unit D18 has a transparent plate unit holding portion D18b for holding the transparent plate unit D16 on the back side thereof, and a decorative portion provided with a decoration for obtaining an illumination effect and a visual effect around the opening D18a. D18c etc. are also formed. In this embodiment, a frame decoration lamp D18-L is arranged on the upper right portion of the door unit D18. It should be noted that the lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L may be configured to display the information related to the ball entry, which will be described later.
The details of the component configuration of the door unit D18 will be described later.

The spherical disk unit D17 includes a spherical disk unit support mechanism (including a spherical disk hinge D14a-3) provided on the front frame unit D14, and an engaging member (for example, an engaging member) provided at an appropriate position on the spherical disk unit D17. It is detachably attached to the front frame unit D14 by the joining member D17a-1). The ball tray unit D17 can be removed from the front frame unit D14 only when the door unit D18 is opened and closed. A difficult structure (for example, a structure in which a part of the door unit D18 and a part of the spherical dish unit D17 overlap) is adopted.

The ball tray unit D17 has a rectangular outer shape, an upper ball tray D20 for supplying game balls to the launching device at the top, and an upper ball tray D20 for supplying a large number of prize balls at the bottom. A lower ball tray D22 capable of storing the excess game balls when excessive game balls are supplied to D20 is formed. A shooting handle D44 is provided for adjusting the hitting position of the ball. A part of the surface of the ball tray unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper ball tray D20) is provided with a sub-input button SB operated by the player during production, and a lending operation unit ( (not shown) are provided. A speaker D24 is provided between the upper spherical dish D20 and the lower spherical dish D22. The details of the component configuration of the spherical dish unit D17 will be described later.

The schematic configuration of the gaming machine frame D in this embodiment is as described above. As described above, the gaming machine frame D is composed of a plurality of units. A front frame unit D14 (including a game board Da), a transparent plate unit D16, a door unit D18 and a ball tray unit D17 in front of the front frame unit D14 are detachable (or openable/closable). For this reason, the aligned portions of the respective units have minute gaps for facilitating opening/closing operations and attachment/detachment operations. Therefore, in the present embodiment, although illustration is omitted, in order to prevent foreign matter from entering the alignment portion of each unit, the alignment portion is provided with a labyrinth structure (an uneven shape in a cross-sectional view) so that the gap is not straight. (However, it is not limited to this).

In this embodiment, the door unit D18 and the spherical dish unit D17 employ separate structures, but both may employ an integrated structure. Further, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which physical game media are paid out according to game results, but it may be configured to perform electronic media management. In that case, the lower ball tray D22, prize ball payout mechanism, etc. are not required, and a game machine form (so-called enclosed circulation form) is adopted in which the played balls are returned to the upper ball tray D20 and electronically managed. It is supplemented that an operation unit for checkout/rental by an electronic medium is arranged in the plate unit D17 or the door unit D18 or the like.

Next, a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34 is formed on the game board Da. In the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of game nails and mechanisms such as windmills, there are a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, a general winning opening P10, a first A large winning slot C10, a second large winning slot C20, a first main game symbol display device A20, a second main game symbol display device B20, a performance display device SG, an auxiliary game symbol display device H20, a center decoration D38 and an out port C80. is set up. Each element will be described in detail below.

First, the first main game starting port A10 is installed as a starting prize winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start opening detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information.

Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting prize winning port corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start opening B10 includes a second main game start opening ball detection device B11s and a second main game start electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information. Next, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is in a closed state where the game ball cannot enter the second main game starter B10 {a ball receiving member formed in a flat plate shape (hereinafter referred to as a ball receiving member ) is retracted from the game area D30} and an open state in which a game ball can enter (a state in which the ball receiving member protrudes into the game area D30). Here, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d in the present embodiment adopts an electric accessory in which the ball receiving portion slides back and forth (so-called tongue electric), and when it is in the open state, the game A game ball is received by a ball receiving member projecting to the area D30, and the game ball is guided to the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s (arranged inside the game board). In addition, in this embodiment, as the electric accessory, an electric accessory is adopted in which the ball receiving member slides back and forth so that it becomes difficult to receive the game ball in the opening operation in a short time. A so-called tulip-shaped electric accessory that can take a closed state in which a game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and an open state in which a game ball is easier to enter than the closed state may be employed. .

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided separately, and the game flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) The ball is structured so as to be easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. On the other hand, a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (with reference to the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the second main game start opening B10 while it is difficult to be guided to the first main game start opening A10. . It should be noted that "easily guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the number of incoming balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the side of the second main game start port B10, but it is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the side of the first main game start port A10. may Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter B10 are arranged apart from each other, but it is not limited to this, and the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter A10 are arranged separately. It may be arranged so as to overlap the second main game starter B10, and in that case, the upper part of the second main game starter B10 is blocked by the existence of the first main game starter A10. You may

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start hole H10, and generates auxiliary game start entrance ball information indicating the entrance ball at the time of entrance. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starter H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10.

Next, the general winning opening P10 includes a general winning opening ball detection device P11s. The general winning opening ball detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening P10, and generates general winning opening ball information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. A predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls by entering the game balls into the general winning hole P10. In addition, a plurality of general winning openings P10 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and a game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) , are easy to enter into the general winning hole P10. There is no problem even if the number of the general winning holes P10 is changed. ) may be considered easy to enter.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10, while the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) ) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10 {However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) may also be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10}.

Next, above the out port C80 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30), there are provided a first big winning hole C10 and a second big winning hole C20. The game ball flowing down the standard) is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole C80.

Next, the first big winning hole C10 is a horizontally rectangular out hole that opens when the first main game pattern (special pattern) or the second main game pattern (special pattern) stops as a jackpot pattern. This is a prize winning opening corresponding to the main game located above C80 (especially on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and a first large winning opening and a solenoid C13). Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering the first big winning hole C10. to generate The first big winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 between a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first big winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins (the first 1. Excite the big winning opening solenoid C13 to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big winning opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called The big prize opening itself has a box-shaped member which is a slide type attacker and can accept game balls that protrude from the game area D30 and flow down the game area D30, and the box-shaped member is in the advancing state. The large winning opening is closed by obstructing the acceptance of the game ball into the box-shaped member, and when it is in the retracted state, the big winning opening is opened by allowing the reception of the game ball into the box-shaped member. ), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 is a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game pattern (special pattern) or the second main game pattern (special pattern) stops with a big win pattern, and is out. This is a prize winning opening corresponding to the main game located above the opening C80 (particularly on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second large winning opening and a solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. to generate A game ball entered into the second big winning hole C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning hole winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d changes the second big winning hole C20 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second big winning hole C20 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. Make it variable (make it variable by energizing the second big winning opening solenoid C23). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In that case, for example, a state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the big winning opening protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted toward the player side (so-called The big prize opening itself has a box-shaped member which is a slide type attacker and can accept game balls that protrude from the game area D30 and flow down the game area D30, and the box-shaped member is in the advancing state. The large winning opening is closed by obstructing the acceptance of the game ball into the box-shaped member, and when it is in the retracted state, the big winning opening is opened by allowing the reception of the game ball into the box-shaped member. ), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning hole is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is associated with the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes display, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g). A symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is provided. Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is equal to the first main game (second main game). It corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". ” and ``-'' for failure {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game pattern is displayed. It is preferable to display by a symbol or the like using In addition, the display of the number of holds is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display the number of holds for up to four (for example, it is composed of one lamp, number 1: lighting, number of holds 2: flashing at low speed, number of holds 3: flashing at medium speed, number of holds 4: flashing at high speed}.

It should be noted that the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a role in production, so in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is used. is set to an inconspicuous size. However, in the case of adopting a method in which the first main game pattern (second main game pattern) itself has a role in production and the first decorative pattern (second decorative pattern) is not displayed, the production described later The first main game symbols (second main game symbols) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes the display of effect images including decorative symbols that fluctuate and stop interlocking with the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which effects including variable display of decorative symbols are executed. Here, the display area SG10 consists of a first pending display portion SG12 (and a second pending display portion SG13) for displaying main game pending information, and a moving image of a plurality of columns of decoration symbol variations imitating a slot machine game, for example. and a decorative design display area SG11 for displaying . In this embodiment, the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display, but may be composed of other display means such as mechanical drums or LEDs. Next, the first suspension display portion SG12 (and the second suspension display portion SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the suspension lamps of the main game symbols.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding auxiliary game symbols. Specifically, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reserve display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol variations pending (the number of auxiliary game symbol variations that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the performance display device SG, and has functions such as the passage of game balls, the protection of the performance display device SG, decoration, and the like. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like. It should be noted that it is also possible to display information relating to a ball entry, which will be described later, by turning on the game effect lamp D26.

Next, the ball entry state display device J10 displays the entry state of the game ball to the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general winning port P10 {non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game It is a display device that displays information whether the state (main game probability variation flag off and main game time reduction flag off) may be displayed) is normal or abnormal. It should be noted that an abnormal state of ball entry means that the game nail that guides the game ball to flow down toward the general winning hole P10 is bent in a direction different from that when the game machine was shipped, It is considered abnormal that it is difficult to enter even if the game ball is continuously shot toward it. In this embodiment, the ratio of the game ball entering the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 and the game ball entering the general winning port P10 is out of the assumed range. It is configured to determine that there is an abnormality when the In addition, although the details will be described later, the elements that can be displayed by the ball entry state display device J10 are not limited to those described above. It is a value obtained by dividing the value by the total number of shot balls and multiplying it by 100 (details will be described later).

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and controls the overall game operation (i.e., the game a main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players), and an effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content. SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes performance display, an error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs to notify the occurrence of an error, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and prizes for each prize opening A prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with a prize ball payout unit KE10, etc. that pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball tray D20 in accordance with the above, and the payout operation by the prize ball payout unit KE10 is controlled. a prize ball payout control board KH, an error indicator KH3 that displays the occurrence status of an error related to payout (for example, a 7-segment display), an error release switch KH3a for canceling a predetermined error, and an upper ball tray D20. A launching device D42 that shoots game balls (stored balls) into the game area D30 one by one, a launch control board D40 that controls the shooting operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine. E and a power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko game machine, are provided on the rear surface of the front frame unit D14 (opposite side to the game side).

Next, referring to FIGS. 4 and 5, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment and the principle of operation for paying out game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE10m driven at the time of payout. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to the stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters a winning hole in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and a prize ball signal is sent to the prize ball payout control board KH. do. Alternatively, a request for ball lending is made from the game ball lending device such as the card unit R to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes game ball payout. As shown in FIG. 5, the rotation of the stepping motor KE10m rotates the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated), and the game ball rotates. One ball is paid out. In addition, the paid out game balls are detected by a payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. It should be noted that the cross section C-C is a cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easy to see).

Further, the lower part of FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (dispensing motor position sensor) KE10ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (an example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measurement units and detects an object between the measurement units by light projection and reception. Here, the pair of measurement units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged with the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 interposed therebetween. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six concave portions formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion, it is turned on (state shown in the lower part of FIG. 4).

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to control and the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) for controlling lighting of the game effect lamp D26, execution of error notification, etc.; A power supply unit E for supplying power to the entire game machine including the control board is the main component. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stoppage of decorative patterns, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. and a sub-sub control unit SS for executing display processing such as variable display/stop display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG, pending display, and advance notice display. In addition, the main control board M, prize ball payout control board KH, sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for pre-storing a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. Equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.), and a backup area (and backup power supply) to retain information in the event of a power failure. ing.

Schematic configurations of the substrates and electrical connections between the substrates and devices will be described below. First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, the second 1 large winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning opening winning ball detection device P11s}, drive solenoids not shown (described above, first large winning opening solenoid C13, second big winning Solenoid C23, etc.), information display LEDs (not shown), etc. , first and second main game shared peripherals C, auxiliary game peripherals H), and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control section SM, sub-sub control section SS), and prize ball payout is performed based on the game progress. etc. to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) to the sub control board S about the performance/game progress and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used for the communication method). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. In addition, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side). one-way communication).

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE for executing game ball payout, and a device operable by the player that accepts a game ball lending request and sends the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R (sometimes referred to as a card unit R) for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit unit (firing control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching device D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is a separate unit adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money or the like may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes, as described above, the performance display device SG for displaying decorative patterns and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other driving devices for performance (not shown, but a so-called performance It is connected to a motor, solenoid, etc. of a movable body accessory for use. Also, by executing a predetermined operation (long press or press), the sub-input button SB can start or end the measurement of the base value, execute a predetermined effect, or start displaying the maintenance mode. is connected to the sub control board S. Further, it can be determined that the sub-input button SB has been operated based on detection by the sub-input button detection device SBs. In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS. Lighting control of the illumination lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as separate boards). (Although it may be possible to do so, there are merits such as a space merit and a reduction in the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Also, the division of work between the two controllers can be appropriately changed, for example, the sub-sub-controller SS executes voice control (preferable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Also, instead of giving physical prize balls as prize balls, electronic values may be given.

Next, the flow path of the game ball to be played will be described with reference to the image diagram of the flow path of the game ball shown in the lower part of the figure. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game balls launched into the game area D30 enter the respective ball entrances {first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, first big winning opening C10, first The ball enters one of the two major winning openings C20, general winning opening P10, and out opening C80}, passes through the ball entry sensor corresponding to each ball entry opening, and is guided into the game machine (inside the game machine frame D). . Here, the game ball entered into the first main game start opening A10 passes through the first main game start opening confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. After that, all game balls guided into the game machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged out of the game machine. It should be noted that, although not particularly shown in this example, a switch for confirming the entry of a ball {each entry opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the first big winning opening C10, the second 2 major winning opening C20, general winning opening) passes through a game ball, which is different from the switch for detecting the entry into each ball entry opening or a plurality of switches}. shall be

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B, first and second main game shared peripheral C, auxiliary game peripheral H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the production, and a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on payout instructions from the main control board M, and are connected so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) includes a sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), frame decoration lamps D18-L, It is also electrically connected to the speaker D24 and the like. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE having a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. In addition, the main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are data and programs in terms of hardware. , and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. FIG. The details of each means (apparatus) will be described below.

First, the main control board M comprises game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and progress of the game such as a special game or a specific game. game progress means MP that controls the game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information related to the game state etc. fraud detection information management means ME that controls processing related to errors and fraud detected by the gaming machine (and Fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb) for temporarily storing information related to error detection and fraud detection; Various game information (eg, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {eg, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss}, information on fluctuation mode (for example, fluctuation time), start signal/state information/end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} Information transmission control means MT (and unsent command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating commands; external signal output control means MG for outputting game-related information to hall computer HC via external relay terminal board G; and a prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out predetermined prize balls based on the above.

Here, the game information control means MJ includes a ball entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls into each ball entrance (starting opening, etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be obtained, and determines the result of the determination. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the number of balls entered into each starting hole during variable display as holding balls within the upper limit number. is doing. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first main game start hole A10 (and the first main game start hole confirmation sensor A11s2). Determination means MJ11-A, second main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second main game start opening B10, and a game ball in the auxiliary game start opening H10 Auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H for determining whether or not has flowed in, and a first large winning opening ball determination for determining whether a game ball has entered the first large winning opening C10 A means MJ11-C10, a second big winning hole entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second big winning hole C20, and a game ball entering the general winning hole P10. General winning entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-P for determining whether or not, Out entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-C80 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the out exit C80, total discharge A total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 (and a total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 that counts the number of balls entered) that determines whether or not a game ball has entered (detects discharge) to the confirmation sensor C90s; , ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b for temporarily storing information related to ball entry into the ball entrance, and under specific circumstances (for example, a specific game state, etc.), the number of game balls entering the first main game start A10 or the second main game start B10 is counted. and a general entry number counter MJ13c for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general winning hole P10 in a specific game state such as a state and a non-time-reduced game state.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and according to the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start port B10 It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number according to the determination result (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B that acquires a game symbol determination random number, etc.), and an auxiliary game random number for determining whether or not it is possible to acquire an auxiliary game side random number and acquiring the random number based on the determination result. acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H;

Here, the "random number" in the claims and this specification including the above is, for example, "0" to "65535" or " A value randomly selected from a predetermined range of 0 to 255. Moreover, the random numbers may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method of expressing values in order along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed (initial value ) is determined by an accidental value (initial value update method), a combination of these methods, and the like.

Next, the reservation control means MJ30 includes a reservation digestion control means MJ31 that controls processing related to the holding digestion and the start of fluctuation, and the first main game side random number acquired in the situation where the permission for fluctuation of the first main game symbols is not granted. is temporarily stored, and based on the determination result, the random number is retained in the first main game symbol retention information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the permission to change the first main game symbol is obtained. The main game symbol holding means MJ32-A determines whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number obtained in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission is not granted, and based on the determination result, A second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding random numbers in the second main game pattern holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game pattern fluctuation permission is granted, and an auxiliary game pattern fluctuation permission. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the auxiliary game side random number acquired in the situation that it is not down, and based on the determination result, the random number is stored in the auxiliary game design reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the permission to change the auxiliary game design is granted. and an auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding.

Here, the pending digestion control means MJ31 has a variation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not the conditions for starting the variation are satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol reservation means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol reservation means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H combine the random numbers, which can store up to four, with the reservation order. 1st main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, 2nd main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form of have.

Next, the game content determination means MN selects the stop symbols of each symbol based on the success/failure lottery means MN10 for determining whether or not to move to the special game and whether or not to open the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, and each random number. It has symbol content determination means MN40 for determining, and variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on each random number. Here, the success/failure lottery means MN10 consist of a first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbols, and a second main game success/failure lottery means that performs a success/failure lottery with respect to the second main game symbols. It has MN11-B and an auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success/failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success/failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the first main game symbols. a first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A, a second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a success/failure lottery for the second main game symbols, and a success/failure lottery for the auxiliary game symbols. Each has an auxiliary game success or failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of detailed table configuration will be described later.

Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 includes a first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining a stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), A second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining a stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number) obtained, and an auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. and an auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H for determining the stop symbols of the MN41-H.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining stop symbols related to the first main game symbols, The lottery table MN41ta-A for determining the first main game symbols includes various lottery tables that differ according to the winning/losing results. In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining stop symbols related to the second main game symbols. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ according to the winning/losing results. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H referred to when determining the stop symbols related to the auxiliary game symbols, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ according to the gaming state. An example of detailed table configuration will be described later.

Next, the variation mode determination means MN50 is the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbols based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, a second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game pattern based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbols. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to win/fail results and game states. In addition, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbols. The lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode includes various lottery tables that differ according to win/fail results and game states. An example of detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game pattern, and the auxiliary game variation mode The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ according to the game state (for example, normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variable game and time reduction game → lottery table for auxiliary game time reduction ).

Next, the display control means MP10 displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display portion B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling the stop display after changing the 1st main game symbol, and on the auxiliary game symbol display part H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the auxiliary game symbol for a predetermined time. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that performs control to stop and display after varying the game symbols.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C are timers MP11t-C for controlling first and second main game symbol variations that can be cleared to zero (for example, a decrement counter that is subtracted at predetermined intervals). , hereinafter, those similar to timers can be implemented with similar counters). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes a timer MP11t-H for managing auxiliary game symbol variations capable of measuring time.

Next, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B is used to determine whether or not the conditions for opening and closing the second main game starter electric accessory B11d are satisfied. The second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B and the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t that measures the driving (opening) time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. -B, the game ball remaining in the second main game starter electric accessory B11d after the closing of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is detected by the second main game starter entrance ball detection device B11s. It has a second main game starting port entry ball waiting timer MP22t2 that counts the waiting time.

Next, the special game control means MP30 includes a condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition conditions are satisfied. (Specifically, a special game content determination means MP32 that determines the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big winning Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and the opening and closing time of the second big winning opening C20), special game time management means MP34, and distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing a distribution game. Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes the first and second big winning opening electric role opening/closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first big winning opening electric role C11d and the second big winning opening electric role C21d. , and a winning ball counter MP33c for counting winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 includes a special game timer MP34t that manages the round time, an opening timer MP34t2 that measures the opening time of the big winning opening, and the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20). The game balls remaining in the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) after closing are detected by the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (or the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s). It further has a big winning hole entry ball waiting timer MP34t3 for measuring the waiting time. In addition, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table Although the details are not shown, it is a table that defines the big winning mouth to be opened, the maximum number of rounds, the execution contents of one round, etc. Also, the first round is executed after the special game is started. The start demo time, which is the waiting time until the game is played, and the end demo time, which is the waiting time from the end of the final round to the end of the special game, are also predetermined in this table).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether the probability variable end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variable game state is satisfied, and whether the end condition of the time reduction game state is satisfied. It has time-saving termination condition determination means MP52 for determination. It has time saving frequency counter MP52c which can count time saving frequency, respectively. Here, the probability variable gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of the lottery of the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern is higher than the non-probability variable gaming state, and the time shortening gaming state. means that the average value of the fluctuation time of the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern is shorter than the non-time reduction game state, and/or the second main game starter electric accessory per unit time This means a game state in which the ease of opening B11d is improved.

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the auxiliary game symbols become winning symbols with a high probability, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended ( open time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game pattern and the number of fluctuations of the second main game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (a probability fluctuation game without time reduction number limit except for). That is, the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted each time the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern change (stop). In addition, the probability variation end condition determination means MP51 and the time reduction end condition determination means MP52, for example, a specific game (for example, probability variation game or time reduction game) with a predetermined probability each time the pattern variation performs a lottery transition to the normal game It may have a function (in the case of a so-called pachinko game machine having a drop lottery function).

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (the game from the fluctuation of the first main game symbols to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the fluctuation of the second main game symbols to the stop). first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game H and special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, ON/OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) MB20b, and a specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of times of time saving, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) .

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C stop the currently varying first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol for which the variation start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

In addition, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game pattern information for temporarily storing information such as stop patterns related to the currently fluctuating auxiliary game patterns (auxiliary game patterns in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, the prize ball payout determination means MH communicates with the prize ball payout control board KH side payout information transmission/reception means MHsj (and transmission/reception a payout command temporary storage means MHsjb) for temporarily storing the information received, a prize ball counter MHc for counting the total number of prize balls based on the number of game balls entered, and a prize ball payout not completed (prize ball payout and a non-discharged prize ball information temporary storage means MHb for temporarily storing information regarding non-discharged prize balls for which information regarding the completion of disbursement has not been received from the control board KH side.

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are the first main game peripheral device A, which is the peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is the peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control section SM are based on the results of the game, including the variation of the decorative symbols in time synchronization with the variation of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols. It concerns the display of only non-influential information. These peripheral devices will be described in order below.

First, the first main game peripheral device A consists of a first main game starting port A10 that triggers the shift to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that is capable of displaying the first main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. ,have. In addition, regarding the first main game start opening A10, the first main game start opening detection device A11s for detecting the ball entering the first main game start opening A10 It has a first main game start opening confirmation sensor A11s2 for confirming whether there is, and only at one of the entrances (especially, only at the first main game start entrance detection device A11s). is detected, processing related to fraud or error occurrence is executed (details will be described later). When using two sensors to double-check incoming balls, sensors with different detection mechanisms (for example, a non-contact photosensor and a contact-type physical switch) must be used in combination. is suitable for detecting fraud.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that is capable of displaying the second main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. and have

Next, the shared peripheral device C for the first and second main games is in the closed state during the normal game, and in the special game (big win), the first big winning port C10 is opened under predetermined conditions. And a second big winning hole C20, a general winning hole P10 from which game balls are paid out when the game ball wins, and a ball entry state display device capable of displaying the state of ball entry into various ball entry holes. J10, an out port C80 for taking into the gaming machine a game ball that did not enter the inner start port or the winning port of the game ball launched into the game area D30, and from the start port, the ball entry port and the out port C80 A total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is provided on a path for discharging game balls taken into the game machine to the outside of the game machine and detects game balls discharged from the game machine.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H is the auxiliary game start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing of effect contents related to the effect display, and display control processing. , error notification control means SM30 for controlling error notification when an error occurs, and information transmission/reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. Each of the above means will be described in detail below.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing pattern information and display instruction information relating to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes a decorative pattern display control means SM21 that controls the display control process and the determination process of the variation mode of the decorative patterns and the stopped patterns, and a decorative pattern display control means SM21 that controls the reserved number management of the decorative patterns and the reserved display process. information display control means SM22; background effect display control means SM23 that controls background image determination processing and display control processing; notice effect display control means SM24 that controls notice effect content determination processing and display control processing; It has reach effect display control means SM25 that manages determination processing and display control processing.

Next, the error notification control means SM30 has an error occurrence determination means SM31 for determining whether or not an error has occurred.

Here, based on information from the main control board M side, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 includes a decorative pattern display content determining means SM21n for determining the stop pattern and the variation mode of the decorative patterns, and a decorative pattern display content determining means SM21n for determining the pattern fluctuation of the decorative patterns. Design display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various types of information (variation mode information, stop pattern information, various flags, etc.), and design variation time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of decorative designs. ,have. Here, the design display content determination means SM21n further includes a lottery (reference) table SM21ta for determining the content of the design variation that is referred to when determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design (details of the table). are not shown).

Next, the design reservation information display control means SM22 has a design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information regarding the reservation related to the decorative design.

Next, the background effect display control means SM23, based on the information from the main control board M side, the background effect (in this example, it is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern, the execution possibility of the special game based on the information on the hold) background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display contents of the effect suggesting/notifying the background effect display, and background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display.

Next, based on the information from the main control board M side, the advance notice effect display control means SM24, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect (in this example, it is displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols, and a presentation effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content and display timing of the performance suggesting and notifying the possibility of execution of the special game based on the information on the hold, and for temporarily storing information related to the announcement effect display. and a temporary storage means SM24b for information relating to advance notice effect.

Next, the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, the ready-to-win effect (mainly displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the ready-to-win state depending on the combination of the decorative symbols displayed stopped) It is a production that is executed after being notified that it has become, but it also includes production that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative pattern even if it is not in the reach state) Display content, display timing, etc. It has a ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n to be determined and a ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information relating to the ready-to-win effect display.

Next, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS includes sub-information transmission/reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission/reception with the sub-main control unit SM, and an image for displaying an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. and display control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further has an image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control section SM side and information relating to various image displays.

The performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to a performance display device SG that displays an image related to the performance based on information from the performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner, and a first pending display portion SG12 (and a second pending display portion SG13) for displaying main game pending information. ing.

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be capable of transmitting information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is a sub-game control. means controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. It should be noted that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the main control board M and one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 8 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. 1(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the game machine and performing initial settings (although not shown, register initialization, input/output port settings, etc. are performed), in step 1002, the main control board M presses the RAM clear button. input port, and whether or not the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation to intentionally clear the contents of the RAM has been performed by the manager of the game arcade, etc. determine whether In the case of Yes at step 1002, at step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, the information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, at step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing (Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process, which will be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016 . On the other hand, if No at step 1002, at step 1012, the main control board M acquires various information commands at the time of power failure stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M, and at step 1014, The acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the commands may be set at the relevant timing and transmitted by the control command transmission processing described later). may be used), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, at step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at approximately 1.5 ms intervals) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is set to T) is permitted {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing arrives, (b) in the figure is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, random number counter incrementing process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, hardware interrupts at approximately 1.5 ms intervals), the main control board M executes an entering ball detection process, which will be described later, in step 2000 . Next, at step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessary product drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1300, the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process which will be described later. Next, at step 1500, the main control board M executes special game operation condition determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process which will be described later. Next, at step 2100, the main control board M executes the number-of-entered-balls determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1900, the main control board M executes fraud detection information management processing. Next, at step 1950, the main control board M executes error management processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 3000, the main control board M executes prize ball payout command transmission control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 3500, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (information output to an external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.), which will be described later. Next, in step 1990, the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (transmits the command set in each processing described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before execution of this interrupt processing. Return to the processing that was in progress.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the game machine is powered off, the process of FIG. be done. That is, at step 1020, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, at NMI interrupt), the main control board M sets power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, at step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the entering ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, at step 2150, the ball entry determining means executes the auxiliary game starting hole entry ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2200, the ball entry determination means executes a main game start hole entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2350, the ball entry determining means executes a first (second) big winning hole entry detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2400, the ball entry determining means executes general winning hole entry ball detection processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 2500, the entering ball determination means executes a discharged ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2600, the ball entry determination means executes a ball entry detection process to be described later. Next, at step 2700, the entering ball determination means executes prize ball determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flow chart of auxiliary game start entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the auxiliary game start opening entrance determination means MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start entrance detection continuation flag is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the auxiliary game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-H determines that the input from the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is the entrance detection time (more than the relevant time, the auxiliary game start entrance When the entering ball detection device H11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is on for the time when it is considered that there is a entering ball at the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the auxiliary game start entrance determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2158, the auxiliary game start opening determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the following processing ( processing of step 2200).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2160, the auxiliary game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-H determines that the input from the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is the detection end time (more than the time, auxiliary game start If the entrance ball detection device H11s does not detect an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for the time considered to have passed through the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s. In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the auxiliary game start opening detection means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). Incidentally, even if No in step 2154 or step 2160, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flow chart of the main game start entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the first main game start opening determination means MJ11-A refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether the first main game start opening detection continuation flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the first main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-A determines that the input from the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is the entry detection time (this time or more, When the first main game start opening detection device A11s detects an input, it determines whether or not it is on for the time considered to have entered the first main game start opening A10. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the first main game start entrance determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. do. Next, at step 2210, the first main game start opening determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .

Next, in step 2212-1, the first main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-A determines that the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game It is determined whether the time saving flag is off). It should be noted that the case of the non-time shortening game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is off, or the case where the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off (when the electric accessory opening extension function is not activated). In addition, the time reduction game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is ON, or the case where the auxiliary game time reduction flag is ON (when the electric accessory opening extension function is activated). In the case of Yes in step 2212-1, in step 2212-2, the first main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-A determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the first main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the start entrance entrance ball number counter MJ12c, and step 2222.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2213, the input from the entering ball number counter MJ10c is within the detection time (if the first main game start entrance detecting device A11s has not detected the input for the time or more, the game It is determined whether or not the ball is off for the time considered to have passed through the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s. Next, in step 2214, the first main game start opening determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in step 2215, the first main game start opening determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , go to step 2222 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process proceeds to step 2222 as well.

Next, in step 2222, the second main game start opening determination means MJ11-B refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether the second main game start opening detection continuation flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B determines that the input from the second main game start entrance detection device B11s is the entrance detection time (this time or more, When the second main game start opening detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is on for the time considered to have entered the second main game start opening B10. In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the second main game starting opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B refers to the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game starting opening valid period flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the second main game start entrance determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, in step 2230, the second main game start opening determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .

Next, in step 2231-1, the second main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-B determines that the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game It is determined whether the time saving flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, the second main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-B determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the second main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the start entrance entrance ball number counter MJ12c, and step 2240. Thus, in the present embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game short time flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10, 1 is added to the counter value of the start port entry ball number counter MJ12c. It is configured.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2225 (when the entry of a game ball is detected during the period in which the entry into the second main game start opening B10 is not valid), in step 2232, the second main game start entry ball determination Means MJ11-B determines that there is an unauthorized ball entry to the second main game start opening B10, sets the second main game start opening unauthorized ball entry command (command to the sub control board S side), step 2240 transition to It should be noted that even if No in step 2231 - 1 , step 2231 - 2 or step 2224 , the process proceeds to step 2240 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2222, in step 2233, the second main game start entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-B determines that the input from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is detected for the detection time (this time or more, If the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether the game ball is off for the time considered to have passed the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s. judge. In the case of Yes at step 2233, at step 2234, the second main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. turn off. Next, at step 2238, the second main game start opening determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , go to step 2240 . It should be noted that even if the result of step 2233 is No, the process proceeds to step 2240 .

Next, in step 2240, the first main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-A (second main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B) detects the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s (second 2 main game start entrance ball detection device B11s) is turned on for fraud detection time (time exceeding the time detected as normal ball entry and determining that fraud is being performed) or more determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the first main game start entrance determination means MJ11-A (second main game start entrance determination means MJ11-B) stores the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn on the first (second) main game start opening long time detection flag in the flag area, and proceed to the next process (process of step 2350). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350).

Next, FIG. 12 is a flow chart of the first (second) big winning hole entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the first big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C10 (the second big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the flag area of the temporary storage means MJ10b for the ball entrance related information. 1 (second) It is determined whether or not the large winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the first big winning opening winning ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening winning ball determination means MJ11-C20) detects the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (second 2. Whether the input from the winning entrance detection device C21s) is on for the ball entry detection time (this time or more, the time when the entry detection device detects the input, it is considered that the ball has entered the entrance) determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 2354, at step 2355, the first big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the ball entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , determines whether or not the flag during the first (second) big winning opening valid period is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2355, at step 2356, the first big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20) stores the flag area of the ball entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn on the 1st (2nd) big winning entrance ball flag inside. Next, in step 2360, the first big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the temporary storage means MJ10b for the ball entrance related information. The first (second) big winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2370 .

On the other hand, if No at step 2355 (when the entry of a game ball is detected during a period in which the entry of a ball into the large winning opening is not valid), at step 2361, the first large winning opening ball determination means MJ11-C10 ( The second big winning hole entry ball determination means MJ11-C20) determines that there is an illegal ball entering the big winning hole, and the first (second) big winning hole illegal ball entry command (to the sub control board S side) command) and go to step 2370 . It should be noted that even if the result of step 2354 is No, the process proceeds to step 2320 .

On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2352, at step 2362, the first big winning opening ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening ball determination means MJ11-C20) detects the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s. Input from (2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21s) is detection time {when the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) does not detect the input for the time or more , It is determined whether or not the game ball is off for the time considered to have passed through the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s). In the case of Yes at step 2362, at step 2364, the first big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C10 (the second big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20) stores the flag area of the ball entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) big winning opening detection continuation flag inside is turned off. Next, in step 2368, the first big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C10 (the second big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20) determines the flag area in the temporary storage means MJ10b for the ball entrance related information. 1 (Second) Turns off the large winning opening long time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2370 .

Next, in step 2370, the first big winning opening ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning opening ball determining means MJ11-C20) detects the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (second big winning opening). If the input from the winning detection device C21s) is the fraud detection time {this time or more, the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects the input, the first big winning opening C10 It is determined whether or not it has been on for at least (the time during which it is assumed that an illegal entry into the second big winning hole C20 has been detected). In the case of Yes at step 2370, at step 2372, the first big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second big winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20) stores the flag area of the ball entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) big winning opening long time detection flag inside is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2370, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

Next, FIG. 13 is a flow chart of the general winning hole entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. In addition, the general winning hole P10 is a ball entry hole that pays out prize balls when a game ball enters, but does not affect the progress of the game, and is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball. It is equipped with a winning entrance ball detection device P11s. In addition, the ball entry determining means MJ10 has a general winning hole entry determining means MJ11-P for determining whether or not a ball has entered a general winning hole.

First, at step 2402, the general winning hole entry determination means MJ11-P refers to the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the general winning hole detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the general winning entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-P determines that the input from the general winning entrance ball detection device is the ball entry detection time (this time or longer, the general winning entrance ball detection device When detects an input, it determines whether or not it is on for a period of time during which it is assumed that a ball has entered the general winning hole. If Yes at step 2404, at step 2406, the general winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning entrance ball flag in the flag area of the temporary storage means MJ10b for entrance related information. Next, at step 2410, the general winning hole entry determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning hole detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2411-1, the general winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-P determines that the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the general winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-P determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). do. If Yes at step 2411-2, at step 2411-3, the general winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-P adds 1 to the counter value of the general ball entry counter MJ13c, and proceeds to step 2420. . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the general winning entrance ball entry determination means MJ11-P determines that the input from the general winning entrance ball detection device is within the ball entry detection time If the detection device does not detect an input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for the time considered to have passed through the general winning entrance ball detection device. In the case of Yes at step 2412, at step 2414, the general winning hole entrance determination means MJ11-P turns off the general winning hole detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 2418, the general winning opening ball determination means turns off the general winning opening long time detection flag in the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2420. It should be noted that even if No in step 2404 , step 2411 - 1 , 2411 - 2 or step 2412 , the process proceeds to step 2420 . Thus, in the present embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game short time flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (condition device When the operation flag is off), when a game ball enters the general winning hole P10, 1 is added to the counter value of the general entering ball number counter MJ13c.

Next, in step 2420, the general winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-P determines that the input from the general winning entrance ball detection device is the fraud detection time {the normal winning entrance ball detection device has detected the input for more than this time. In this case, it is determined whether or not the switch has been on for a period of time deemed to indicate that an illegal entry into the general winning hole has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the general winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning entrance long time detection flag in the flag area of the temporary storage means MJ10b for entrance related information. (processing of step 2500). Note that even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the total discharged ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 refers to the flag area of the entered ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 detects that the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is equal to or longer than the ball entry detection time (this time or more, and if the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 It is determined whether or not the discharge confirmation sensor C90s has been on for a period of time during which it is assumed that a ball has been hit. In the case of Yes at step 2504, at step 2506, the total discharged balls confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2508, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 adds 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 detects the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s for the detection end time (this time or more, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input). If not, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been off for the time considered to have completed passing through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s. If Yes at step 2510, at step 2512, the total discharged ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 2514, the total ejected ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the ejection confirmation long time detection flag in the flag area of the entered ball related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the next process (process of step 2600). ). Note that even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the out-going ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, at step 2602, the out-port entry determination means MJ11-C80 refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the out-port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the out-door entrance ball determination means MJ11-C80 determines that the input from the out-door entrance ball detection device C80s is the entrance detection time When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not the ball is on for the time during which it is assumed that a ball has entered the out port C80. If Yes at step 2604, at step 2606, the out-going ball determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-going detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the process of step 2620 is performed. transition to

On the other hand, if No in step 2602, in step 2610, the out-going ball determination means MJ11-C80 determines that the input from the out-going ball detection device C80s exceeds the detection end time (this time or longer, the out-going ball detection device C80s If the input is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is off for the time considered to have completed passing the out entrance ball detection device C80s. If Yes at step 2610, at step 2612, the out-going ball determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-going detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 2615, the out-going ball entry determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the long-time out-going detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if step 2604 or step 2610 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2620 .

Next, in step 2620, the out-going ball determination means MJ11-C80 determines that the input from the out-going ball detection device C80s has not been detected for the fraud detection time (this time or more, the out-going ball detection device C80s has not detected the input). If it is, it is determined whether or not it is on for a period of time during which it is considered that an illegal ball is entered into the out port C80. If Yes at step 2620, at step 2622, the out-going ball entry determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-going long time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to the next process. (Processing of step 2700). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flow chart of the number-of-prizing-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, at step 2702, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2702, at step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls payout related to the first main game start port A10 (3 in this example). to add. Next, in step 2708, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10 are to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2712 . On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712 as well.

Next, at step 2712, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the second main game start flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2712, at step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out related to the second main game start port B10 (3 in this example). to add. Next, in step 2718, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the second main game start port B10 are to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2722 . On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722 as well.

Next, at step 2722, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the first (second) big prize entry ball flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, prize ball payout determining means MH turns off the first (second) big winning hole entry flag in the flag area of entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, at step 2724, the prize ball payout determining means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize ball payouts (in this example, 13 ) is added. Next, at step 2728, the prize ball payout determining means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the first big winning hole C10 (second big winning hole C20) are to be paid out to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. (For example, information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732 . On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732 as well.

Next, at step 2732, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the general winning hole entry flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2732, at step 2733, prize ball payout determination means MH turns off the general prize winning opening ball flag in the flag area of ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information (for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out) to the effect that prize balls related to the general winning opening are to be paid out to the undischarged prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out from the first main game start port A10 and the number of prize balls to be paid out from the second main game start port B10 are the same three balls, but are not limited to this. The number of prize balls to be paid out may be changed. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out from the first main game start port A10 may be changed to 4 balls, or in the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls to be paid out from the second main game start port B10 may be 1 to 3 balls less than the number of prize balls paid out from the first main game start port A10.

Next, FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start entrance determination means MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the auxiliary game start entrance determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entrance related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, 4). . In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition judgment executing means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information indicating how many balls are reserved. is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Note that even if No in steps 1102 and 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessary product open flag is off. Determine whether or not there is In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game starter electric accessary product opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag is Determine whether it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and holds balls related to auxiliary game patterns. It is determined whether or not there is In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and sets the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). Along with acquiring, referring to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, the stop symbol is determined based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the holding ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

Here, the right side of the same figure is an example of the lottery table for determining the auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are "D0, D1, D2" as the stop symbols, and "D1, D2" as the winning symbols. The opening mode of the electric accessary to be opened at the time of the non-time reduction game is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed) when the stopped symbol is "D1". When the pattern is "D1, D2", the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds→closed). Further, in the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second→close for 1 second→open for 1 second→close for 1 second→open for 1 second→close), and stop. When the drawn pattern is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds→close for 0.8 seconds→open for 4.0 seconds→close). The stop pattern is likely to be a losing symbol "D0" during a non-time shortening game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol "D1" during a time shortening game.

Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H sets the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32-H updates the reservation information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the relevant reservation ball related to the auxiliary game symbols. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variable display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and determines whether or not the predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols has been reached. do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbols of the game symbols are fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

Next, at step 1230, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "win" (in this example, D1 and D2). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B is based on the winning pattern and game state on the auxiliary game side, and the opening mode (for example, during the time reduction game , In the case of the winning pattern "D1", the opening mode of 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed, and in the case of the winning pattern "D2", 0.2 Seconds open, 0.8 seconds closed, 5 seconds open) is determined, and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening/closing time) of the electric accessory is set to the second main game start opening electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B to set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start opening electric accessary product opening/closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessary product open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B starts the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and then the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Release the object B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B displays the second main game start opening effective period flag in the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1242 .

Next, in step 1242, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and at the opening time of the electric accessory It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the second main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, and the auxiliary game state temporary Turn off the electric accessory open flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1248, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B sets the second main game start opening ball entry standby timer MP22t2 to the electric accessory entry waiting time (3 in this example). seconds) and start. Next, in step 1250, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the second main game start opening ball waiting timer MP22t2, and determines whether the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1250, in step 1252, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means MP21-B is located in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The valid period flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1300). Thus, in this example, the valid period of the second main game starting opening (the period during which the second main game starting opening valid period flag is ON) is the opening timing of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. , until the electric accessary ball ball waiting time (in this example, 3 seconds) elapses after the closing of the second main game start opening electric accessary B11d, and the second main game start opening electric accession B11d is closed. Even if it is, it is configured to be able to wait for the entry of the game ball for the electric accessary ball entry waiting time.

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242; if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224; The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, the process proceeds to the next step immediately after displaying the stop symbol in step 1226, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by branching using the stop display fixing flag and timer. achievable).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance determination means MJ11-A refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game start entrance determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. do. Next, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and holds the main game (especially the first main game side). It is determined whether or not the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1306, at step 1308, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining winning or losing, the symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for doing are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are obtained in succession at this timing. Next, at step 1310, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1312, the suspension control means MJ30 sets the acquired information (suspension occurrence command) related to the first main game random number to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1990 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of ), and the process proceeds to step 1322 . On the other hand, if No in step 1302 or step 1306, the process proceeds to step 1322 as well.

Next, in step 1322, the second main game start entrance determination means MJ11-B refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether the second main game start flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game start entrance determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. do. Next, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and holds the main game (especially the second main game side). It is determined whether or not the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1326, at step 1328, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, three random numbers are obtained as the second main game content determination random number, the win/fail lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number, similarly to the first main game content determination random number. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number for the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range for each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game acquisition range) are set to the same. Next, at step 1330, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, at step 1332, the suspension control means MJ30 sets the acquired information (suspension generation command) related to the second main game random number to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1990). is transmitted to the sub-main control section SM by the control command transmission processing of 1), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1400). It should be noted that even if No in step 1322 or step 1326, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the pending digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not there is a pending second main game symbol. In the case of Yes at step 1401, at step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No at step 1401, at step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 1500).

Thus, in this embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game pattern, regardless of the presence of a reserved ball of the first main game pattern (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game pattern) Although it is configured to preferentially execute the pending digestion of the second main game symbol, it is not limited to this (pending digestion based on the winning order, and simultaneous parallel execution of both main game symbols It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws lots).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) relating to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1403, the pending digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the conditional device is in operation), the main game symbols are not fluctuating, and the main game symbols are held. Although not shown in this example, if a variable fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display pattern after the main game pattern is confirmed and displayed) is provided, during the variable fixed time, the next fluctuation start condition may be configured so as not to satisfy

If Yes at step 1403, at steps 1405 and 1406, the pending digestion control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol pending information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). While reading the temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game Deletion from the design reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and shifting the remaining information temporarily stored (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the success/failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, A main game pattern winning lottery is executed based on a main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, a winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the probability varying gaming state is higher than that in the non-probability varying gaming state. It should be noted that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this at all. Also, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small win) that cannot change the game state is not exemplified, but it may be configured so that a small win occurs (a small win is won).

Next, at step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbols are related based on the main game symbol lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined and temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates ("4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B" in this example) are selected. It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. In addition, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples and are not limited to these {for example, the lost symbols are not limited to one type of symbol, and may be configured to provide multiple types of symbols. Alternatively, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of variation and/or selection rate of the main game pattern is different from before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). may be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) draws the lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode), the main game pattern win-or-fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially the variation Mode Lottery Random Numbers) to determine the variation modes of the main game symbols, temporarily store them in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and proceed to step 1415.

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols is determined based on the lottery result of the main game symbols and the state of the main game time saving flag. That is, when the winning lottery result of the main game pattern is a hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time saving flag is on (time saving game state) It is configured such that the variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, different tables are not provided according to the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that different tables may be provided according to the number of reserved balls. do not have. Furthermore, it may be configured so that the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is ON) is relatively long {symbols on the second main game side When it is configured so that the execution of the variation is advantageous to the player, it is easy for the second main game to hold the second main game by reducing the symbol variation efficiency of the first main game (advantageous to the player). (because it is intended to build a situation), it is particularly effective when it is not possible to distinguish between the first main game side start opening and the second main game side start opening}.

Next, at step 1415, the game content determination means MN issues commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) related to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , variation mode information, etc.) and a command related to the current game state (symbol variation display start instruction command) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission processing in step 1990 is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by ). Next, at step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time period related to the main game symbol variation time to the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, at step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( On the second main game symbol display portion B21g), the main game symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variation modes stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, at step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Go to step 1420 .

On the other hand, if No at step 1403, at step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and change It is determined whether or not the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, at step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1420, at step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation will end to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1990). Next, at step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g ( The variable display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, at step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the in-fluctuation flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

Next, at step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes at step 1430, at step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, at step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). Incidentally, even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 23 is a flow chart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes at step 1454, at step 1456, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c by 1 (decrement). Next, in step 1458, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and determines whether the counter value (remaining time saving number) is 0 or not. In the case of Yes at step 1458, at step 1460 and step 1462, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time saving flag and auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then (process of step 1500). Note that even if No in step 1452, step 1454, or step 1458, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 1502, at step 1503, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1503, in step 1504, the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, the specific game flag (main game probability variation flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag). Next, at step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Note that even if No in step 1502 or step 1503, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

Next, FIG. 25 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, at step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. . In the case of Yes at step 1604, at step 1606, the special game control means MP30 turns on the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1610, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section side ( (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to step 1614. FIG.

Next, at step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine whether or not there is If Yes in step 1614, that is, if it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern (for example, keep opening open pattern, open/close pattern). Next, at step 1618, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, at step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1622, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big winning mouth electric accessory C11d (or the second big winning mouth electric role C21d) to drive the first big winning mouth C10 (or the second big winning mouth electric role). The winning opening C20) is opened, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) and started. Next, at step 1623, the special game executing means MP33 turns on the flag during the first (second) big winning opening validity period, which is in the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 1624. do. On the other hand, if No in step 1614, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1624 without performing the processing of steps 1616-1623.

Next, at step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the side of the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, at step 1625, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the ball entry waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 1625, at step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, the predetermined number of It is determined whether or not there are (for example, 10) winning balls. If Yes at step 1626 , go to step 1628 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1626, at step 1627, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) and determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) relating to the opening of the big winning opening is Determine whether or not it has passed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1627 , the process proceeds to step 1628 . If No in step 1627, the process returns to the caller of this subroutine.

Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 executes the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second big winning opening C20). Stop driving and close the first big prize winning port C10 (or the second big prize winning port C20) (although processing related to closing is executed in this processing, processing for actually transmitting a control command to the device is executed in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Next, at step 1629, the special game executing means MP33 sets a large winning opening ball waiting time (in this example, 3 seconds) to the big winning opening ball waiting timer MP34t3 and starts it. Next, at step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the ball entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1631. It should be noted that even if No in step 1625 , the process proceeds to step 1631 .

Next, at step 1631, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the big winning entrance ball standby timer, and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes at step 1631, at step 1632, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the ball-entering standby flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1633, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the flag during the first (second) big winning opening valid period, which is in the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 1634, the special game executing means MP33 resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, at step 1635, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes at step 1638, at step 1640, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1642, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1644, the special game executing means MP33 sets the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is to end in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1990). Then, at step 1700, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Note that even if No in step 1602, step 1631, or step 1638, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the specific game control means MP50 determines that the stopped jackpot pattern is a probability variable jackpot pattern (the main game pattern that becomes a probability variable game state after the special game ends, and in this example, 5A, 5B, 7A, and 7B). ). In the case of Yes at step 1702, at step 1704, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability variation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1708. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1706, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1708. Next, in step 1708 and step 1710, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time saving flag and auxiliary game time saving flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the next process (step 1900).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the number-of-entered-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates the total number G of entering balls by performing addition processing of the counter value of the starting entrance entering ball number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general entering ball number counter MJ13c. Next, at step 2104, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the total number of entered balls G calculated at step 2102 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (100 in this example). If Yes at step 2104, at step 2106, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates the entering ball ratio N as "starting entrance entering ball number counter value/general entering ball number counter value". Next, at step 2108, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the ball-entering ratio N calculated at step 2106 is within a predetermined range (1/4≦N≦4 in this example). If Yes at step 2108, at step 2110, the maintenance mode control means MO displays a normal display (for example, "00") on the ball entry state display device J10, and proceeds to step 2114. FIG. On the other hand, if No at step 2108, at step 2112, the maintenance mode control means MO displays an abnormality display (for example, "01") on the entering state display device J10, and proceeds to step 2114. Next, in step 2114, the maintenance mode control means MO clears the start-up entrance ball number counter MJ12c and general entrance ball number counter MJ13c to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Thus, in this embodiment, every time the total number of game balls entering the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10 and the general winning port P10 reaches 100, the first main Calculate the ball entry ratio N of the total number of game balls entering the game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 and the game balls entering the general winning opening P10, and the ball entry ratio N is Depending on whether the range is normal (“1/4≦N≦4” in this example), the display executed by the ball-entering state display device J10 is made different.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flow chart of fraud detection information management processing related to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession (for example, this processing is timer interrupt processing). This is the process executed in , and it is intended to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not it is continuously turned on in a predetermined number of interrupts. In the case of "predetermined number of consecutive times", it has the same meaning). If Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, fraud detection information management means ME determines that fraudulent radio waves have been detected, turns on the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb, Go to step 1912 . On the other hand, if No at step 1902, at step 1906, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is off for a predetermined number of times in succession. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of fraudulent radio waves has ended, and turns off the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. and go to step 1912 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1906 , the process proceeds to step 1912 .

Next, in step 1912, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1912, at step 1914, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that fraudulent magnetism has been detected, turns on the fraudulent magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb, Go to step 1922 . On the other hand, if No at step 1912, at step 1916, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is off for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1916, at step 1918, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of fraudulent magnetism has ended, and turns off the fraudulent magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. and go to step 1922 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1916 , the process proceeds to step 1922 .

Next, at step 1922, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1922, at step 1924, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns on the door open flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , go to step 1932 . On the other hand, if No at step 1922, at step 1926, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door open sensor is off for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1926, at step 1928, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns off the door open flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , go to step 1932 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1926 , the process proceeds to step 1932 .

Next, at step 1932, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame open sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1932, at step 1934, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released, and turns on the frame open flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. and go to step 1934 . On the other hand, if No at step 1932, at step 1936, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame open sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame open sensor is off for a predetermined number of times in succession. If Yes at step 1936, at step 1938, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released, and turns off the frame open flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). Note that even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950).

Next, FIG. 29 is a flow chart of error management processing related to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the error management means determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied (see FIGS. 73 and 74 for possible errors and control when an error occurs). If Yes at step 1952, at step 1954, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) indicating that an error has occurred and the error type information (by the control command transmission processing at step 1990). transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1956, the error management means determines whether or not the error cancellation conditions are satisfied (see FIGS. 73 and 74 also for the error cancellation conditions and the control at the time of error cancellation). In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to information indicating that the error has been cleared (the is transmitted to the control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000). It should be noted that even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000).

Next, FIG. 30 is a flow chart of prize ball payout command transmission control processing according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, at step 3100, the main control board M executes a payout control board transmission control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes a payout control board reception control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 31 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj refers to the input port of the second line (line for transmitting an on/off signal regarding whether or not prize balls are being paid out), and determines whether the payout signal is off. ie, whether or not a payout is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj refers to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and sends the unpaid ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side. It is determined whether or not there are prize balls that have not been transmitted. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj refers to the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb, and refers to the prize ball payout related error ( For example, it is determined whether or not an error related to a payout motor failure, an upper tray full tank error, a ball running out error, etc.) has occurred. In the case of Yes at step 3115, at step 3120, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj corresponds to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed this time, which is temporarily stored in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. A prize ball payout command (see FIG. 32) for the number of prize balls to be paid out is set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. Then, in step 3125, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj erases the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time from the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and shifts the subsequent information. to run. Next, in step 3130, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj transmits the prize ball payout command set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the next process (the payout control board for step 3200 receive control processing). Incidentally, even in the case of No in steps 3105, 3110 and 3115, the next process (payout control board reception control process in step 3200) is shifted to.

<<Details of commands and information sent and received between the main control board and the payout control board>>
Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described. Here, the command from the main control board M according to this embodiment to the prize ball payout control board KH consists of specific information indicating that it is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 1001 (identification information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls. For example, 0 (0000B) means 0 prize balls and 15 (1111A) means 15 prize balls. .

Next, the payout-related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be described. Here, as an example, the payout related information (prize ball payout related information or payout abnormality related information) includes a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, and payout motor error information. , prize ball device error information, tray full error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, the details of each error will be described later. If the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the error has not occurred. is occurring. Bit 0 relates to completion of prize ball payout, "0" means that prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 33 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, at step 3205, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj refers to the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb and determines whether or not the payout related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that error information (out-of-ball error, upper tray full error, other payout-related error) exists in the received payout-related information. Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb, turns on the error flag associated with the error, and pays out prize balls. The error information on the control board KH side is also managed (unifiedly managed) on the main control board M side. On the other hand, if No at step 3210, at step 3220, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud related information temporary storage means MEb, and sets an error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Turn off. Then, in step 3225, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout related information. In the case of Yes at step 3225, at step 3230, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj clears the prize ball payout command set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb (the prize ball payout command associated with the completion of the current payout), and then (process of step 3500). Note that even if No in steps 3205 and 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 34 is a flow chart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, at step 3502, the external signal output control means MG refers to the game state temporary storage means MB to confirm the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3504, the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1, and based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, transmits the signal to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal strip G according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). The external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning and symbol stop, current game state (normal game state, game state information output terminal for outputting information related to specific game state, special game state, etc.), error information for outputting various error information detected by an open detection sensor etc. when the door is open terminals for output, etc.} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by cable harnesses so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as a terminal for outputting payout-related information, which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal for outputting a signal during a jackpot (there are a plurality of terminals depending on the type of jackpot). ), a door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a start opening winning output terminal that outputs a signal when the start opening wins, and a ball shortage in the prize ball tank KT. Game-related information that is important for the game hall operator, such as output terminal for out-of-ball output that outputs a signal while it is in use, output terminal for the number of times of special design confirmation that outputs a signal when the special design is fixed, etc. This is an output terminal. That is, by using the output terminal for the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to avoid depletion of the output terminals for the important game-related information.

In this embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit the game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. there is That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, an outline of the information transmission system of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. A cable harness connects between G and the hall computer HC. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH and the hall computer HC are always connected. It doesn't mean that That is, an electrical signal (a signal of binary logic whose voltage is Hi level/Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is After being replaced by a physical signal (a signal of binary logic whose switch state is ON/OFF) by the unit, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to respective input/output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force closes the contact portion G2, thereby connecting the output terminal and the hall computer HC. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, thereby disconnecting the output terminal from the hall computer HC. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, a pulse signal substantially identical to the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G can be obtained by detecting the conduction period. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and This prevents illegal manipulation of the prize ball payout control board KH (so-called remote control goto). In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to prevent slanderous behavior and enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC. A photosensor having a light-receiving part is also configured to enable one-way communication (for example, light from a light-emitting part connected to the main control board M and prize ball payout control board KH is received by a light-receiving part connected to the hall computer HC). It should be supplemented that the signal can be received by reading it with the unit.

However, since it is configured to be temporarily replaced with a physical signal (switch state is on/off), the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, one signal on the external relay terminal board G It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input/output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input/output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of special symbol determination, It is customary to configure so that only information indicating that "one variation of special symbols has ended" can be transmitted).

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flow charts of FIGS.

First, FIG. 35 is a flow chart of a main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, at step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error control process at the time of abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, at step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes prize ball payout related information transmission/reception processing with the main control board M, which will be described later. Next, at step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout control process (at the start of prize ball payout/motor drive start), which will be described later. Next, at step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes prize ball payout control processing (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, at step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes prize ball payout control processing (during execution of motor drive), which will be described later. Then, at step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a motor error processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of FIG. , an error control means 3200 for controlling errors related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls in response to a prize ball payout command and a ball rental command. and a payout control means 3300 for executing payout processing. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the transmission/reception control means 3100 includes reception control means 3110 for controlling reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and transmission of information to the main control board M and the card unit R. and transmission control means 3120 for controlling.

Here, the reception control means 3110 further has main side reception control means 3111 for controlling reception of information (for example, commands) from the main control board M. FIG. The main side reception control means 3111 further has main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a for temporarily storing information transmitted from the main control board M side. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further has a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 for temporarily storing error information relating to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side.

Next, the error control means 3200 includes an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on/off state of an error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, An error control means 3230 for error control when detecting an abnormality in the operation of the ball, an error control means 3240 for error control when an abnormality is detected when an abnormality is detected, and an error control means 3240 when an error is detected when an abnormality in the path of the ball is detected. A ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 that governs control, a payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 that governs error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation is detected. A ball bite error occurrence timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball bite error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10, It further has a non-passage error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the period of error notification when a non-passage error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. In addition, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excess payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of excessive prize balls. In addition, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further has a payout interval extension control means 3251 for executing time extension processing of payout intervals relating to prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further has a retry operation control means 3261 for executing a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310 is payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 for temporarily storing the status related to payout (for example, whether or not payout is in progress, whether or not payout abnormality has occurred). At the time of the payout process, a payout counter 3312 for setting the number of game balls to be paid out, a step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. An excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the stator being excited when the excitation is being performed, and a predetermined time (ball passage waiting time) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation). It further has a ball passage waiting timer 3315 for timing time (motor pause time) and a unit payout counter 3317 in which the number of game balls to be paid out by the unit payout operation is set. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value reaches 0, but is not limited to this, and is an increment type timer. A configuration using a timer is also possible. Each subroutine will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. First, at step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of abnormal operation of the payout motor, which will be described later. Next, at step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of abnormal payout detection, which will be described later. Next, at step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, at step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of abnormal payout motor detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission/reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 37 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of detection of abnormal operation of the payout motor according to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality described later is detected, and to set a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds a threshold value. is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passing of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the condition that the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. It is a flag that is turned on when (withdrawal motor operation abnormality). In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 adds 1 to the counter value of the fraudulent payout cumulative counter 3231 (increments). Next, in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the fraudulent payout cumulative counter 3231, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). do. In the case of Yes in step 4114 , in step 4115 , the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 , and proceeds to step 4116 . It should be noted that even if No in step 4111 or step 4114 , the process proceeds to step 4116 .

Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation error detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and the next process ( It shifts to step 4120 (error control processing when abnormal payout is detected). Also in the case of No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4120 when abnormal payout is detected).

Next, FIG. 38 is a flow chart of error control processing at the time of payout abnormality detection, relating to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of excessive game ball payouts caused by the abnormality when a payout abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and when the count number exceeds the threshold, It is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout abnormality detection flag is set when a predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on a command transmitted from the main control board M side is exceeded and an excessive payout of game balls is detected (payout This is a flag that is turned on when there is an abnormality. In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and sets the excess payout number to the excess payout accumulation counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excessive payout accumulation counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). In the case of Yes at step 4124 , at step 4125 , the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the overpayment error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 , and proceeds to step 4126 . It should be noted that even if No in step 4121 or step 4124 , the process proceeds to step 4126 . In addition, the overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is only an example and is not limited to this. For example, the error may be canceled by pressing an error canceling switch or by elapse of a predetermined period of time.

Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 sets an excessive payout error as payout related error information in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121, and the next process (step 4140 error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected). If No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4140 when ball path abnormality is detected).

Next, FIG. 39 is a flow chart of the error control process when ball path abnormality is detected, according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to detect an abnormality in the ball path, which will be described later. Or, when an abnormality corresponding to the ball running out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is detected, along with investigating whether there is a small amount of game balls (ball shortage) abnormality in the prize ball payout unit KE10 , to turn on a flag indicating that an error has occurred. In addition, (2) when an abnormality equivalent to a ball running out abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout, the waiting time until the ball running out abnormality or ball shortage abnormality is resolved. is to create First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is ON. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is set at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. This flag is turned on when it is detected that the predetermined number of coins to be paid out is not reached under the condition that it is determined that the number of coins to be paid out is not enough. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the conditions for occurrence of the ball running out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are satisfied. Here, the conditions for occurrence of the ball-out abnormality or the ball-insufficient abnormality are not particularly limited. An example of the condition that the ball running out abnormality occurs when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected, and the ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths Existence) is provided with a game ball detection sensor, and when the existence of a game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, it is assumed that the ball shortage abnormality is occurring. In the case of Yes in step 4143 , in step 4144 , ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns on the ball path error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221 . Then, in step 4146 , the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 , and proceeds to step 4151 . It should be noted that even if No in step 4141 or step 4143 , the process proceeds to step 4151 .

Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 determines whether or not the conditions for resolving the ball run-out abnormality or ball shortage abnormality are satisfied. Here, there is no particular limitation on the conditions for resolving the out-of-balls abnormality or insufficient balls-abnormality, and in the case where the above-mentioned conditions for occurrence of out-of-balls abnormality or insufficient balls-abnormality are unsatisfied, an example in which the abnormality is resolved can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152 , in step 4153 , ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 turns off the ball path error flag in error flag temporary storage means 3221 . Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 determines the excitation timing (for example, 3ms×8 steps=continuous excitation to perform a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of 1 at 24ms) during normal operation, and the ball A passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4170 when an abnormality in the payout motor is detected). On the other hand, if No at step 4152, at step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 adjusts the excitation timing and the ball passage waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively lower than that during normal operation. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4170 when abnormality of payout motor is detected). Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4170 when abnormality of payout motor is detected). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, but for example, after performing a payout operation for one ball at a speed of 3 ms×8 steps=24 ms, wait for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). An example can be given of changing the excitation timing so that a time is provided, and after the waiting time has elapsed, the payout operation is performed again at a speed of 1 payout every 3 ms×8 steps=24 ms. Also, the changed ball passage waiting time is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 40 is a flow chart of the error control process at the time of abnormal detection of the payout motor, according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when an abnormality in the payout motor, which will be described later, is detected, and to retry the payout motor (the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute a switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to external factors such as ball engagement. In the case of Yes in step 4171 , in step 4172 , the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Next, at step 4173 , the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 . Next, at step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error in the payout related error information temporary storage means 3121 as payout related error information. Then, at step 4176 , the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 , and proceeds to step 4177 . It should be noted that even if No in step 4171 , the process proceeds to step 4177 . Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation to a standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of a motor error, which will be described later, and providing a wait time for the motor error to be eliminated within the predetermined time.

Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4177, at step 4178, the retry operation control means 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 4178 , at step 4179 , the retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Next, at step 4180 , the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 . Here, the predetermined number of steps during the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example of setting it to the same number as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms during the retry operation, which will be described later, can be given. Next, at step 4181 , the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 . Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 selects a retry operation excitation method (for example, a well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) related to stepping motor operation and a one-step switching speed for retry operation (for example, 6 ms). Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, at step 4184 , the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation in-execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (error control process at step 4190 when the payout stop abnormality is detected). do. Also in the case of No in step 4177 or step 4178, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at step 4190 when an abnormality requiring stoppage of payout is detected).

Next, FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the error control process at the time of the payout stop abnormality detection, according to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on a flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to detect a fatal error related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process. To disable the continuation of prize ball payout processing until the abnormality is eliminated. Here, the fatal anomaly related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process includes a communication error between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, a communication error between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and payout. The sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, the tray (upper tray) full tank abnormality, and the like can be mentioned. First, in step 4191-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 sets and starts the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) in the ball biting error generation timer 3200t, Go to step 4192-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the ball engagement error generation timer 3200t, and determines whether the timer value is 0. judge. If Yes at step 4191-3, at step 4191-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the switch non-passage error detection flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 sets the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) to the non-passage error generation timer 3200t2 and starts it, Go to step 4193-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the non-passage error generation timer 3200t2, and determines whether the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the switch non-passing error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4193-1. transition to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a has been pressed. If Yes in step 4193-1, in steps 4193-2 to 4193-5, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 generates a flag ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, payout operation incomplete game ball detection flag, payout motor error flag, switch non-passing error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

Next, in step 4194-1, the payout stop required error detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a communication error between the main control board M and the ball payout control board KH is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. . On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 when detecting a payout stop abnormality detection detects a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or longer). etc.) is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4196- Go to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 upon detection of an abnormality requiring stoppage of dispensing determines whether or not the tray (upper tray) full tank abnormality has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4196-2. Next, in step 4196-3, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 transmits a saucer full tank command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4196-1, the payout stop required abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the tray full error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4196-4. Next, in step 4196-5, the payout stop required error detection error control means 3270 transmits a saucer full tank release command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, in step 4197-1, the payout stop required error detection error control means 3270 determines whether or not a connection error of the card unit R is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns on the CR unit disconnection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4198-1. Move to On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 turns off the CR unit disconnection error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 in step 4197-3. -1.

Next, in step 4198-1, the payout stop abnormality detection error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, excessive payout error, prize ball device Error, payout motor operation error, game ball detection when payout operation is not completed, payout motor error, switch non-passing error) is determined whether or not all flags are off.

In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the payout stop abnormality detection time error control means 3270 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, the tray full It is determined whether or not all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit disconnection error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the payout stop required abnormality detection error control means 3270 executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). is paused, the payout operation is resumed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, if No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the payout stop required error detection error control means 3270 forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then (process of step 4200).

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of prize ball payout related information reception processing (for the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is information reception processing from the main control board M (and accompanying processing of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out), and the second half of the flow is information transmission processing to the main control board M. Therefore, the first half of the process of receiving information from the main control board M (and the associated process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out) will be described. With reference to 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" is when the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in driving operation, when the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time It is a flag that is turned on when the If Yes at step 4205, at step 4210, the main reception control means 3111 refers to the main reception information temporary storage means 3111a and determines whether or not a prize ball payout command has been received. If Yes at step 4210, at step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and determines the prize ball payout. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the set processing of the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout processing is executed. It should be noted that even if No in steps 4205 and 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225).

Next, the information transmission processing to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout-related error transmission flag is on. judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" is when the payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. The flag is turned on immediately after the error is notified to the main control board M side and then turned off. If Yes at step 4225 , at step 4230 the error control means 3200 turns off the payout-related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 . Then, at step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Also in the case of No in step 4225, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240).

Next, at step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when the payout control means 3300 determines that the prize ball payout is completed. If Yes at step 4240, at step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information indicating that the prize ball payout has been completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (prize ball payout start・Motor drive start)}. Incidentally, even in the case of No at step 4240, the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4300 (at the start of prize ball payout/motor drive start)} is shifted to. With this, the prize ball payout completion information transmission process is terminated.

Next, FIG. 43 is a flow chart of the prize ball payout control process (at the start of prize ball payout/motor drive start) relating to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. Here, this process is the process before executing the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side, the number of motor drive steps, etc. This is the process of setting. First, at step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 42) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in steps 4310 and 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag, and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. do.

Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of paid out prize balls set in the payout counter 3312 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3). If Yes at step 4320 , at step 4325 , the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the predetermined number of coins are paid out, and proceeds to step 4332 . The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize ball payouts set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out. 4332.

Next, at step 4332 , the payout control means 3300 sets the planned payout number in the current unit payout operation (that is, the payout number scheduled at step 4325 or step 4330 ) to the unit payout counter 3317 . Next, at step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j). Here, the excitation stator position specific counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position during payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches between the normal operation excitation method (for example, the well-known 2-2 phase excitation method) and the normal operation switching speed (for example, 3 ms ). Next, at step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) in the ball passage waiting timer 3315 as the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation. Next, at step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation executing flag. Here, the retry operation in-execution flag is a flag that is turned on while the retry operation related to the operation of the stepping motor is being executed as described above. Then, at step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next processing {prize ball payout control process at step 4400 (at the end of motor drive, prize At the end of ball delivery)}.

On the other hand, if No at step 4305, at step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is ON. If Yes in step 4345, the motor has already been driven, so the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout)} is shifted to.

On the other hand, if No at step 4345, at step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag refers to the case where the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor has been operated for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and the ball passage waiting time/motor pause time has elapsed ( A detailed condition will be described later). In the case of Yes at step 4350, the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4400 (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout)} is shifted to.

On the other hand, if No at step 4350, at step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317 to determine whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, whether or not all of the planned payout quantity by the current unit payout operation has been paid out). or not). If Yes at step 4354 , at step 4356 , the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 , turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320 . On the other hand, if step 4354 is No, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356 . That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is ON, the process of setting the motor driving step number and the like is executed again without being triggered by the reception of the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. If it is determined that the number of balls scheduled to be paid out by the unit payout operation this time has not been paid out, an abnormality that causes a ball-out error or a ball-shortage error is detected.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flow chart of prize ball payout control processing (at the end of motor driving/at the end of prize ball payout) relating to the subroutine of step 4400 in FIG. Here, this process is the termination process when all the motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) are finished to be driven, or when all the scheduled prize balls are paid out. . Here, step 4402 to step 4419 executes motor drive end processing, step 4420 to step 4425 execute game ball detection processing, and step 4430 to step 4462 execute prize ball payout end processing.

First, the motor drive end processing will be described. First, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. do. In the case of Yes at step 4402, at step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4405, at step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 to determine whether the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. It is determined whether or not all the number of steps in the current unit payout operation set in 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. If Yes at step 4410, at step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, at step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation in-execution flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 4416 , at step 4417 , the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 , turns off the retry operation executing flag, and proceeds to step 4418 . On the other hand, if No in step 4416 , the process proceeds to step 4418 . Next, at step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the resting state of the stepping motor (in this example, the excitation output is lowered and the current excitation stator position identification counter value (j) is continuously excited). Next, at step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315, and proceeds to step 4420. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 4420 also in the case of No in step 4405 or step 4410 . With this, the motor driving end processing is ended.

Next, the game ball detection process will be described. First, at step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. In the case of Yes at step 4420 , at step 4422 , the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317 . Next, at step 4425 , the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312 , and proceeds to step 4430 . It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 4430 also in the case of No in step 4420 . Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time an entering ball is detected, but is not limited to this, and multiple entering balls are detected. If so, it may be configured so that the value corresponding to the number of hits can be subtracted. With this, the game ball detection processing is terminated.

Next, the prize ball payout end process will be described. First, at step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes at step 4430, at step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the game balls corresponding to the number of game balls related to the payout are detected by the sensor even though the driving of the motor related to the payout has not ended), in step 4432, The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag when payout is not completed in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 , and proceeds to step 4435 . On the other hand, if step 4431 is No, the process also proceeds to step 4435 .

Next, in steps 4435 and 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the prize ball payout flag, and turns on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, at step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than zero. In the case of Yes at step 4441 , at step 4442 , the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Next, at step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and based on the count value, the number of excess payouts (for example, if the counter value is "-3", the number of excess payouts is "3"). is temporarily stored in the payout process related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 (during motor drive execution)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts are normally paid out), the following processing {prize ball payout control processing of step 4500 (during execution of motor drive)}. In this example, when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, overpayment is detected. When a predetermined time (for example, sufficient detection standby time until the game ball paid out by the drive is detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has passed, detection of excessive payout (payout counter 3312 value less than 0 determination of whether or not) can be executed (that is, excessive payout is an unexpected situation in which the number of game balls that exceeds the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out has been paid out). The occurrence of this unforeseen event, which is extremely difficult to occur by design, means that there is a malfunction in one of the dispensing mechanisms, or that fraudulent acts have occurred during the dispensing operation. (meaning that it is likely that

On the other hand, if No at step 4430, at step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passing error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, after the payout operation ends, a predetermined When the game balls for the number of game balls related to the payout operation are not detected even after the ball passing waiting time of time has passed, it is immediately determined that the switch non-passing error has occurred. It is not limited, and it may be configured to determine that a switch non-passing error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times.)

Next, at step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry action execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution waiting flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor driving as described above. In the case of Yes at step 4447, at step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the following processing {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 ( (during execution of motor drive)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4447, in steps 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry action execution standby flag, and sets the retry action execution permission flag. It is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 (during execution of motor drive)}. Also in the case of No in step 4445, the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 2400 (at the time of motor drive execution)} is shifted to.

Here, if No in step 4402 (that is, if the prize ball payout process is not being executed), in step 4470, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. judge. If Yes at step 4470, at step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and performs the following processing {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 ( (during execution of motor drive)}. Incidentally, even in the case of No at step 4470, the next process {prize ball payout control process at step 4500 (during execution of motor drive)} is shifted to.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flow chart of prize ball payout control processing (during execution of motor driving) relating to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, this process is a process of actually driving the motor based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, at step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is ON. The motor driving flag is a flag that turns on when a predetermined step counter number is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 43). This is a flag that turns off when all the excitation is executed. Here, if Yes in step 4505 , the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage means 3313 in step 4510 . Next, at step 4520 , the payout control means 3300 updates (increments by one) the exciting stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 . Next, at step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on the predetermined excitation method and switching speed. .

Next, at step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10 ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation related to the motor operation (out-of-step phenomenon due to ball engagement, etc.) has occurred. In the case of Yes at step 4530, at step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence or absence of the detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, at step 4555, error control means 3200 determines whether or not the rotor is rotating correctly, that is, whether or not a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal at step 4550. If Yes at step 4555, at step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout status flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to the next process (motor error processing at step 4600). If No at step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (motor error processing at step 4600). The motor error flag in means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4600 for motor error processing).

Next, FIG. 46 is a flow chart of motor error processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. First, the purpose of this processing is to forcibly shift the motor drive to a rest state when a motor error is detected. First, at step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 in FIG. 45, it is detected at a predetermined detection timing whether or not the motor is at a predetermined rotational position. and the motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes at step 4605, at step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, at step 4615 , the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 . Then, at step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and proceeds to the next process (error detection process at step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time was not executed due to the occurrence of a motor error. 4415). Note that even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100).

Next, referring to FIGS. 47 to 52, the control processing executed by the sub-main control section SM will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-control board S (especially on the side of the sub-main control section SM) in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4(d) is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting such as when power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the game machine is powered on, in step 5002, the sub-main control unit SM performs initial processing (for example, receiving RAM clear information from the main control board M side) based on the information received from the main control board M side. If so, initialize the RAM on the sub-control board S side, and if various information commands are received from the main control board M side, set and restore performance-related information at the time of power failure, etc.). . After that, the process shifts to loop processing for repeatedly executing (e), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM.

Here, when (e) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. to run. Next, at step 5400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 5500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes decorative symbol display control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 5600, the sub-game control means (sub-main control section) SM executes special game-related display control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 5700, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes an error notification execution process which will be described later. Next, in step 5020, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control section SM adopts a mode of loop processing the sub-main side routine (steps 5100 to 5700 and step 5020) after resetting.

Further, the processing of FIG. 4(f) is the interrupt processing of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the signal state from the STB signal line is turned on), in step 5004, the sub-main control unit SM receives a signal from the main control board M side. Check the command input port (input port of the data signal line described above). Then, in step 5006, the sub-main control unit SM stores the command sent from the main control board M side in the RAM (for example, main-side information temporary storage means SM11b) of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result. is temporarily stored, and the process executed immediately before this interrupt process is resumed.

Next, the process of FIG. 10G is a flow chart of the power failure process when receiving a power failure signal from the power supply unit E, the main control board M, or the like, for example. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, at step 5014, the sub-main control section SM stores the game-related information stored in the RAM in the save area. Next, at step 5016, the sub-main control unit SM starts supplying reserve power to the save area. Next, at step 5018, the sub-main control unit SM prohibits execution of interrupt processing, and shifts to a power failure waiting loop. In addition, it is not limited to this, and an area to which reserve power is automatically supplied even after power failure is provided in RAM (or a RAM is provided to which reserve power is automatically supplied), and game-related information is stored in the area may be configured to be stored in

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 5100 in FIG. First, in step 5102, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and issues a new reservation generation command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. pending information) is received. In the case of Yes in step 5102, in step 5104, the binding reservation information display control means SM22 controls the binding reservation counter in the binding reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game, Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the second main game). Next, in step 5106, the binding pending information display control means SM22, based on the pending generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, binds the pending information (in particular, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery). It is temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 5116.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5102, in step 5108, the design reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether a pattern variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. determine whether or not In the case of Yes at step 5108, at step 5110, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, at step 5112, the design reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the design reservation information display control means SM22 from the design reservation information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining reservation information. Next, in step 5114, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM accesses the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the design content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5116. . Next, in step 5116, the design reservation information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS to display the display on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first reservation display section SG12 and the second reservation display section SG13). The same number of pending display lamps as the value of the pending pending counter in the temporary storage means SM22b for pending information is displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5400). If No in step 5108 , the process proceeds to step 5116 .

Next, FIG. 49 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5400 in FIG. First, at step 5402, the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 5402, at step 5404, the design display content determination means SM21n turns off the design content determination permission flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 5406, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25n) determine the pattern information ( With reference to the stopped symbols/variation modes related to the main game symbols) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the design variation, the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols {for example, when the stopped symbols related to the main game symbols are the jackpot symbols, , if it is a double pattern such as "7, 7, 7", or if it is a losing pattern, a loose pattern such as "1, 3, 5"} and a variation mode {for example, a variation mode related to the main game pattern is for a short time In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, and in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice performance related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach performance) Temporarily stored in related information temporary storage means SM25b).

Next, at step 5408, the design display content determination means SM21n turns on the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (step 5500). Transition. Note that even if No in step 5402, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5500).

Next, FIG. 50 is a flow chart of the decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. First, at step 5502, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. If Yes at step 5502, at step 5504, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 5506, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns on the design fluctuating flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, at step 5508, the decorative design display control means SM21 starts the design variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 5510. It should be noted that even if No in step 5502 , the process proceeds to step 5510 .

Next, at step 5510, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the design changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 5510, at step 5511, the decorative design display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 5512, the decorative design display control means SM21, based on the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the decorative design. Determine whether or not it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 5512, in step 5514, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). , go to step 5530 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5512, in step 5516, the decorative design display control means SM21 performs decoration based on the design variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 5516, at step 5518, the decorative pattern display control means SM21 sets a decorative pattern stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process at step 5020, the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 5530 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5516, in step 5520, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) store the design fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM24). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image and the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5520, in step 5522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the ready-to-win effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 5020). , the data is transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS side), and the process proceeds to step 5530 . It should be noted that even if No in step 5520 , the process proceeds to step 5530 .

Next, at step 5530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game symbol is displayed from the main control board M side). determines whether or not information indicating that the symbol is to be stopped is received). In the case of Yes in step 5530, in step 5532, the decorative design display control means SM21 sets the decorative design stop display command (determined display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5020). be done). Next, at step 5534, the decorative design display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 5536, the decorative design display control means SM21 turns off the design changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5600). do. Note that even if No in step 5510 or step 5530, the process proceeds to the next process (step 5600).

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. First, at step 5602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5602, in step 5604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. do. In the case of Yes in step 5604, in step 5606, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines that the jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state). ). If Yes in step 5606 , go to step 5610 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5606 (in the case of the first hit), in step 5608 the background effect display control means SM23 resets (clears to zero) the value of the number of consecutive villas counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 5610.

Next, at step 5610, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to (increments) the value of the consecutive villa number counter SM23c2. Next, in steps 5612 and 5614, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the big hit is achieved on the effect display device SG. Start display is performed (appropriate display is performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 5616 . Note that if step 5602 is No, the process proceeds to step 5616 as well.

Next, at step 5616, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of prizes won on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (playability and the type of jackpot, etc., and may be executed as necessary). Next, at step 5618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the number of consecutive villas counter SM23c2 and determines whether or not the counter value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 10). In the case of Yes in step 5618, in step 5620, background effect display control means SM23 refers to design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the jackpot being executed is the maximum round jackpot (for example, 16R jackpot, 7A jackpot). · It is determined whether or not it is a big hit related to 7B symbols. In the case of Yes at step 5620, at step 5622, the background effect display control means SM23 executes an ending effect {predetermined condition (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total Effect during special game or specific game, which is displayed only when fulfilling one or a combination of conditions such as all effects are generated) is set, and the process proceeds to step 5626. On the other hand, in the case of No in either step 5618 or step 5620, in step 5624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command relating to the display of the progress of the big win, and proceeds to step 5626.

By constructing in this manner, it is possible to make special effects displayed during the execution of the big win based on the number of consecutive games of the big win (the first win is not counted), and the second main game start port. In the case of a big hit due to the holding caused by the ball entering during the longest opening of the electric role object B11d, even if the big hit is the first hit, it is counted as the number of consecutive games, so the second main game start gate electric role The interest of the player can be attracted at the time of change related to the holding that occurs while the object B11d is open for the longest time. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to this. , etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

Next, at step 5626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 5626, at step 5628, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the end of the big win on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of big win). Next, at step 5630, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700). . Note that even if No in step 5604 or step 5626, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700).

Next, FIG. 52 is a flow chart of error notification execution processing related to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. First, in step 5702, the error notification control means SM30 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not an error occurrence command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes at step 5702, at step 5704, the error notification control means SM30 determines the error notification mode and error notification termination conditions based on the error type corresponding to the received error occurrence command, and executes error notification.

Next, at step 5706, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the error notification end condition determined in the above process is satisfied. If Yes at step 5706, at step 5708, the error notification control means SM30 terminates the error notification for the error that satisfies the error notification termination condition, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5020). Note that even if No in step 5702 or step 5706, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5020).

By configuring as above, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game time reduction flag is off), and , The winning ratio between the main game starting gate (first main game starting gate A10 and second main game starting gate B10) and the general winning gate when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) is calculated and displayed on the ball entry state display device in a different display mode depending on whether the ball entry ratio is normal or abnormal, thereby illegally changing the direction of the game nail. Even if the orientation of the game nail is changed due to the collision of the game ball, it can be determined by the abnormal display of the ball entry state detection device, and a more fair game machine can be ensured.

(Second embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the direction of the game nail (state of the game nail) is normal based on the ball entry ratio between the main game start hole and the general winning hole. is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for determining the state of the game nail, which is different from the present embodiment, will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 53 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2250 (second) and step 2300 (second), that is, after executing the special game control process described above in step 1600, in step 2250 (second), the main The control board M executes base determination processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes maintenance mode execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1900 .

Next, FIG. 54 is a flow chart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is steps 2509-1 (second) to step 2509-3 (second). 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of MJ11c-90. Next, in step 2509-1 (second), the total discharged ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 determines that the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time is shortened). flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2509-1 (second), in step 2509-2 (second), total discharged ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is not currently executing a special game (condition device operation flag is off ). In the case of Yes in step 2509-2 (second), in step 2509-3 (second), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is normal total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C91 {non-probability variation gaming state and When the non-time-reduced gaming state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time-saving flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the counter for measuring the number of game balls detected, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2600). Note that even if No in step 2509 (second) or step 2509-2 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Thus, in the second embodiment, a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game short time flag is off), and a special game is not being executed ( When the condition device operation flag is off), when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the entry of the game ball, it is configured to add 1 to the normal discharge confirmation number counter value.

Next, FIG. 55 is a flow chart of the number-of-prizing-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are steps 2706-1 (second) to step 2706-3 (second), step 2716-1 (second) to step 2716-3 (second), and step 2736- 1 (second) to step 2736-3 (second), that is, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc and the first main game start port. The number of prize balls paid out (three balls in this example) is added. Next, in step 2706-1 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2706-1 (second), in step 2706-2 (second), prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether a special game is currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off). determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 2706-2 (second), in step 2706-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 (non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction In order to measure the number of prize balls paid out when the game state (the main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) counter) is added to the counter value of the first main game starting port (three balls in this example), and the process proceeds to step 2708 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2706-1 (second) or step 2706-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2708 as well.

Further, at step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (3) related to the second main game start port to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2716-1 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines that the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2716-1 (second), in step 2716-2 (second), prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether a special game is currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off). determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 2716-2 (second), in step 2716-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 to the second main game start port. The number of prize balls to be paid out (in this example, 3 balls) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718 . If No in step 2716-1 (second) or step 2716-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2718 as well.

Also, after adding the number of prize balls (in this example, 10 balls) to the prize ball counter value in step 2734, in step 2736-1 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH , Determines whether the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game time reduction flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2736-1 (second), in step 2736-2 (second), prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether a special game is currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off). determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 2736-2 (second), in step 2736-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the counter value of the normal prize ball number counter MHc-2 to the prize associated with the general winning hole. The number of balls put out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738 . If No in step 2736-1 (second) or step 2736-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2738 as well.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flow chart of base determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, at step 2252, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates the base value as follows: "normal prize ball count counter value/normal total discharge confirmation number counter value x 100". Here, the base value is the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out for 100 game balls that have been shot in a situation where the special game has not been won. It is a percentage of the number. In this embodiment, the base value is calculated limited to the situation of non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (main game probability variation flag is off and main game time saving flag is off). In addition, since all the game balls that are shot are configured to pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, "all the game balls that have been shot = total discharge confirmation number counter value", "non-probability variable game state and All game balls shot when the non-time reduction game state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game time reduction flag is off) and special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off) = Normal time total discharge confirmation number counter value”. Next, in step 2254, the maintenance mode control means MO overwrites the base value calculated in step 2252 as the current base value, temporarily stores it, and proceeds to the next process {step 2300 (second)}. Thus, in this embodiment, the base value is calculated based on the normal total discharge confirmation number counter value and the normal prize ball number counter value, and is configured to be updated at any time. Note that the method of calculating the base value is not limited to this, and may be configured to be calculated each time a predetermined period has elapsed (such a configuration example will be described later).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flow chart of maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 (second) in FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, at step 2302, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the door unit D18 is being opened (the door open flag is ON). In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the firing handle D44 has detected a predetermined operation (for example, the sensor detects that the missile is being fired). In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2306, maintenance mode control means MO displays the current base value temporarily stored in the process of step 2254 on ball-entered state display device J10, and proceeds to the next process (step 1900). processing). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2302 or step 2304, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). As described above, in this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the ball-entering state display device J10 by executing two operations, that is, the opening of the door unit D18 and the predetermined operation of the firing handle D44. there is The firing handle D44 is a member that can be operated from the front of the game machine, but it is not directly connected to the main control board M, and the main control board M determines whether or not the firing handle D44 is operated. is becoming difficult. Therefore, in order to operate the maintenance mode by operating the firing handle D44 (display the information related to the incoming ball), the main control board M side receives a signal indicating that the firing handle D44 has been operated. must be configured to do so. A configuration for solving such problems will be described later. There is no problem even if the display conditions for other displays related to the ball entry shown in this example are the same as the display conditions of the ball entry state display device J10 illustrated in FIG.

By configuring as above, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state (main game probability variation flag is off and main game time reduction flag is off), In addition, the prizes of the main game starter (first main game starter A10 and second main game starter B10) and general winnings in the state where the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off) By calculating the base value from the number of balls paid out and the total number of discharged balls (the number of shot balls) and displaying the calculated base value on the ball entry status display device, more detailed game ball entry status can be displayed. It can be confirmed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the player is configured not to display the base value on the ball entry state display device J10, that is, to prevent the maintenance mode from being executed. For example, the maintenance mode may be executed by operating the firing handle and operating the RAM clear button on the main control board M side.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the standby demonstration screen (a screen displayed on the effect display device when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period of time, for example, when the firing handle has not been operated for 5 minutes) , the password display screen is displayed, and while the password display screen is displayed, the maintenance mode is displayed by operating the sub-input button and entering the correct password. may be configured.

Further, in the second embodiment, as the display contents displayed in the maintenance mode, information on the number of prizes (the number of game balls entered into various ball entrances) and the number of prize balls paid out may be displayed. As a specific example, the main game symbol display devices (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) are configured to have a display mode in which a plurality of (for example, 32) dot displays can be lit. Alternatively, the information on the number of prizes (the number of game balls that have entered various ball entrances) and the number of payouts of prize balls may be displayed by displaying the plurality of dots. In addition, by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, when it is determined that the incoming ball ratio is abnormal), a command is sent to the sub control board S side, and the predetermined condition is satisfied by turning on the frame decoration lamp D18-L. It may be configured to notify that the condition is satisfied, or to notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied by voice from the speaker D24. Further, the main control board M may be configured to have a maintenance mode running flag as a flag indicating that the maintenance mode is running. Specifically, when the maintenance mode running flag is off. , the main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) displays the main game symbol variations and stop symbols, while the maintenance mode execution flag is turned on. , in the main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20), the entry to the entrance (winning entrance) to be the target of prize ball payout It may be configured to display information about the ball (hereinafter referred to as information about the ball entering).

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side, and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as modification example 1 from the second embodiment, and only the points of modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 58 is a flow chart of maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 (second) in FIG. 53 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is step 2308 (second variant 1), that is, if the firing handle D44 detects a predetermined operation in step 2304, The maintenance mode control means MO sets a maintenance mode start command (a command to the sub control board S side and includes current base value information), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). . In this manner, the main control board M is configured to set the command for starting the maintenance mode to the sub control board S. FIG. The maintenance mode is a general term for the configuration for displaying information related to the entry of game balls into various ball entrances. Display is also included in maintenance mode.

Next, FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, the change from this embodiment is step 5750 (second modification 1) in FIG. Maintenance mode display processing is executed, and the process proceeds to the pending information management processing of step 5100 .

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5750 (second modification 1) of FIG. 59 in modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, at step 5752, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode start command {command set at step 2308 (second variation 1)} from the main control board M side has been received. . In the case of Yes at step 5752, at step 5754, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process at step 5100). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5752, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100).

By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off) and the main game starter (first main game starter A10 and second main game starter B10) and general A base value is calculated on the main control board M side from the number of prize balls paid out and the total number of discharged balls (number of shot balls) with the winning opening, the calculated base value is transmitted to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S By displaying the base value on the effect display device SG on the side, it becomes easier to start the maintenance mode based on the operation of the operating member (for example, the sub-input button SB) on the front surface of the game machine.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the modification 1 from the second embodiment, the maintenance mode is started by operating the firing handle D44 and the door unit D18. It must be configured to be detectable on the M side. Therefore, a configuration suitable for starting the maintenance mode with the current electrical configuration of the game machine is modified example 2 from the second embodiment. Only about is detailed.

First, FIG. 61 is a flow chart of the main game start opening detection process of the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the modification 2 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2212-4 (second variant 2) and step 2231-4 (second variant 2). is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), in step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the first main game starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-A determines the starting entrance entrance ball Set a command (a command to the sub-control board S side, a command indicating that a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general winning port P10) (step 1990) (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 2222).

Also, in step 2231-2, if the special game is not currently being executed (the condition device operation flag is off), in step 2231-4 (second variation 2), the second main game start entrance ball is entered. Judgment means MJ11-B is a starting port entry command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general winning port P10 command to the effect that the sub-main control unit SM has been sent) is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to step 2240. FIG.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flow chart of general winning hole entry detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2411-4 (second variant 2), that is, in step 2411-2, if the special game is not currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off) , In step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the general winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-P is a starting entrance ball command (a command to the sub control board S side, the first main game start hole A10, A command indicating that a game ball has entered the second main game start port B10 or the general winning port P10 is transmitted (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and step 2420. to process.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flow chart of the ejected ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2509-4 (second variant 2), that is, in step 2509-2 (second), the special game is not currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off ), in step 2509-4 (second variation 2), the total discharged ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 sends a discharged ball command (a command to the sub control board S side, and the total discharged ball confirmation sensor C90s is a game ball ) is transmitted (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1990), and the next processing (processing in step 2600) is performed.

Next, FIG. 64 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 5800 (second modification 2) and step 5900 (second modification 2) in FIG. The sub control board S executes base determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 5900 (second variation 2), the sub control board S executes maintenance mode display processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to the processing of step 5100 .

Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 5800 (second modification 2) of FIG. 64 in modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 5802, the sub control board S is set by the starting port entrance command {step 2212-4 (second variation 2) or step 2231-4 (second variation 2) from the main control board M side. command} is received. In the case of Yes in step 5802, in step 5804, the sub-side normal prize ball number counter SN10c {non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game time reduction flag is OFF) and the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF), the prize of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10 or the general winning port P10 It is a counter for managing the number of ball payouts on the side of the sub-control board S, and is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S}. Add and move to the processing of step 5806 . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5802 , the process proceeds to step 5806 . Next, in step 5806, the sub control board S determines whether or not it has received a general ball entry command {command set in step 2411-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side. . In the case of Yes in step 5806, in step 5808, the sub control board S adds the number of general winning opening prize balls (10 balls in this example) to the counter value of the sub-side normal prize ball number counter SN10c, and step 5810. to process. On the other hand, if No in step 5806, the process proceeds to step 5810 as well.

Next, at step 5810, the sub control board S determines whether or not the discharge ball command {command set at step 2509-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side is received. In the case of Yes in step 5810, in step 5812, the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c {non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game time reduction flag is OFF) and when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is OFF), the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is managed on the sub control board S side. and is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S} is added to the number of discharges (1), and the process proceeds to step 5814 . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5810 , the process proceeds to step 5814 . Next, in step 5814, the sub-control board S calculates "sub-side normal prize ball number counter value/sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter value×100" as a base value. Next, in step 5816, the sub control board S overwrites and temporarily stores the calculated base value as the current base value, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 5900 (second variation 2)}. As described above, in the modification 2 from the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the sub control board S side.

Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5900 (second modification 2) in FIG. 64 in modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 5902, the sub control board S determines whether or not the door unit D18 is being opened (the door open flag is ON). If Yes at step 5902, at step 5904, the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5904, in step 5906, the sub control board S displays the temporarily stored current base value on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). Note that even if No in step 5902 or step 5904, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). Thus, in Modification 2 from the second embodiment, two operations of opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub-input button (for example, OFF→ON for 0.5 seconds or less→OFF) are executed. Thus, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG. The sub-input button SB is connected to the sub-control board S and is configured to be operated from the front of the gaming machine. That is, the opening of the door unit D18 and the operation from the front of the game machine cause the base value to be displayed on the performance display device SG. There is no problem even if the display conditions for other displays related to the ball entry shown in this example are the same as the display conditions of the performance display device SG illustrated in the same figure.

By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment, the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is OFF) and the main game start port (first main game start port A10 and second main game start port B10) in a state where the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is OFF) The main control board M counts the number of prize balls paid out and the total number of discharges (the number of shot balls) with the general winning hole, and the counted result is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The sub control board S is configured to calculate a base value based on the information related to the count received from the main control board M side, and to display the calculated base value on the effect display device SG on the sub control board S side. Therefore, most of the processing related to the display related to the ball entry state of the game ball (especially the display of the base value in this example) can be executed on the sub control board S side, and the data capacity used by the main control board M can be reduced. Also, when starting the maintenance mode, the maintenance mode can be started by opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub-input button SB connected to the sub-control board S side. , it becomes easy to start the maintenance mode. When displaying the base value (or the above-described information related to the ball entry) on the performance display device SG, it is desirable to display it at a position that does not overlap with other displays. Specifically, the display of decorative symbols in the decorative design display area SG11, the pending display of the first main game side in the first pending display portion SG12, the pending display of the second main game side in the second pending display portion SG13, the error It is desirable to configure such a display (such as an error that the door open flag is turned on) and the display of the base value so as not to overlap each other.

Further, in Modification Example 2 from the second embodiment, the calendar function using the RTC function (real-time clock, details of which will be described later) has an authentication key for each date (the authentication key differs for each date). ), and may be configured to display the maintenance mode when a correct input operation is performed on the sub-input button.

In addition, in the modification example 2 from the second embodiment, as input modes of the sub-input buttons, secret commands and hidden commands (which exist as operation modes of the sub-input buttons but are not notified to the player). The maintenance mode may be displayed by executing the operation mode).

In addition, in Modification 2 from the second embodiment, the RTC function (real-time clock, details of which will be described later) is used to input commands (for example, execute a predetermined operation on a sub-input button) only at a predetermined time. ) can be executed, and the maintenance mode may be displayed when a correct command is input.

In addition, in the modification 2 from the second embodiment, winning information regarding which ball entered the ball entrance and how many balls were paid out is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S may be configured to count based on the received ball entry information. It may be an opening, an auxiliary game starting opening, an out opening, a game ball that has passed through a total discharge confirmation sensor, or the like.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side, and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as modification example 3 from the second embodiment, and only the points of modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The main control chip is mounted on the main control board M. The memory map shows an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of these, the space from "0000H" to "2FFFH" is allocated to the internal ROM, the space from "F000H" to "F3FFH" is allocated to the internal RAM, and the space from "FE00H" to "FEBFH" is allocated to the internal ROM. is assigned a register area (built-in register area) built into each circuit in the main control chip. By causing the CPU to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to cause the corresponding hardware to be accessed.

In addition, the built-in ROM consists of a first ROM area that mainly controls the progress of the game (sometimes referred to as a use area) and an area that mainly controls error-related processing that differs from the normal progress of the game (unknown area). A second ROM area that is sometimes referred to as a used area), and a first control area allocated to the space from "0000H" to "0ABCH" and from "1000H" to "1B6AH" are collectively referred to as the first ROM area, the second control area allocated to the space from "2000H" to "2263H", , is collectively referred to as the second ROM area. Note that the first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity that exists in the first ROM area and is accessed by the CPU exists in the second ROM area and is accessed by the CPU). (configured to be larger than the data capacity accessed from).

The first ROM area stores a first control area storing program code (a set of instruction codes for the CPU) and program data used by the program (read by the CPU processing based on this program code). and a first data area. Although the same figure shows a memory map image in the first ROM area, the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of unused areas are only examples.

The second ROM area stores a second control area storing program code (a set of instruction codes for the CPU) and program data used by the program (read by the CPU processing based on this program code). and a second data area that is located in the second control area and accessed by the CPU. The program code capacity to be accessed by the CPU is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPU), and the second data area is configured to be smaller in capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the amount of program data that resides in the second data area and is accessed by the CPU is smaller than the amount of program data that resides in the first data area and is accessed by the CPU). Also, the built-in ROM has a management area in which various settings used when operating the main control chip are stored. Although the same figure shows a memory map image in the second ROM area, the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of unused areas are only examples.

The first ROM area may include a first control area (sometimes referred to as a control area of the used area) and a first data area (sometimes referred to as a data area of the used area). The area from the top address of the first control area to the last address of the first data area may be called the first ROM area. Also, if the second ROM area includes a second control area (sometimes called a control area outside the use area) and a second data area (sometimes called a data area outside the use area), The area from the first address of the second control area to the last address of the second data area may be called the second ROM area.

Next, the built-in RAM consists of a first RAM area (sometimes referred to as a used area) that mainly stores information based on the progress of the game, and a RAM area that mainly stores error-related information that differs from the normal progress of the game. It has a second RAM area that is an area for storing information (sometimes referred to as an area outside the use area), a first work area allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F189H", and " The first stack area allocated to the space from "F1ECH" to "F1FFH" is collectively referred to as the first RAM area, and the second work area allocated to the space from "F210H" to "F22EH". , and the second stack area allocated to the space from "F3ECH" to "F3FFH" are collectively referred to as a second RAM area. The space from "F1ECH" to "F1FFH" in the first RAM area is allocated with the first stack area used when the program related to the first ROM/RAM area needs to store data internally. A second stack area is allocated to the space from "F3ECH" to "F3FFH" in the second RAM area, which is used when the program related to the second ROM/RAM area needs to store data internally. (However, the number of bytes in each area is just an example). It should be noted that the first stack area may not be included in the first RAM area and the second stack area may not be included in the second RAM area. The first RAM area is allocated to the space up to "F189H", and the second RAM area is allocated to the space from "F210H" to "F22EH". The first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area.

Note that the first RAM area only needs to include a first work area (sometimes referred to as a work area of the used area), and the first address of the first work area to the last address of the first stack area is the first stack area. You may call it 1 RAM area. In addition, the second RAM area may include a second work area (sometimes referred to as a work area outside the use area). It may also be called a second RAM area.

There is no problem even if the addresses in the unused area are changed, but it is preferable to provide an unused area between (the addresses between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of the memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 67, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPU and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed by the CPU are: Since they are arranged separately on the memory map (with non-consecutive addresses) and have an unused area in between, it is not possible to visually see the arrangement positions of both program codes on the program source code or dump list. (In addition, the same can be said when an unused area is sandwiched between them). Similarly, an unused area is also provided between the first control area and the second data area. Since the first data area has an unused area in between, it is possible to visually clearly separate the arrangement positions of both program codes on the program source code or on the dump list. In addition, since the first address of the first data area is a clear number such as "1000H", the design can be facilitated. On the other hand, no unused area is provided between the second control area and the second data area. The second control area and the second data area are areas that are not related to the progress of the game, and are relatively small areas. Since priority is given to reducing the capacity to be used rather than clearly dividing it visually, no unused area is provided between the second control area and the second data area.

Here, regarding the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent a modified program or the like from being written by an illegal act, it is possible to configure the ROM so as not to provide an unused area (unfilled area). It is preferable (eg, filling unused areas with all 0's, writing used areas down to younger addresses, etc.). In addition, in the first control area and the first data area, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data that is referenced in a game machine with different specifications) data used only for testing in the development stage, etc.) is preferably not provided. The first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first work area, and the second work area are used by moving to a lower address, and within the area (within the area) addresses) are not provided with unused areas (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "0ABCH" are not set as unused areas) It is preferable to In this example, all bits of the unused area are "0", and any bit of the area other than the unused area is "1" (not "0"). ing).

Next, FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 1030 (second variant 3) to step 1032 (second variant 3).

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
First, the timer interrupt processing is started, and after executing the processing of steps 2000 to 1600 as the processing in the first ROM/RAM area, in step 1030 (second variation 3), the main control board M is transferred to the second ROM/RAM Executes region processing calls.

<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>
Next, at step 2250 (second), the main control board M executes the above-described base determination processing. Next, at step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes the above-described maintenance mode execution process. Next, in step 1032 (second variation 3), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area, and thereafter executes steps 1900 to 1990 as processing in the first ROM/RAM area. Become.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment, the first ROM area and the second ROM area are provided, and the first RAM area and the second RAM area are provided. The data used in the first ROM/RAM area in the main control board M is configured so that the process of calculating the base value and the process of displaying the base value are executed in the second ROM/RAM area. The capacity can be reduced.

(Third Embodiment)
In the present embodiment and the second embodiment, the entry ball ratio N (starting entrance ball entry counter value/general entry ball counter value) or the base value (predetermined entry ball payout number of game balls) 100 times the value obtained by dividing by the total number of fired balls)) as the display of the information related to the ball entry, but the display method of the display related to the ball entry is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration relating to a method of displaying information related to ball entry, which is different from the present embodiment and the second embodiment, will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only the points of difference from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that in step 1024 (third) and step 1026 (third) in the process of FIG. Yes, that is, in step 1024 (third) in FIG. Next, in step 1026 (third), the main control board M turns off the maintenance mode flag and proceeds to step 1020 . In this way, the maintenance mode (display on the ball entry state display device J10), which will be described later, is configured to end when the power is turned off. In addition, in the same figure (b), after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 2300 (third), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described later, to the process of step 1900 Transition.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flow chart of maintenance mode execution processing according to step 2300 (third) of FIG. 69 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2310, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the in-maintenance-mode flag is off. If Yes in step 2310, it is determined in step 2312 whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (for example, a long press of 10 seconds or longer). Note that in this process, only the long press that started from the power on state is judged, and if the operation resulting in Yes in step 1002 is executed, that is, the length of the RAM clear button from the power off state is determined. If the execution of pushing is started, the result of this process is not Yes. That is, when the power-on switch Ea (sometimes referred to as power switch Ea) is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button, the result is Yes in step 1002, but the RAM clear button is continuously pressed from that state. also does not result in Yes in step 2312 . On the other hand, if the power-on switch Ea is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the step 1002 does not result in Yes, and the RAM clear button must be continuously pressed (the RAM clear button is long pressed). , step 2312 becomes Yes.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the maintenance mode control means MO sets the number of prize balls counter MHc {Each entrance to which prize balls are to be paid out (first main game starter A10, second main game starter B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Cumulative number of winning ball payouts calculated from power on} is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. Next, at step 2316, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag, and proceeds to the process of step 2318. FIG. On the other hand, if No in step 2310, the process proceeds to step 2318 as well. Next, in step 2318, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (pressing in this process means that the RAM clear button is turned off for 0.5 seconds, unlike long pressing). It is determined that the button has been pressed once when the following ON→OFF changes occur). In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the maintenance mode control means MO refers to the display content table during maintenance mode, and changes the display content corresponding to the display number next to the display number currently being displayed to the entry state. It is displayed on the display device, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Note that even if No in step 2312 or step 2318, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

Also, the table in the upper right part of the figure is an example of a display content table during maintenance mode. In the maintenance mode display content table, the display content (each counter value) corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 is set, and each time the RAM clear button is operated, "display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 The display contents on the ball-entered state display device J10 are switched to the display contents corresponding to "...". As a specific example of the display on the ball-entering state display device J10, when the RAM clear button is pressed and held for 10 seconds or more while the power is on, the prize, which is the display content of display number 1, is displayed on the ball-entering state display device J10. Number of balls counter MHc {Each ball entrance to be paid out prize balls (first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Based on the ball entering C20), the counter value of the number of prize balls paid out, which was determined to be paid out, is displayed. On the ball entry state display device J10, the number of balls entered into the starting hole counter MJ12c, which is the display content of display number 2 (the game ball that entered the first main game starting hole A10 or the second main game starting hole B10 under a specific situation After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the total ejection confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 (the display content of display number 3) is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. The counter value of the counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is displayed, and after that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the display content of display number 4 is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. The counter value of the general ball entry counter MJ13c (counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the general prize winning opening P10 under specific circumstances) is displayed. Also, when the RAM clear button is pressed while the normal ball entry counter value, which is the display content of display number 4, is displayed, the winning ball counter value, which is the display content of display number 1, is displayed. It will be done.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the maintenance mode can display information related to ball entry. and change the type of display in the maintenance mode each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, thereby making it possible to confirm information related to multiple types of ball entry. be able to.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the conditions for terminating the maintenance mode when the maintenance mode is being executed include power failure recovery and various entrances (for example, out exit C80, auxiliary game start exit H10, etc. The ball may be entered into a ball entrance that is not subject to the prize ball payout). Incidentally, the condition for ending the maintenance mode may be the entry of a game ball into a specific ball entrance which triggers the start of execution of a special game by entering the game ball.

In the third embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed, the input port of the RAM clear button is in the ON state. , 10 seconds or longer) is not determined (step 2312 does not result in Yes), and the maintenance mode is not started. However, when the input port of the RAM clear button is turned on after the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or longer). It is configured so that a maintenance mode can be started. Whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated is determined by confirming the input port of the RAM clear button multiple times at predetermined intervals. 1002), the input port of the RAM clear button is confirmed at an interval shorter than the execution interval of the interrupt processing, and after power-on (at the time of determination in step 2312), the interrupt processing is executed. The input port of the RAM clear button is checked at execution intervals.

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the third embodiment, the state of game balls entering various ball entrances is always counted from the time the gaming machine is powered on, and the display based on the count state is used as information related to ball entry. Although it is configured to display, the method of displaying the situation related to ball entry is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration related to the display method of information related to ball entry, which is different from the present embodiment to the third embodiment, will be referred to as modification example 1 from the third embodiment, and only the modifications from the third embodiment will be described in detail below. describe.

Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart of the main control board M side in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2300 (third modification 1) in the process of FIG. , in step 2300 (third variation 1), the main control board M executes a maintenance mode execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to a fraud detection information management process in step 1900 .

Next, FIG. 72 is a flow chart of the ejected ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2509-4 (third modification 1) and step 2509-5 (third modification 1). That is, in step 2508, after incrementing the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 by 1, in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 moves the handle. It is determined whether or not the in-operation flag (the flag that is turned on when the firing handle D44 is being operated) is on. If Yes in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), in step 2509-5 (third variation 1), the total ejection ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 sets the total ejection maintenance counter MJ11c-C92 (an increment counter, It is a counter that measures the number of game balls detected by the total ejection confirmation sensor C90s during the period when the shooting handle D44 is operated during the maintenance mode, and is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M). Add 1 and proceed to the next process (process of step 2600). Note that even if No in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). With this configuration, the value of the maintenance counter for the total number of ejections is incremented while the player is operating the shooting handle D44.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flow chart of the number of prize balls determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2706-4 (third variant 1), step 2706-5 (third variant 1), step 2716-4 (third variant 1), step 2716-5 (third variant Variant 1), step 2736-4 (third variant 1), and step 2736-5 (third variant 1). That is, in step 2704, after adding the number of prize balls paid out (in this example, three balls) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, step 2706-4 (third variation 1 ), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the handle operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2706-4 (third variation 1), in step 2706-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 (an increment counter, maintenance mode A counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general winning port P10 during the period when the shooting handle D44 is operated during the main control. (stored in the RAM area of the board M) is added to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) associated with the first main game starting port, and the process proceeds to step 2708 . Note that if step 2706-4 (third variation 1) is No, the process proceeds to step 2708 as well.

Also, in step 2714, after adding the number of prize balls paid out (three balls in this example) related to the second main game start port to the counter value of the number of prize balls counter MHc, step 2716-4 (third variation 1 ), the prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the handle operation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2716-4 (third variation 1), in step 2716-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the second main The number of paid out prize balls (in this example, 3 balls) related to the game starting port is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718 .

Also, in step 2734, after adding the number of prize balls paid out (in this example, 10 balls) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, in step 2736-4 (third variation 1) , the prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the steering wheel operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2736-4 (third variation 1), in step 2736-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the counter value of the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the general winning opening (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738 . Thus, in the modification 1 from the third embodiment, when the firing handle D44 is operated, the addition processing to the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 is performed separately from the addition processing to the prize ball number counter MHc. is configured to be able to execute Note that even if No in step 2736-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2738. FIG.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third modification 1) of FIG. 71 in modification 1 from the third embodiment. First, at step 2322, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the steering wheel operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2322, in step 2324, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the in-maintenance-mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2324, in step 2326, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not there has been a predetermined operation (long press for 10 seconds or more) of the RAM clear button (only long press started from the power-on state). If an operation that results in Yes in step 1002 is executed, this process does not result in Yes). If Yes at step 2326 , at step 2328 , the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag, and proceeds to step 2330 . On the other hand, if No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2330 as well.

Next, at step 2330, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has started. If Yes at step 2330 , at step 2332 , maintenance mode control means MO turns on the steering wheel operation flag, and proceeds to step 2334 . Also, in the case of No in step 2322 , the process proceeds to step 2334 . Next, at step 2334, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle has ended. In the case of Yes at step 2334, at step 2336, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates "prize ball maintenance counter value/total discharge maintenance counter value×100" as a base value.

Next, at step 2338, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the calculated base value on the ball entry state display device J10. Next, in step 2340, the maintenance mode control means MO turns off the steering wheel operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Note that even if No in step 2326, step 2330, or step 2334, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). As described above, in the modification 1 from the third embodiment, the base value for the period during which the firing handle D44 is operated after the maintenance mode is started by pressing the RAM clear button for a long time is It is configured to be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 at the timing of completion.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to ball entry can be obtained. It is configured to start a displayable maintenance mode, and is configured to calculate and display the base value during the period in which the firing handle is operated during the maintenance mode on the main control board M side, thereby actually playing the game. Even when it is desired to shoot a ball and check the base value for a predetermined period, it can be checked only by operating the shooting handle and playing the game.

In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, if the game ball enters any ball entrance before a predetermined time elapses after finishing the operation of the shooting handle, It may be configured to calculate information related to the number of hits, including the number of hits. In such a configuration, a sensor capable of detecting that the game ball is flowing down the game area may be provided.

(Modification 2 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the base value can be calculated and displayed while the firing handle is being operated in the maintenance mode, but the manner in which the maintenance mode is executed is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration, which is the execution mode of the maintenance mode, which is different from Modification 1 from the third embodiment, is defined as Modification 2 from the third embodiment. Only about is detailed.

First, FIG. 75 is a flow chart of maintenance mode execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third modification 1) of FIG. 71 in modification 2 from the third embodiment. First, the changes from Modification 1 from the third embodiment are Step 2341-1 (Third Modification 2), Step 2341-2 (Third Modification 2), and Step 2341-3 (Third Modification 2). ). That is, when it is determined in step 2326 that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (long press for 10 seconds or more), in step 2341-1 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO By transmitting a command related to the game state to the sub-control board S side, the sub-control board S stores the received command related to the current game state and a maintenance mode lighting mode table (main control board M side and sub-control ), the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current game state, Processing proceeds to step 2328 .

Next, in step 2328, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag, and proceeds to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). Note that even if No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). Next, in step 2341-2 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (pressing in this process means that the RAM clear button is off → 0.5 seconds or less). is turned from on to off, it is determined that the button has been pressed once). If Yes in step 2341-2 (third variation 2), in step 2341-3 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO uses a maintenance mode lighting state table (main control board M side and sub ), and changes the game state to the game state corresponding to the display number next to the display number corresponding to the current game state. Next, in step 2341-4 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO transmits a command relating to the current game state to the sub control board S side, so that the sub control board S receives the current and a maintenance mode lighting mode table (assumed to be provided on both the main control board M side and the sub control board S side) to be described later, the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current game state (game state after change), and the process proceeds to step 2330. FIG. It should be noted that even if No in step 2341-2 (third variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2330. FIG.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a maintenance mode lighting mode table. In the maintenance mode lighting state table, the game states corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 are set, and each time the RAM clear button is operated, it corresponds to "display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 ...". The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the transitioned game state. As a specific example of the game state transition, when the RAM clear button is pressed and held for 10 seconds or more while the power is on, the game state corresponding to the display number 1, a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (The main game probability variable flag is off and the main game time saving flag is off), and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in red, which is the lighting mode corresponding to the game state. do. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, it changes to a non-probability variable game state and a time reduction game state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game short time flag is on), and a lighting mode corresponding to the game state The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in blue. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the state is changed to a probability variable game state and a non-reduced time game state (the main game probability variable flag is ON and the main game time reduction flag is OFF), and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in green. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is on and the main game time reduction flag is on), and in the lighting mode corresponding to the game state A frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be a game effect lamp D26) is lit in yellow. If the RAM clear button is pressed in the game state corresponding to the display number 4, the game state corresponding to the display number 1 is entered, and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state is red. Then, the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) lights up. As described above, in the modification example 2 from the third embodiment, the game state can be changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode. Even when it is desired to check the base value in the variable game state and the time shortened game state, after changing the game state to the probability variable game state and the time shortened game state, the probability variable game state and the time shortened game state are operated by operating the shooting handle. You can check the base value in the game state. In addition, by changing the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) depending on the game state, the current game state can be seen at a glance, making it easier to confirm the base value. . In addition, in the modification example 2 from the third embodiment, every time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, the game state is changed, and depending on the game state, the frame decoration lamp D18-L (also as the game effect lamp D26) Good) is configured to have different lighting modes, but is not limited to this. Even if the RAM clear button is operated during the maintenance mode, the game state is not changed. -L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) has a different lighting mode, that is, the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) may be used to determine the game state. . In addition, the configuration for determining the game state is not limited to the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26). For example, (1) the type of sound output from the speaker D24; (2) Display mode by effect display device SG; (3) Firing strength of firing handle D44 (low strength→determined as left shot→determined as non-time reduction game state; high intensity→right shot) The game state may be discriminated by determining that the player is present→determining that the player is in the time-reduced game state).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, information related to ball entry can be obtained. A displayable maintenance mode is started, the game state is changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, and the frame decoration lamp (game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the game state after the change. ) is turned on, even if you want to check the base value for a predetermined period in an arbitrary game state, you can check it by simply operating the firing handle after changing to an arbitrary game state and playing the game. It can be done.

In addition, in the modification 2 from the third embodiment, it is possible to check the information related to the ball entry according to the game state, but as the display of the information related to the ball entry, the non-time-reduced game state (non-probability fluctuation Display the number of winnings only in the game state and non-time-reduced game state, and the probability variable game state and non-time-reduced game state), or display the time-reduced game state (non-probability variable game state and time-reduced game state, and , probability variable game state and time reduction game state) may be configured to display the number of winnings only.

In addition, in the modification example 2 from the third embodiment, as the display of information related to entering balls, the number of game balls entering the start hole, the number of game balls entering the general winning hole, the total number of prize balls paid out ( Cumulative number of prize balls paid out), number of prize balls paid out in non-probability variable gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state (or cumulative number of prize balls paid out), number of prize balls paid out in time shortened gaming state (or cumulative number of prizes number of balls paid out), can be displayed in the maintenance mode. In addition, it is also possible to open the big winning hole even during the maintenance mode (it may be configured so that a big win can be won, or a big win can be forcibly made).

(Modification 3 from the third embodiment)
Incidentally, in the third embodiment, in the maintenance mode, the effect display device on the side of the sub control board S is configured to execute the display related to the maintenance mode, but the manner in which the maintenance mode is executed is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that is an execution mode of the maintenance mode that is different from the third embodiment will be referred to as modification example 3 from the third embodiment, and only the modifications from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 76 is a main flowchart of the main control board M side in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. A change from the third embodiment is step 2300 (third modification 3) in the processing of FIG. That is, in the same figure (b), after executing the special game control process at step 1600, at step 2300 (the third variation 3), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process, which will be described later, and step 1900. fraud detection information management processing.

Next, FIG. 77 is a flow chart of the main game start entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2215-5 (third variation 3), step 2212-6 (third variation 3), step 2231-5 (third variation 3), and step 2231-6 ( This is Variant 3 3). That is, in step 2210, after turning on the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag, in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the first main game starting opening entrance ball determination means MJ11-A operates the handle. It is determined whether or not the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), in step 2212-6 (third variation 3), the first main game starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-A counts the starting entrance number counter MJ12c. The counter value is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 2222 . On the other hand, if No in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2222 as well.

In addition, after turning on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag in step 2230, in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), the second main game start opening entrance ball determination means MJ11-B determines that the handle is being operated. Determine whether the flag is on. If Yes in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), in step 2231-6 (third variation 3), the second main game starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-B counts the starting entrance number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the counter value and proceed to step 2240 . On the other hand, if No in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2240 as well. By configuring in this way, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 when the player is operating the shooting handle D44. becomes.

Next, FIG. 78 is a flow chart of general winning hole entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2411-5 (third variant 3) and step 2411-6 (third variant 3). That is, at step 2410, the general winning hole detection continuation flag is turned on, and at step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the general winning hole entry ball determination means MJ11-P determines whether the handle operation flag is ON. determine whether If Yes in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), in step 2411-6 (third variation 3), the general winning entrance entrance ball determination means MJ11-P sets the counter value of the general entrance number counter MJ13c to 1. is added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 2420 . On the other hand, if No in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2420 as well.

Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third modification 1) of FIG. 71 in Modification 3 from the third embodiment. The change from Modification 1 from the third embodiment is Step 2100 (Third Modification 3). ), the number-of-entered-balls determination process, which will be described later, is executed, and at step 2340, the handle operation flag is turned off.

Next, FIG. 80 is a flow chart of the number-of-entered-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2100 (third variation 3) of FIG. 79 in modification example 3 from the third embodiment. First, in step 2116, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates the entering ball ratio N as "starting entrance entering ball number counter value/general entering ball number counter value". Next, at step 2118, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the entering ball ratio N is within a predetermined range (1/4≦N≦4). In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the maintenance mode control means MO transmits a command indicating that the ball-in ratio is normal to the sub-control board S, thereby causing the sub-control board S to display the frame decoration lamp D18-L (game (which may be the effect lamp D26) is lit in a normal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2118, in step 2122, the maintenance mode control means MO sends a command indicating that the incoming ball ratio is abnormal to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S turns on the frame decoration lamp D18-L. (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in an abnormal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. Next, in step 2124, the maintenance mode control means MO clears the counter value of the start-up entry ball number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general entry ball number counter MJ13c to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2340). Transition. It should be noted that, instead of providing the process of step 2124, it may be configured such that the ball-entering ratio can be calculated based on the total starting-ball-entering-ball-number counter value and general-ball-entering-ball-number counter value obtained by operating the launch handle a plurality of times. .

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to the ball entry can be obtained. It is configured to start a displayable maintenance mode, and during the maintenance mode, a frame decoration lamp (game effect lamp D26) indicates whether the ball entry ratio between the main game start opening and the general winning opening is normal or abnormal. ), it is possible to confirm whether or not the state of entry of the game ball (the state of the game nail) is normal with a simpler display.

In addition, in the modification 3 from the third embodiment, the cumulative number of balls entered from the start to the end of the maintenance mode may be notified by means other than the performance display device, for example, when the power is on. It may be configured to start measuring the cumulative winning number from the timing when the long press of the RAM clear button is detected and the maintenance mode is started, determine whether the cumulative winning number exceeds the threshold, and notify. As for the mode of notification, as described above, the notification may be made by the lighting mode of the game machine frame, or the notification may be made by sound from the speaker. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal, such as a second-class pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to notify the information related to the ball entry by the lighting mode of the lamp or the sound.

(Modification 4 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, in the maintenance mode, the performance display device on the side of the sub control board S is configured to execute the display related to the maintenance mode. It is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that is an execution mode of the maintenance mode that is different from the third embodiment will be referred to as modification example 4 from the third embodiment, and only the modifications from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 81 is a flow chart of the main game start entrance ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the modification 4 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2212-4 (third variant 4) and step 2231-4 (third variant 4). That is, in step 2210, after turning on the first main game starting opening detection continuation flag, in step 2212-4 (third variation 4), the first main game starting opening entrance ball determination means MJ11-A detects the starting opening A ball entry command (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2222 . Also, at step 2230, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag, and at step 2231-4 (third variant 4), the second main game The starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-B sets the starting entrance ball command (command to the sub-control board S side), and shifts to the processing of step 2240 .

Next, FIG. 82 is a flow chart of general winning hole entrance ball detection processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. A change from the third embodiment is step 2411-4 (third modification 4). That is, at step 2410, after turning on the general winning hole detection continuation flag, at step 2411-4 (third variation 4), the general winning hole entering ball determination means MJ11-P issues a general entering ball command (sub control board command to the S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flow chart of the ejected ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2509-4 (third modification 4). That is, in step 2508, after adding 1 to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, in step 2509-4 (third variation 4), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 issues a discharge ball command ( command to the sub-control board S side), and shift to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third modification 4) of FIG. 69 in modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, at step 2342, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the in-maintenance-mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2342, in step 2343, the maintenance mode control means MO checks whether or not a predetermined operation (for example, a long press of 10 seconds or longer) has been performed on the RAM clear button (only a long press started from the power-on state). is determined, and if an operation that results in Yes in step 1002 is executed, this process does not result in Yes). In the case of Yes in step 2343, in step 2344, the maintenance mode control means MO issues a maintenance mode start command (a command to the sub control board S side, which is a command for starting execution of the maintenance mode on the sub control board S side). ). Next, in step 2345, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Incidentally, even if No in step 2342 or step 2343, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 85 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (especially the sub-main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, the change from this embodiment is step 5900 (3rd modification 4) in FIG. That is, in step 5900 (third variation 4), the sub control board S executes maintenance mode execution processing, and proceeds to step 5800 (second variation 2) base determination processing.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flow chart of maintenance mode display processing according to the subroutine of step 5900 (third and fourth) of FIG. 85 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, in step 5908, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b to determine whether or not the maintenance mode display flag is off. If Yes at step 5908, at step 5910, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a maintenance mode start command has been received from the main control board M side. . If Yes at step 5910, at step 5912, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the maintenance mode display flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b. Next, in step 5914, a display indicating that the maintenance mode is in effect is displayed on the performance display device SG, and the process proceeds to step 5916. FIG. In addition, when executing the display indicating that the maintenance mode is on the effect display device SG, the display of the decorative symbols in the decorative design display area SG11, the pending display of the first main game side in the first pending display portion SG12, the second 2. Configure so that the display of the second main game's holding display in the holding display section SG13, the display related to the error (such as an error in which the door open flag is turned on), etc., and the display indicating that the maintenance mode is in place do not overlap. is desirable. On the other hand, if No in step 5908, the process proceeds to step 5916 as well. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is included in the sub-control board S. On the sub-control board S side, control processing for starting the maintenance mode and information related to ball entry used in the maintenance mode are displayed. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is configured to execute the calculation process and the like. The maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b is included in the sub control board S and temporarily stores information for the maintenance mode display control means SM32 to execute.

Next, in step 5916, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the flag area of the maintenance mode display-related information temporary storage means SM32b, and the base measurement in-progress flag (the flag that is turned on while the base value is being measured) is displayed. is off. If Yes at step 5916, at step 5918, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been pressed. In the case of Yes in step 5918, in step 5920, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 sets the base measurement timer SM32t (a timer for measuring the period during which the base value is being measured), stored) is reset and started, and the timer value is displayed on the performance display device SG. Next, at step 5922, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the base measurement in-progress flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to step 5924. FIG. On the other hand, if the answer to step 5916 is No, the process proceeds to step 5924 as well.

Next, at step 5924, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been pressed. If Yes at step 5924, at step 5926, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 stops the base measurement timer SM32t and displays the timer value on the effect display device SG. Incidentally, when the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t is displayed on the effect display device SG, the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the first main game side suspended display is displayed in the first suspended display portion SG12, and the second 2. Make sure that the display of the second main game's pending display in the pending display section SG13, the display related to the error (the error that the door open flag is turned on, etc.), etc., and the display of the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t do not overlap. It is desirable to configure Next, at step 5928, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value (the base value during the period when the base measurement flag is ON, and the base value calculated at step 5816 in FIG. 87). Display on device SG. Next, at step 5930, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the base measurement flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to the processing of step 5932. Note that if step 5918 or step 5924 is No, the process proceeds to step 5932 as well.

Next, in step 5932, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode has ended (the maintenance mode ends due to the occurrence of power failure as described above). In the case of Yes at step 5932, at step 5934, the display regarding the maintenance mode on the effect display device SG is erased. Next, at step 5936, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the maintenance mode displaying flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)}. Note that if step 5910 or step 5932 is No, the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)} is also performed. In this example, the maintenance mode is terminated by turning off the power supply, but it is not limited to this. good too.

Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 5800 (second modification 2) of FIG. 85 in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. The difference from Modification 2 from the second embodiment is step 5818 (third modification 4). That is, at step 5818 (third variation 4), the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether the base measurement in-progress flag is ON. If Yes in step 5818 (third variation 4), the process proceeds to step 5802 . On the other hand, if No in step 5818 (third variant 4), the next process (step 5100 process) is performed. With this configuration, in the fourth modification from the third embodiment, the base value is calculated only during the period when the base measurement flag is ON.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the third embodiment, by long-pressing the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to ball entry can be obtained. A displayable maintenance mode is configured to be started on the sub-control board S side, and during the maintenance mode, pressing the sub-input button starts measurement of the base value, and pressing the sub-input button again By configuring to finish the measurement of the base value and display the measured base value, it is possible to confirm the base value for any predetermined period by performing a simple operation on the sub control board S side. Become.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the ball entry status display device on the side of the main control board M is configured to display the information related to the ball entry so that the ball entry status can be checked. is not limited to this. Therefore, the fourth embodiment is a configuration that is different from the present embodiment in checking the state of entering a ball, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 88 is a flow chart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3503 (fourth). That is, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG sets the number of prize balls counter MHc {Each entrance to which prize balls are to be paid out (first main game start A10, second main game start B10, general winning A counter value of the cumulative number of prize ball payouts calculated after the power is turned on for which the prize ball payout was determined based on the ball entering the hole P10, the first big prize hole C10, and the second big prize hole C20), Counter value of starting gate entry ball number counter MJ12c (a counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start gate A10 or second main game start gate B10 under specific circumstances), total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c -Counter value of C90 (counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s) and general ball entry counter MJ13c (measures the number of game balls that entered the general winning hole P10 under certain circumstances counter) counter value (in the fourth embodiment, in the RAM area of the treatment of the main control board M, the winning ball counter value, the starting entrance ball number counter value, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, and (constituted so as to store the general number-of-entered-ball counter value) is output from the external terminal, and the process proceeds to step 3504 .

Incidentally, in the fourth embodiment, when the respective counter values of the winning ball number counter MHc, the starting ball entering number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general entering ball number counter MJ13c increase by one, It may be configured to output a signal (it is preferable to apply this configuration to the start-up entrance ball number counter MJ12c and the general entrance ball number counter MJ13c, which are counters that tend to have relatively small counter values. be). In addition, it is configured to output 1 signal when each counter value of the winning ball number counter MHc, the starting entrance ball number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general ball entering number counter MJ13c increases by 10. (It is preferable to apply this configuration to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 and the prize ball number counter MHc, which are counters that tend to have relatively large counter values). Also, when configured to output the signals related to the winning ball number counter MHc, the starting ball entering number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general entering ball number counter MJ13c as output information from the external terminal may be configured to output a signal (external terminal signal) from a separate external terminal for each counter. With such a configuration, even if an external terminal signal that can only output ON/OFF is used, it is possible to distinguish which counter the output information relates to. Alternatively, the external terminal signal may be output only when the maintenance mode flag is ON (when the maintenance mode is in progress).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, as output information from the external terminals, the winning ball counter value, the starting entrance ball entry counter value, the total discharge confirmation number counter value, In addition, it is possible to output the general number-of-entered-balls counter value, and it is possible to confirm information related to the number of entered balls from outside the gaming machine.

As a method of checking the information related to the ball entry outside the gaming machine, a verification machine may be used. Specifically, a terminal for connecting the verification machine is provided on the main control board M side. Then, by connecting a verification machine to the terminal, a serial signal (similar to the command sent from the main control board M to the sub control board S) from the main control board M side to the verification machine side, the type of information and the information It may be configured so as to be able to output a signal that can clearly indicate the content. The serial signal may be configured to be output by the main control board M at all times, or may be configured to be output when there is a request for output of information related to the ball entry from the verification machine.

In addition, as another form of confirming the information related to the ball entry by the verification machine, the information related to the ball entry is configured to be managed on the sub control board S side, and the information related to the ball entry is managed on the sub control board S side. may be converted into a QR code and displayed on the effect display device SG, and the QR code may be photographed and decoded by a collating machine so that the information relating to the ball entry can be confirmed by the collating machine.

(Fifth embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, various aspects for confirming the information related to the ball entry have been described in detail, but the information related to the ball entry can be stored for several days. good too. Therefore, a configuration capable of storing information related to ball entry for several days will be described as a fifth embodiment, and only the changes from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 89 is an overall electrical block diagram of the fifth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps the current time by means of a built-in power supply. It is what we are doing. Here, the real-time clock RTC is a clocking mechanism provided on the substrate of the sub-main control unit SM. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) that is independent of the board, and continues to keep time even when power is not being supplied to the game machine. It is possible to supply the current date/time based on

Next, FIG. 90 is a main flowchart of the main control board M side in the fifth embodiment. The change from Modification 1 from the third embodiment is step 2650 (fifth). That is, in step 3000, the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process, and in step 2650 (fifth), the main control board M executes the backup execution control process, and the external Move to signal output processing.

Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the backup execution control process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (fifth) of FIG. 90 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2652, the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10000) (the total discharge confirmation counter value is cleared to zero by turning off the power). Therefore, the base value is not stored if the total discharge confirmation number counter value, that is, the number of shots of game balls has not reached 10,000, which has been counted since the power was turned on). In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the main control board M determines whether or not the date has been newly changed. can also be used). If Yes in step 2654 , main control board M sets the next storage area in step 2656 and proceeds to step 2658 . It should be noted that if step 2654 is No, the process proceeds to step 2658 as well. Next, at step 2658, the main control board M updates and stores the current base value in the set storage area number (updated and stored until the last power-off of the day, and time data is stored for three days), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2652, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1990).

The lower part of the figure is a base value storage image diagram, specifically, it has "1", "2", and "3" as storage area numbers. ” is set. In addition, the base value of March 25th is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "1", and the base value of March 27th is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "2". , and the base value for March 28 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "3". After that, the number of game balls fired (the number of game balls is almost the same as the number of discharged balls) on the next day, March 29, is 10,000 or more, and the date has been changed from March 28. , the storage area number changes from "3" to "1" ("1" is set), and the base value (33) of March 29 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "1". Become. The storage area numbers are configured to be set in the order of "1→2→3→1...". Also, the base value of March 25th stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "1" is erased (overwritten). The configuration for backing up the information related to ball entry such as the base value is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the next storage area number is set each time the gaming machine is powered on. . Further, it may be configured to have a counter for managing the storage area to be backed up, and to add 1 to the counter value of the counter each time the game machine is powered on.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, by updating and storing the base value as needed on business days when the total number of discharged balls reaches 10,000 or more, It is possible to store information for three business days on which (10,000 or more balls) were shot.

In the fifth embodiment, the RTC is used. With this configuration, it becomes possible to easily determine how many game balls were shot at what time.

In the fifth embodiment, backup is performed under the condition that the total number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (10,000 balls in this example). It is only necessary to configure the system so that information is backed up, and there is no problem even if the predetermined condition is changed. For example, it may be determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed as the period during which the game is being executed, that a predetermined number or more of game balls have been shot, or that the total number of prize balls paid out has reached a predetermined number. Further, it may be configured such that the backed-up information is deleted when a predetermined period of time elapses or when a predetermined operation is performed. Specifically, the predetermined operation for deleting the backed up information may be configured to delete the backed up information when the power is turned off, or may be configured to delete the backed up information when the power is restored.
(Sixth embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the configuration in which either the main control board M or the sub control board S executes the processing for calculating the information related to the ball entry has been described in detail. It may be configured to calculate the information related to the ball entry in both the processing of the control board M and the sub-control board S. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as the sixth embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 92 is a main flowchart of the main control board M side in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2750 (sixth). That is, after executing the number-of-entered-balls determination process at step 2100, at step 2750 (sixth), the main control board M executes the number-of-discharged-main-games confirmation process, and shifts to the fraud detection information management process at step 1900. .

Next, FIG. 93 is a flow chart of the main game start opening detection process related to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2212-3, step 2212-5 (sixth), step 2231-3, and step 2231-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the first main game starting hole detection continuation flag in step 2210, in step 2212-3, the first main game starting hole entering ball determination means MJ11-A counts the starting hole entering ball number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the value. Next, in step 2212-5 (sixth), the first main game starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-A sets the starting entrance entrance command (command to the sub control board S side), and in step 2222 Go to processing.

Also, in step 2230, after turning on the second main game starting hole detection continuation flag, in step 2231-3, the second main game starting hole entry determination means MJ11-B counts the starting hole entry number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the counter value. Next, in step 2231-5 (sixth), the second main game starting entrance ball determination means MJ11-B sets the starting entrance entrance command (command to the sub control board S side), and in step 2240 Go to processing.

Next, FIG. 94 is a flow chart of the normal winning hole entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2411-3 and step 2411-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the general winning hole detection continuation flag at step 2410, at step 2411-3, the general winning hole entry ball determination means MJ11-P adds 1 to the counter value of the general entry ball number counter MJ13c. Next, in step 2411-5 (sixth), the general winning hole entrance ball determination means MJ11-P sets a general ball entrance command (command to the sub control board S side), and proceeds to the processing of step 2420. .

Next, FIG. 95 is a flow chart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2509-5 (sixth). That is, in step 2508, after adding 1 to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90, in step 2509-5 (sixth), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 issues a discharge ball command (sub control board command to the S side), and shift to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, FIG. 96 is a flow chart of entering ball determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2104 (sixth). It is determined whether or not the number of balls G has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (6000 in this example). If Yes at step 2104 (sixth), the ball entry ratio N is calculated at step 2106, and if No at step 2104, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (sixth)}. By configuring in this way, every time the total number of balls entered into the starting hole and the general winning hole reaches a multiple of 6000 balls, a display regarding whether the ball-in ratio is within a predetermined range is displayed. can be executed.

Next, FIG. 97 is a flow chart of the main game discharge count confirmation process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (sixth) of FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2752, the maintenance mode control means MO sets the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 to the confirmation value (the total number of discharges measured on the main control board M side and the total discharge number calculated on the sub control board S side). It is a counter value for checking whether the number is the same as the number, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has reached a multiple of 6000). In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the maintenance mode control means MO issues a total discharge ball confirmation command (a command to the sub control board S side, and includes information relating to the total discharge confirmation number counter value). is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Incidentally, even if No in step 2752, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 98 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (especially sub-main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are Step 5850 (sixth), Step 5950 (sixth), and Step 6050 (sixth) in FIG. That is, at step 5850 (sixth), the sub-control board S executes a sub-game entry confirmation process, which will be described later. Next, at step 5950 (sixth), the sub-control board S executes a sub-game entering ball count determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 6050 (sixth), the sub-control board S executes the sub-game side discharge number confirmation process described later, and shifts to the reservation information management process in step 5100.

Next, FIG. 99 is a flow chart of sub-game entry confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 5850 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, at step 5852, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a starting port entry command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5852, in step 5854, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 controls the sub-side start entrance ball number counter SJ11c (from the main control board M side, under certain circumstances, the first main game start entrance A10 or It is a counter that executes addition processing based on information related to the number of game balls that have entered the second main game start port B10, and is stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S). , the process proceeds to step 5856 . On the other hand, if No in step 5852, the process proceeds to step 5856 as well. Next, at step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a general ball entry command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 sets the sub-side general entry ball number counter SJ13c (representing the number of game balls entered into the general winning hole P10 under specific circumstances from the main control board M side). 1 is added to the counter value of (stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S) which performs addition processing based on the information, and the process proceeds to step 5860 . On the other hand, if step 5856 is No, the process proceeds to step 5860 as well.

Next, at step 5860, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a discharge ball command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes at step 5860, at step 5862, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 controls the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c (from the main control board M side, based on the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). (stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), which is a counter for executing addition processing, is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next processing {step 5950 (sixth) processing}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 5860, the process proceeds to the next process {step 5950 (sixth) process}. By configuring in this way, when receiving the starting port entrance command, general entrance command, and discharge ball command from the main control board M side, the starting port (first main game Addition processing can be performed on the counter values of the counters related to the ball entering the starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10), the counter related to the ball entering the general winning port P10, and the counter related to the discharged ball. It becomes possible.

Next, FIG. 100 is a flow chart of the sub-game entered ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 5950 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5952, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 executes addition processing of the counter value of the sub-side starting entrance entrance ball number counter SJ11c and the counter value of the sub-side general entrance ball number counter SJ13c, and the total number of entrance balls is calculated. Calculate GS. Next, at step 5954, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the total number of entered balls GS has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1500). In the case of Yes at step 5954, at step 5956, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 calculates (sub-side starting entrance entering ball number counter value/sub-side general entering ball number counter value) as the entering ball ratio NS. Although the details will be described later, the total number of entered balls G on the main control board M side is determined every 6000 balls, whereas the total number of entered balls GS on the sub control board S side is determined every 1500 balls. , and the sub-control board S side is configured so that the interval of determination is shorter (the number of times of determination is greater). In the sixth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the total number of entering balls G or the total number of entering balls SG has reached a predetermined number. Although it is configured to determine the timing for calculating the ball entry ratio SN, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to calculate N or the ball-entering ratio NS. In such a configuration, the interval at which the main control board M side calculates the incoming ball ratio N may be longer than the interval at which the sub control board S side calculates the incoming ball ratio SN. Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 109, each time the total number of entered balls G or the total number of entered balls SG reaches a predetermined number of balls, or each time a predetermined period of time elapses (main control board M side and sub control board S The predetermined time may be different depending on the side), the ring buffer may be configured to store the information related to the hit ball.

Next, at step 5958, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the ball entry ratio NS is within a predetermined range (1/4≦N≦4). If Yes at step 5958, at step 5960, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a normal display on the effect display device SG (for example, a small circle is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area, nothing is displayed, etc.). , the process proceeds to the next process {step 6050 (sixth) process}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5958, in step 5962, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays an abnormality display (for example, a small x in the lower right corner of the display area, etc.) on the effect display device SG, and the following It shifts to processing {process of step 6050 (sixth)}. Moreover, also in the case of No in step 5954, the process proceeds to the next process {step 6050 (sixth) process}.

Next, FIG. 101 is a flow chart of the sub-game side discharge number confirmation process according to the subroutine of step 6050 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, at step 6052, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a discharge confirmation command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes at step 6052, at step 6054, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not "total discharge confirmation number counter value=sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter value". In the case of Yes at step 6054, at step 6056, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a discharge normal display on the effect display device, and proceeds to the next process (process at step 5100). On the other hand, if No at step 6054, at step 6058, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a discharge abnormality display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process at step 5100). Note that even if No in step 6052, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). Thus, in the sixth embodiment, every time 6000 discharged balls are detected on the main control board M side, the detection on the main control board M side coincides with the detection on the sub control board S side. is configured to check whether That is, the main control board M side and the sub control board S side are configured to independently measure the discharged balls.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the main control board M and the sub control board S respectively execute the process of calculating the information related to the ball entry, and the total number of discharges is Each time a predetermined number (in this example, 6000 balls) is reached, the sub By confirming whether or not the total number of ejected balls calculated on the control board S side matches, it is possible to confirm whether the information related to the entering ball is correct information. In addition, since the free space of the data capacity used by the sub control board S is larger than that of the main control board M, in the processing on the main control board M side, the information related to the ball entry is updated every 6000 balls. In the processing on the sub control board S side, the information on the ball entry is updated every 1500 balls, which is less than on the main control board M side. .

Further, each time the total number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (in this example, 6000 balls), the main control board M and the sub control board S check the information related to the ball entry. It may be configured to determine whether or not the total discharge confirmation number counter value and the total number GS of entering balls on the side of the sub-control board S match. By configuring in this way, in order to prevent the discovery of information (for example, information that the ball-in ratio N is in an abnormal range) related to illegal ball-entering caused by illegally changing the direction of the game nail, When the rod-shaped member is put in and taken out near the general winning entrance ball detection device P11s, and the general winning entrance ball detection device P11s repeats "OFF→ON", the main control board M side to the sub control board S side By transmitting a general ball entry command, which is information indicating that a ball has entered the general winning hole P10, the total number of balls GS on the side of the sub control board S is added, but the main control Since the total ejection confirmation sensor C90s on the board M side does not detect the game ball, the information (total ejection confirmation number counter value) related to the total ejection number on the main control board M side is not added. When the member is put in and taken out near the general winning entrance ball detection device P11s, the total number of discharged balls on the main control board M side and the total number of balls entered on the sub control board S side do not match, and fraud is detected. Become.

(Seventh embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, various configurations for confirming the information related to ball entry have been described in detail. is confirmed, there is a risk that the information indicating the abnormality is erased by executing RAM clear without storing the information. Therefore, a seventh embodiment is configured to be able to cope with such a situation, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 102 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (especially sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 6100 (seventh) in FIG. That is, in step 5700, after executing error notification execution processing, in step 6100 (seventh), the sub control board S executes RAM clear backup processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 5020 processing.

Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of RAM clear backup processing according to the subroutine of step 6100 (seventh) in FIG. 102 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 6102, the sub control board S determines whether or not RAM clear information has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes at step 6102, at step 6104, the sub-main control unit SM adds 1 to the counter value of the RAM clear count counter SRc, stores the counter value, and performs the next process (process of step 5020). transition to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6102, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5020). Thus, in the seventh embodiment, the sub-control board S side is configured to store the number of times the RAM clear is executed. In step 6104, the area for storing the counter value of the RAM clear number counting counter SRc is stored even if any human operation occurs (operating the power switch Ea or the RAM clear button to turn off the power or clear the RAM). (for example, ferroelectric memory, etc.).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, by configuring the sub control board S side to store the number of times the RAM is cleared, information related to an abnormal ball entry can be obtained. is confirmed, even if the RAM clear is executed and erased without storing the abnormal information, the number of RAM clear execution times is stored on the sub control board S side, and the RAM clear is executed. By constructing such that the number of RAM clear executions is not erased even if the memory is cleared, it is possible to prevent unauthorized information manipulation from being executed.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of RAM clears stored in the sub-control board S may be configured to be displayed on the performance display device SG during execution of the maintenance mode. In this case, if the number of RAM clears to be displayed exceeds a predetermined number of times, it is determined that unauthorized RAM clearing has been executed, and the display of effects and the like cannot be displayed on the effect display device SG. It may be configured so that it becomes impossible to display all the displays related to normal game progress, so that it cannot be used during sales. Further, the above-described RTC may be used to store not only the number of RAM clear times but also the date and time when the RAM was cleared.

(Eighth embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the main control board M calculates the information related to the ball entry, and the main control board M displays the information based on the calculated information. The configuration in which all information calculation and display processing are executed by the main control board M is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. Therefore, a configuration in which the main control board M executes all the calculation and display processing of information related to entering a ball, which is different from the present embodiment, will be referred to as an eighth embodiment. , elaborate.

First, FIG. 104 is an example of a diagram showing the structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that a ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the main control board M. FIG. This ball entry state display device J10 is attached with a 4-digit 7-segment display arranged in "2 digits + 2 digits". configured to be visible. The ball-entering state display device J10 in FIG. 1 is provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the game machine. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the rear surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check it.

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
Next, FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the eighth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 1034 (eighth), step 2850 (eighth), and step 1036 (eighth). That is, after executing the processing of steps 2000 to 1600 as processing in the first ROM/RAM area, the main control board M calls the processing in the second ROM/RAM area in step 1034 (eighth).

<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>
Next, at step 2850 (eighth), the main control board M executes ball entry state calculation processing, which is processing in the second ROM/RAM area and will be described later. Next, in step 1036 (eighth), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area, and then the processes of steps 1900 to 1990 are executed as the process in the first ROM/RAM area. It will happen.

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
Next, FIG. 106 is a flow chart of the number-of-prizing-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2706-6 (eighth), step 2716-6 (eighth), step 2731 (eighth), and step 2736-6 (eighth). That is, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (in this example, 3) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then step 2706. -6 (Eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH enters the non-accessory counter MHc-4 (the first main game start opening A10 in which no electric accessary is provided and the general winning opening P10) It is a counter for measuring the number of game balls, and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side). , the process proceeds to step 2708 .

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
Also, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then step 2716. -6 (eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH is an accessory counter MHc-5 (a counter that measures the number of game balls entered into the second main game start port B10 where electric accessories are provided). (stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side) is added to the counter value (3 in this example) of the prize ball payout related to the second main game start port, and the process proceeds to step 2718. . In addition, at step 2728, the prize ball payout determination means MH temporarily stores the information to the effect that the prize balls related to the first (second) big winning opening are to be paid out in the undischarged prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. At step 2731 (eighth), the prize ball payout determination means MH is a continuous accessory counter MHc-6 (a counter for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20). (stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side), the number of prize balls paid out (13 in this example) related to the first (second) big winning opening is added, and the process proceeds to step 2732. do.

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
Also, in step 2734, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (in this example, 10) to the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc, and then step 2736-6 ( In 8), the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) to the counter value of the non-accessory counter MHc-4, and shifts to the process of step 2738. do. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio, which will be described later. In addition, the role ratio refers to the number of prize balls paid out by the large winning prize opening for the number of all prize balls paid out, and the prize given by the winning prize opening (in this example, the second main game start opening B10) provided with the normal electric role. It is the ratio occupied by the number of ball payouts. The ratio of the total number of prize balls paid out of the second main game start port B10 and the first big win port C10 (the second big win port C20) to the total number of prize balls paid out. In addition, the continuous role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the big winning opening to the number of all prize balls paid out. In this example, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 and the total number of prize balls paid out from the first big prize hole C10 (second big prize hole C20) and the general prize hole P10. It is the ratio that accounts for Also, more precisely, the continuous role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the big winning opening when the conditional device operation flag is on to the number of all prize balls paid out. In the case of calculating the continuous role ratio like this, two ring buffers are provided for storing the number of prize balls paid out of the big winning opening, and one of the ring buffers has the condition device operation flag turned on. The number of prize balls paid out by the big winning opening (the number of prize balls paid out by the big win) is stored, and in the other ring buffer, the number of prize balls paid out by the big winning opening when the condition device operation flag is off (the number of prize balls paid out by the small winning It may be configured to calculate (store) the continuous role ratio by storing the number of prize balls paid out).

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
Next, FIG. 107 is a flow chart of the ejected ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that this embodiment is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (main game probability variation flag is off and main game time saving flag is off), and during execution of a special game In the case where there is no (the condition device operation flag is off), when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the game ball, the total discharge confirmation number counter value is added by 1, regardless of the game state etc. When the confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball, it is configured to add 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter value. Since the process is merely deleted from the present embodiment, detailed description is omitted.

<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>
Next, FIG. 108 is a flow chart of ball entry state calculation processing according to the subroutine of step 2850 (eighth) of FIG. 105 in the eighth embodiment. First, at step 2852, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the counter value of the total confirmed discharge number counter MJ11c-90 has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1000 in this example). In the case of Yes at step 2852, at step 2854, the maintenance mode control means MO sets the character ratio as "(accessory counter value + continuous accessory counter value)/(accessory counter value + continuous accessory counter value + non Accessory counter value)×100” is calculated. Next, in step 2856, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates "continuous role product counter value/(accessory product counter value + continuous role product counter value + non-accessory product counter value) x 100” as the continuous role product ratio. do. Next, at step 2858, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the character object ratio and the continuous character object ratio calculated at steps 2854 and 2856 on the ball-entering state display device J10, and performs the next processing {step 1036 (second 8)}. Incidentally, even if No in step 2852, the next process {step 1036 (eighth)} is performed. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated each time the number of discharged balls is a multiple of 1000 balls, and displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 in a display mode to be described later. is configured as follows. In the eighth embodiment, the character object ratio and the continuous character object ratio calculated in steps 2854 and 2856 are configured to be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. However, since it is rare that the result of calculating the role ratio or continuous role ratio is an integer, the decimal point of the calculation result of the role ratio or continuous role ratio is rounded off to the nearest 2. It is also possible to configure the ball entry state display device J10 to display an integer of digits.

Next, FIG. 109 is an image diagram of entering ball information backup in the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment may be configured so as to store (back up) information relating to ball entry each time a predetermined number of game balls are shot, as in the fifth embodiment described above. An example of such a configuration is shown in FIG. In the figure, the configuration is such that each time the number of discharged balls reaches 6,000, in other words, each time the counter value of the total number of confirmed discharged balls becomes a multiple of 6,000, information relating to the number of balls entered is stored. In addition, since the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 is configured to be able to measure when all the game balls that have been shot are discharged, when the total discharge confirmation number counter value becomes a multiple of 6000 balls, , it can be considered that game balls are shot in multiples of 6000 balls. Incidentally, in the case of a general pachinko game machine, the number of game balls that are substantially the same as the number of game balls that have been fired is paid out as the cumulative number of paid out game balls, that is, the number of game balls that is approximately 100% of the number of game balls that have been fired. is paid out as the cumulative number of paid-out prize balls, the cumulative number of shot balls can be regarded as substantially the same as the cumulative number of paid-out prize balls. Also, in a gaming machine configured to pay out approximately 90% of the number of game balls fired as the cumulative number of paid out prize balls, by setting "total number of paid out prize balls x 100/90", It is possible to calculate the approximate number of game balls that have been shot.

The information related to the winning balls stored for every 6000 discharged balls includes the total number of winning balls paid out based on the winning balls entering the general winning opening P10, and the winning number based on the winning balls entering the first main game start opening A10. Cumulative number of ball payouts, cumulative number of prize ball payouts based on balls entering the second main game start opening B10 (where the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is provided), first big winning opening C10 and There is a total number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the second big prize opening C20, and a total number of prize balls paid out for the above four items. It is configured to be stored in a ring buffer using bytes. In this example, a ring buffer is used that can store 10 pieces of information for each multiple of 6,000 balls. When it becomes a multiple of the sphere, the oldest stored information (information corresponding to "1" in the figure) is erased and new information is stored (stored at "1" in the figure). are configured so that

Also, based on the information stored in the ring buffer described above, 3 bytes are used to store the information related to the total number of paid out prize balls for 10 stored in the ring buffer. In addition, information older than 10 will be deleted from the ring buffer, but before it is deleted, the information will be referred to at any time, and the total number of prizes won, including the information stored in the past, will be counted. Such information is also configured to be stored using 3 bytes. In addition, the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio of the information related to the cumulative number of paid out prize balls for 10, which are calculated based on the information related to the cumulative number of paid out prize balls for 10, are calculated. , using one byte each. In addition, the continuous role product ratio and the role product ratio of the information related to the total cumulative number of prizes, which are calculated based on the information related to the total cumulative number of winnings, are stored using 1 byte each. . When three pieces of data are stored as data stored in the ring buffer (when data for one round of the ring buffer is not stored), for example, prize ball payout related to the general winning hole P10 When the data of "1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls" is stored as the number, the data of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for the 10 sets related to the general winning hole P10 is " 500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls" is stored, and the data for the total number of prize balls paid out is "500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls", and 10 sets of accumulated prizes are stored. The data of the number of paid-out balls and the data of the total cumulative number of paid-out prize balls are the same number of prize balls. On the other hand, when 12 pieces of data are stored as the data stored in the ring buffer (when more data is stored after the data for one round of the ring buffer is stored), for example, general As the number of prize balls to be paid out related to the winning hole P10, "1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls, 4: 600 balls, 5: 500 balls, 6: 700 balls, 7: 500 balls, 8: 600 balls 9: 500 balls, 10: 400 balls" is stored, the data of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for the 10 sets related to the general prize gate P10 is "500 + 600 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 700 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 400 = 5400 balls". In addition to the above 5400 balls, the data of the total number of prize balls paid out is "500 balls" and "800 balls" as the past two data erased from the ring buffer. data is added, that is, data to the effect that "5400 + 500 + 800 = 6700 balls" is stored, and the data of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for the 10 sets is different from the data of the total cumulative number of prize balls paid out. It is the number of prize balls.

Next, FIG. 110 is a display example of the ball entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the display mode of the ball entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment. As described above, the ball entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment is provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the gaming machine, and the door unit D18 can be unlocked with the key possessed by the gaming arcade. Since it is necessary to lock and open the door unit D18 and check the substrates attached to the rear surface of the door unit D18 (game board), it is configured so that the player cannot check it. In the eighth embodiment, the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the gaming machine. , may be provided on the surface of the prize ball payout control board KH facing the back side of the game machine, or on the surface of the sub-control board S facing the back side of the game machine. Also, a ball entry state display unit composed of the ball entry state display device J10 and a harness may be configured to be connectable to the main control board M, the sub control board S, or the prize ball payout control board KH. In addition, when the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the sub control board S or prize ball payout control board KH facing the back side of the game machine, the main control board M and the ball entry state display device J10 are provided. It may be configured such that the board (sub control board S or prize ball payout control board KH) is accommodated in one case. Further, when the ball-entering state display unit is configured to be connectable to the main control board M, the ball-entering state display unit and the main control board M may be housed in one case. In such a configuration, it is desirable to use a transparent case so that the inside of the case can be visually recognized. In addition, the ball entry state display device J10 is displayed on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the game machine, the prize ball payout control board KH facing the back side of the game machine, and the sub control board S facing the back side of the game machine. Even if it is provided on the surface, the substrate on which the ball entry state display device J10 is provided may be covered with a transparent case. Further, in the case where the main control board M is polygonal and the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the game machine, the main control from the ball entry state display device J10 is provided. The distance from the ball entry state display device J10 to any of the nearest sides of the main control board M may be closer than the distance to the center of gravity of the board M facing the back side of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the influence on the main control board M of the noise generated by the display on the entering state display device J10.

The ball entry state display device J10 is configured to display in 4 bits, ie, upper two digits and lower two digits, and is configured to start displaying when the gaming machine is powered on. In addition, what is displayed is (a) the continuous role ratio when 60,000 balls are fired, (b) the role ratio when 60,000 balls are fired, (c) the cumulative continuous role ratio, and (d) the cumulative total. There are four types of role ratios, and when the power of the game machine is turned on, switch in the order of "(a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) ..." for 10 seconds each. It is configured to display four types of items. The above 60,000 balls are the number of shot balls for one round of the ring buffer (6,000 balls×10). Incidentally, the above (a) corresponds to the cumulative total of 10 sets of continuous role product ratios stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and the above (b) is stored using 1 byte in FIG. The above (c) corresponds to the cumulative total of continuous role product ratios stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and the above (d) corresponds to It corresponds to the total sum of the character product ratios stored using 1 byte.

As a specific display mode, it suggests which item is currently displayed in the upper two digits, and the continuous role ratio when "C0" fires 60,000 balls, and "C1" fires 60,000 balls. case, "A0" is the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, and "A1" is the cumulative accessory ratio. In addition, the value of the currently displayed item is displayed in % in the lower two digits. In addition, when the displayed continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60, the display mode of the lower two digits is configured to blink to indicate that it is not a normal value (in other cases is lit up). In addition, when the displayed role item ratio exceeds 70, the display mode of the lower two digits is configured to blink to indicate that it is not a normal value (in other cases is illuminated). If the data of 60,000 shots is not retained, for example, if only 20,000 game balls have been shot since the gaming machine started operating, the display mode of the upper two digits will be blinking. (in other cases, it is illuminated). It should be noted that the items displayed on the ball-entered state display device J10 are not limited to those shown in the figure, and the display modes are only examples. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the data of 60,000 shots is not held, the display mode of the upper two digits of the entering state display device J10 is displayed blinking, and the character ratio or continuous character ratio is displayed. When the ratio is not a normal value, the display mode of the lower two digits of the ball entry state display device J10 is configured to blink. In other words, the blinking area of the ball-entering state display device J10 is configured to be different depending on whether the data of 60,000 shots is not held or when the character ratio or continuous character ratio is not a normal value. there is It should be noted that the display mode on the ball-entering state display device J10 may differ between the case where the data of 60,000 shots is not held and the case where the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is not a normal value. , the display area of the entering state display device J10 is set to only two digits, and if the data of 60,000 shots is not held, the display area of the two digits is changed to "1 second display → 1 second If the character ratio or continuous character ratio is not normal, the two-digit display area will change to "2 seconds display → 1 second non-display → display for 2 seconds...".

Next, the lower part of the figure shows an example of a display mode different from that of the eighth embodiment of the ball entry state display device J10. A case of displaying a number is exemplified. In the figure, "non-lighting = 0", "red lighting = 1", and "green lighting = 2" are shown in ternary numbers. there is Therefore, when converted to a decimal number, it becomes "45963", indicating that the number of game balls shot is 45963 balls. In this manner, a plurality of lamps capable of expressing ternary numbers in three lighting modes may be provided to enable display related to the ball entering the ball entrance. Further, the type of lighting mode and display contents of the ball entry state display device J10 may be changed, and for example, a display using a threshold value may be used. Specifically, "Continuous character ratio less than 40% → lights off", "Continuous character ratio 40 to 49% → Green light", "Continuous character ratio 50 to 59% → Yellow light", "Continuous character ratio 60% or more → red lighting”, it may be configured to notify in four types of display mode depending on the value of the continuous role product ratio.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the ball entry state display device is provided on the main control board M and on the back side of the gaming machine. , By executing the calculation processing and display processing of information related to entering the ball in the processing in the second ROM / RAM area, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used in the first ROM / RAM area and increase the character ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be confirmed by the ball entry state display device, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether the game is progressing in a normal state of the game nail.

In the eighth embodiment, the ball entry state display device is provided on the main control board M and on the back side of the gaming machine. may be configured so as not to be provided in the vicinity of the CPU or the random number generation circuit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game machine from being affected by the noise generated by the display on the ball entry state display device and hindering the normal progress of the game. In addition, in order to ensure the visibility of information related to ball entry displayed on the ball entry status display device, the entry status display device shall not be installed in areas where visibility is hindered by harnesses, etc. is desirable. It should be noted that such a configuration relating to the position of the ball entering state display device can also be applied when the ball entering state display device is provided on the prize ball payout control board KH or the sub control board S.

In the eighth embodiment, a ball entry state display device is provided on the main control board M, and the information related to the ball entry (in this example, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio) is displayed on the ball entry state display device. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display the information related to the ball entry in the 7 segments for error provided on the payout control board. In such a configuration, the display start condition of the information related to the ball entry may be, for example, a long press of the RAM clear button for a predetermined number of seconds or more. In such a configuration, the display may be switched at predetermined time intervals, as in the eighth embodiment. Specifically, when the display is switched every 3 seconds as "1→3→5→2→4", it may be configured to notify that a total of 13524 game balls have been paid out. .

(Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment)
In the eighth embodiment, the configuration for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio on the ball entry state display device J10 provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the gaming machine has been described in detail. However, the configuration for displaying the role product ratio or the continuous role product ratio is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that displays the role product ratio or the continuous role product ratio and is different from the eighth embodiment will be referred to as Modification Example 1 from the eighth embodiment. Only detail.

First, FIG. 111 is a flow chart of ball entry state calculation processing according to the subroutine of step 2850 (eighth) of FIG. 105 in Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment. The change from the eighth embodiment is step 2860 (eighth variant 1), that is, after the maintenance mode control means MO calculates the continuous accessory ratio in step 2856, in step 2860 (eighth variant 1) , the maintenance mode control means MO issues a maintenance mode command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which contains information relating to the character object ratio and the continuous character object ratio calculated in steps 2854 and 2856). It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1990), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). In addition, in the modification 1 from the eighth embodiment, the process of step 2850 (eighth) is performed in the first ROM/RAM area.

Next, FIG. 112 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side according to Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment. The changes from the eighth embodiment are step 6200 (eighth modification 1) and step 6300 (eighth modification 1). At 6200 (eighth variation 1), the sub control board S executes password generation processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 6300 (eighth variation 1), the sub control board S executes password authentication processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 5020 .

Next, FIG. 113 is a flow chart of password generation processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 (eighth modification 1) of FIG. 112 in modification 1 from the eighth embodiment. First, at step 6202, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the real-time clock RTC and determines whether or not the date has been newly changed. In the case of Yes at step 6202, at step 6204, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 newly generates a maintenance mode activation password (password for activating the maintenance mode for displaying information related to ball entry). Next, at step 6206, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 temporarily stores the newly generated maintenance mode activation password at step 6204. FIG. Next, in step 6208, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 erases the display of the character product ratio and the character succession ratio on the effect display device SG (the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are displayed on the effect display device SG). If not, this process is not executed), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 6300 (eighth variant 1)}. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 6202, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 6300 (eighth variant 1)}.

Next, FIG. 114 is a flow chart of password authentication processing according to the subroutine of step 6300 (eighth modification 1) of FIG. 112 in modification 1 from the eighth embodiment. First, at step 6304, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not a maintenance mode command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 6304, in step 6306, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 temporarily stores the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio included in the maintenance mode command received in step 6304 (the role temporarily stored). The product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio will be overwritten in this process), and the process proceeds to step 6308 . On the other hand, if No in step 6304, the process proceeds to step 6308 as well.

Next, at step 6308, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not a new password has been entered. Although not shown, the password may be entered by operating the sub-input button SB with the door unit opened, for example. In such a configuration, two buttons, a sub-input button SB similar to this example and a cross key that allows input in the up, down, left, and right directions, are provided as sub-input buttons. The password may be entered by selecting the symbol with the cross key and then pressing the sub-input button SB to enter the password. Next, at step 6310, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 compares the password entered at step 6308 with the temporarily stored maintenance mode startup password. Next, at step 6312, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the two passwords (input password and maintenance mode activation password) compared at step 6310 match. If Yes at step 6312, at step 6314, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 directs the temporarily stored character product ratio and continuous character product ratio (the character product ratio and continuous character product ratio temporarily stored at step 6306). It is displayed on the display device SG, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5020). It should be noted that even if No in step 6308 or step 6312, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5202).

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment, the real-time clock RTC is used to change (update) the maintenance mode activation password each time the date is changed. , when the password is entered by the administrator, the maintenance mode is activated, that is, by configuring the performance display device SG to display the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, only the administrator can view. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately manage the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio, which are information to be disclosed (information that should not be disclosed to the players).

In addition, in Modification 1 from the eighth embodiment, the maintenance mode startup password is generated and the password is authenticated (determined whether the entered password matches the maintenance mode startup password) on the sub control board S side. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to generate a maintenance mode activation password and to authenticate the password in the processing on the main control board M side. In such a configuration, after the execution of RAM clear, a new maintenance mode activation password is generated, or a new maintenance mode activation password is generated by an administrator's predetermined operation (long press of the RAM clear button, etc.). may be configured to generate

Next, FIG. 115 is an example of a board configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. This figure shows only the right side of the game area, and illustrates the case where the player hits right (a shooting mode in which a game ball is shot toward the right side of the game board surface). In the case of the board configuration as shown in the figure, when a right hit is executed, the game ball is configured to be easily guided to the vicinity of the second main game start port B10, and is not guided to the second main game start port B10. The game balls are guided to the general winning hole P10. That is, when a game ball is launched so as to enter the second main game start port B10, almost all the game balls that are launched go to either the second main game start port B10 or the general winning port P10. configured to be guided. By constructing in this manner, even when the direction of the game nail is changed illegally or when the direction of the game nail is changed due to the collision of the game ball with the game nail, the player can obtain an advantageous 2. A more user-friendly game machine can be made by configuring the player so that the ball can be easily entered into one of the two ball entrances.

In addition, in the case of such a board configuration, by calculating the ball entry ratio between the general winning hole P10 and the second main game start hole B10 that can be entered by hitting right, based on the calculated ball entry ratio, It can be configured to facilitate understanding (analysis) of the situation (orientation, etc.) of the game nails around the general winning opening P10 and the second main game starting opening B10.

Also, in addition to the board structure as shown in the figure, a first out port and a second out port are provided as out ports, and the second out port is arranged downstream of the general winning port P10 (general winning port By configuring to calculate the ball entry ratio between the general prize winning hole P10 and the second out hole when the game ball that does not enter the hole P10 flows down to the second out hole, Based on the calculated ball-in ratio, it is possible to configure (analyze) the situation (orientation, etc.) of the game nails around the general winning hole P10 to be easily grasped (analyzed).

Also, a security dongle may be inserted into the gaming machine according to the present example to determine whether or not the information related to ball entry is normal. Specifically, by shifting to security mode, it is configured so that it can be determined whether the information related to ball entry is normal or not. Control board M, sub-control board S, prize ball payout control board KH, etc.), unless a security dongle is inserted (unless the password in the security dongle and the password managed by the board match) It is configured not to transition to mode. By shifting to the security mode, it becomes possible to transmit information related to the ball entry to the security dongle in the same manner as the verification device described above.

Note that the security dongle has a volatile memory and a power supply (eg, a backup battery) that supplies power to the volatile memory. In the volatile memory, as information related to ball entry, information related to the range in which the ball entry ratio between the main game start opening and the general winning opening is normal, information related to the normal range of the character ratio, continuous character Information on the normal range of ratios, information on the normal range of base values, and the like may be stored. The information in the volatile memory is preferably encrypted and stored in the security dongle, in which case the authenticator based on the information in the volatile memory can decrypt the encrypted information. It is preferable to configure it so that In addition, the security dongle itself may not have a power supply for supplying power to the volatile memory, and instead may be configured to supply the power from the prize ball payout control board side or the main control board M side. (In this case, the security information may disappear from the volatile memory immediately after the security dongle is removed from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board). When the security dongle is removed from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, if the information in the volatile memory is immediately lost, when writing information to the security dongle, the prize ball payout control Attach the security dongle (before writing) to the board or the main control board, turn on the power to the game machine, connect the writer for writing information to the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, and then Write information from the writer (via the prize ball payout control board or the main control board) to the security dongle, and then (remove the write writer from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board), the prize ball payout control board or the main control board M side to the security dongle.

In addition, when the security dongle is inserted to complete the authentication and shift to the security mode, the board (for example, the main control board M) is configured to be able to transmit the information related to the entry into the matching machine as described above. You may Alternatively, the security dongle may be inserted to complete the authentication and shift to the security mode, and then the game machine may be configured to shift to the security mode by executing a predetermined operation. For example, after authentication of the security dongle is completed, pressing the sub-input button SB three times may shift to the security mode. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the security mode so that it does not shift to the security mode unless the security dongle is used. Even if the transition condition is set, a player who does not have a security dongle can be configured not to transition to the security mode. Further, in the case of a game machine in which the ball state display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described above in the eighth embodiment, the authentication is completed by inserting the security dongle, and the security mode is entered. By shifting, the information regarding the ball entry state display device J10 is displayed (the information regarding the ball entry state display device J10 is not displayed unless the authentication by the security dongle is completed). may Also, in the case of a game machine to which the ball-entered state display device J10 as described in the eighth embodiment is attached, the security dongle is inserted to complete the authentication, and the operating member (for example, , sub-input button SB, firing handle D44, RAM clear button, etc.) to shift to the security mode, the information regarding the ball entry is displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 (authentication by the security dongle). (Information relating to the ball entry state is not displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 unless the above is completed). Also, the dongle insertion slot for inserting the security dongle may be provided at a position where even if the door unit is opened, manual access from the front side (player side) of the gaming machine is difficult. Good {Since the security dongle needs to be electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, for example, the security dongle is fixed board-to-board with these boards (or A connector corresponding to a dongle insertion port is pulled out from the control board by a harness, and a security dongle is connected to the connector. In this case, there is no need to provide a dongle insertion slot, and even if the door unit is opened, it becomes difficult to manually access the security dongle}.

Further, in this example, one out port C80 is provided, and a game ball entering the out port C80 can be detected by the out port entrance ball detection device C80s, but a plurality of out ports may be provided. good. For example, a total of two outlets are provided, one at the same position as in the present embodiment (outlet A) and one on the right side of the board (outlet B). A device for detecting a game ball may be provided at each of the two out ports, and a game ball entering the out port A and a game ball entering the out port B may be counted. With such a configuration, it is possible to generate more detailed information regarding the flow of game balls. That is, in the case where the general winning openings are provided on both the left side and the right side of the game board as in the present embodiment, even if it is determined that the ball-in ratio between the main game starting opening and the general winning opening is not normal. , It is not possible to determine whether the ball entering the general winning hole provided on the left side of the game board surface is abnormal or the ball entering the general winning hole provided on the right side of the game board surface is abnormal. Even in such a case, if the orientation of the game nail located near the general prize winning opening provided on the right side of the game board surface is changed illegally, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the general winning opening. In other words, which game nail is difficult to enter into the general winning hole by configuring the game ball that did not enter the general winning hole to easily enter the out hole B? It can be configured so that it is easy to determine whether the orientation of the has been illegally changed.

Next, FIGS. 116 to 118 show, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as a configuration related to information related to ball entry, the count of ball entry, calculation of information related to ball entry, and information related to ball entry are displayed. Here is a list of things you can do and how to do it. As long as these items can be combined with each other, the combined aspect is included in the content of the present embodiment, and aspects having two or more items in each classification are also included in the present example. shall be Specifically, it is classified into 13 items A to M as major items, and each of the major items has a plurality of minor items as subordinate concepts. In the remark column, detailed explanation, measurement (count), calculation, reason for display, and specific examples thereof are shown for each corresponding sub-item. Although described in detail below, this embodiment is not limited to aspects that can be assumed from this list.

First, the major items shown in the upper left of FIG. The sub-concepts of the game ball count period (period for counting the number of game balls entering various ball entrances) include the following sub-items.
A1. Occasional count: Not limited to the period in which the maintenance mode is executed, but also in the period in which the maintenance mode is not executed, game balls are counted at any time.
A2. Counting only during maintenance mode: The number of game balls entered is counted only during the period in which the maintenance mode is being executed. It may be the entire period during execution of the maintenance mode, or a predetermined period during execution of the maintenance mode.
A3. Each business day or specified business period: It is possible to count game ball entries even during periods when the maintenance mode is not running, but only the specified date and time (period) can be counted, and the specified date and time (period) can be counted. period) may be configured so as not to be counted. It should be noted that RTC may be used to determine whether or not it is the specified period. For example, if the hall's business hours are 9:00 to 23:00, set the business hours to the RTC (business hours vary depending on the business area, so you can change the setting by operating the sub-input button, etc.) Possible) Also, the number of winning balls per unit time may be displayed (prevention of adjustment of the base value in the hole). For example, when business hours are 9:00 to 23:00, non-business hours may be set, and balls entering various prize-winning holes outside the business hours may be monitored. Also, the number of balls entered into various entrances per unit time outside the business hours (for example, every 10 minutes outside the business hours) may be individually managed. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to see through a short-time base value adjustment due to maintenance of the game ball by the person in charge of the hall.

Next, B.B. There are the following sub-items as sub-concepts of the measurement mode of information related to ball entry (measurement mode when measuring information related to game ball entry into various ball entrances).
B1. Predetermined operation to the sub-input button: By operating the sub-input button, it is possible to start and operate the maintenance mode. For example, by pressing the sub-input button, measurement is started, and the sub-input button is pressed again The measurement may be ended with .
B2. Predetermined operation to the firing handle: For example, measurement is started by starting a predetermined operation (e.g., touching, rotating, etc.) to the firing handle, and then measurement is completed by ending the operation of the firing handle. It may be terminated. Note that the measurement may be started after the operation is continued for a certain period of time, or the stop of the measurement may be suspended for a certain period of time after the operation is finished.
B3. Period during which the game ball is flowing down in the game area: For example, the measurement period can be determined by providing a sensor capable of determining whether the game ball is flowing down in the game area.
B4. When the total number of confirmed discharged balls exceeds a predetermined value: For example, when the predetermined value is exceeded (during a predetermined period of time, business day, business week, etc.), the data may be saved. It should be noted that not only the total number of confirmed discharged balls, but also the total number of balls that can be counted, such as the number of balls that have passed through the exit, and the number of balls that have entered the winning gate, etc., can be counted, and if the data exceeds a predetermined value, the data will be saved. may be

Next, the major item, C.I. The subordinate concepts of the ball entry-related count target type (classification related to ball entrances that can be counted) include the following sub-items.
C1. Number of balls entered into the first main game starting port: In the case of calculating the role ratio of K7, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric role is not included. Also, in the case of calculating the continuous role product ratio of K8, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the role product continuous device is not included.
C2. Number of balls entered into the second main game starting port: In the case of calculating the role ratio of K7, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric role is targeted. Also, in the case of calculating the continuous role product ratio of K8, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the role product continuous device is not included.
C3. Number of balls entering the big winning slot: When calculating the K7 role product ratio, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric role product is targeted. Also, in the case of calculating the continuous role product ratio of K8, which will be described later, the number of winning balls by the role product continuous device is used.
C4. Number of balls entering the general winning slot: When calculating the K7 role ratio, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric role is not included. Also, in the case of calculating the continuous role product ratio of K8, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the role product continuous device is not included.
C5. Total number of balls entered: the total number of balls entered into the gaming machine, which can be confirmed by measuring, for example, the number of times a game ball shooting device is activated and the total number of discharged balls.
C6. Number of out-entry balls: Detectable by an out-entry ball detection device. It should be noted that a plurality of out ports and out port entrance detection devices may be provided.

Next, D. is a major item. The sub-concepts of the game state to be counted (by state of the specific game state and the classification regarding whether or not the special game is being executed) include the following sub-items. D1. All game states: regardless of the current game state (for example, whether it is a time-reduced game state or whether a special game is being executed), it is counted. It should be noted that the data may be stored only when there is a game that exceeds a certain period of time.
D2. Probability variable game state and time reduction game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D3. Variable probability game state and non-reduced time game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D4. Non-probability variable game state and time reduction game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D5. Non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state: Only the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) may be counted. Further, two game states, a normal game state and a game state other than the normal game state (also referred to as a specific game state), may be counted separately. It should be noted that the game state may be changed during the maintenance mode (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D6. During special game execution: During the maintenance mode, even if the special game is not being executed, it can be forcibly changed to the state where the special game is being executed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). good.
D7. Special game is not being executed: During the maintenance mode, even if the special game is being executed, it can be forcibly changed to a state where the special game is not being executed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). good too.

Next, the major item, E. There are the following sub-items as a subordinate concept of the confirmation method (a method for externally confirming the data related to the game ball, which is counted, calculated, and stored).
E1. Confirmation by a collator connected to an external terminal: A dedicated machine (for example, a collator) may be connected to an external terminal to read information (for example, information such as the number of payouts is written in a specific RAM area and collated). . In this case, the configuration may be such that there is no maintenance mode. A security dongle may be used to encrypt the information in the volatile memory to enhance security.
E2. Confirmed by the ball entry status display device on the main control board M side: All calculations are performed by the program inside the game machine and displayed on the peripheral device.
E3. Confirmation with the effect display device on the sub control board S side: All calculations are performed by the program inside the game machine and displayed on the peripheral device.

Next, the major items shown in the upper left of FIG. The sub-concepts of the counting method {method for confirming the number of incoming or discharged balls (including the case of pseudo-regarding the number of entered or discharged balls)} include the following sub-items.
F1. Ball sensors provided at various entrances: 1st (second) main game start entrance ball detection device, auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device, general winning entrance ball detection device, etc. It is possible to detect incoming balls. A plurality of entrances may be provided for each ball, and may be counted individually or in total.
F2. Total discharge confirmation sensor: A sensor that detects all game balls that have entered various entrances and passed through exits.
F3. Payout count sensor: A sensor continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit, which measures the number of game balls paid out to the player.
F4. Sensor for detecting that the firing handle is being operated: A sensor capable of detecting that the firing handle is being operated. Based on the sensor detection, the base value, the number of shot balls, etc. may be determined based on the time calculated by the internal timer.
F5. Number of shots of shooting device: For example, the number of times game balls are shot from the shooting device is detected by an internal counter.
F6. A sensor that recognizes the intensity of shooting game balls: For example, it is possible to determine whether the intensity of shooting is right-handed (strong) or left-handed (weak), and the number of shot balls (or the number of discharged balls) can be determined. It may be configured to provide a measurable sensor. It is possible to calculate information related to the ball entry, such as the base value, based on the measurement results obtained by the sensor.

Next, the major item, G.I. The subordinate concepts of the operator (operator in maintenance mode) include the following sub-items.
G1. Inspector: A person who checks whether the direction of the game nail is normal, etc., and who mainly uses the collating machine and the maintenance mode. For example, an inspector of a game machine manufacturer, an inspector of a mechanism, an inspector of a competent authority, and the like.
G2. Hall manager: A person who can open the door unit and operate the back side of the game machine in the maintenance mode.
G3. Player: A person who can perform only operations that can be performed by anyone.

Next, the major item, H.I. Subordinate concepts of the maintenance mode activation method and operation method (operation at the time of maintenance activation and operation method such as display selection after activation) include the following minor items.
H1. Sub-input button: can be activated and operated by the player. After the maintenance mode, which cannot be activated by the player, is activated, the operation in the maintenance mode may be enabled by inputting the sub-input button.
H2. Opening the door unit + sub-input button: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the sub-input button, the player cannot start and operate.
H3. Opening the door unit + operating the firing handle: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the firing handle, the player cannot start and operate. In addition, it can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine.
H4. Opening of the door unit + operation of the button on the main control board M side (RAM clear button, etc.): Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the button on the main control board M side, the player starts up. and cannot be operated. It should be noted that it is preferable that the game machine can be operated from the back side of the game machine and cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine.
H5. Opening the door unit + entering a ball into the ball opening when winning invalidly: Entering a ball into a large winning opening when a special game is not in progress is an invalid winning, and the player does not open the door unit during play. Even when the game ball is opened, the maintenance mode is not displayed even if the game ball is entered into the ball entrance which does not result in invalid prize winning.
H6. If the passwords match: This is a condition under which the player cannot activate or operate the maintenance mode, and even a person involved in the hall cannot start unless the passwords match. Note that the password may be configured to be changed in a predetermined period (for example, day of the week, etc.).

Next, I.I. Subordinate concepts of the area for executing processing (area for processing information related to game balls) include the following sub-items.
I1. Winning detection is executed on the main control board M side: Information on the number of winnings may be sent to the sub control board, and the base value and the like may be calculated and displayed on the sub control board S side.
I2. Calculation of information related to ball entry is performed on the main control board M side: Winning number information (for example, the number of passes of each winning opening switch) and the number of payouts are displayed on the display device on the main control board M side. It should be noted that an area (for example, the second program) that is not used during normal game progress may be used.
I3. Execution of calculation of information related to ball entry on the sub control board S side: The display mode on the display device on the main control board M side may be changed during normal game progress and during maintenance mode display (for example, The amount of information that can be displayed may be increased, such as by displaying in full color.)
I4. Calculation results of information related to ball entry are displayed on the main control board M side: displayed on the ball entry state display device. It should be noted that the main game symbol display device and the auxiliary game symbol display device can also be displayed in a mode (eg, color display, blinking display, etc.) different from that during normal game progress.
I5. Display of calculation results of information related to ball entry on the side of the sub-control board S: display on the performance display device. Incidentally, a first effect display device and a second effect display device may be provided as effect display devices, and the information relating to the ball entry may be displayed on the second effect display device. The second effect display device is, for example, a effect display device having a narrower display area than the first effect display device in its display area, and the display target thereof is, for example, displayed on the first effect display device. The decorative pattern, the reserved image, and the error display image to be obtained may be configured to display different display objects.
I6. Calculation of information related to entering a ball is executed on the main control board M side and the sub control board S side respectively: The calculation results of both sides may be collated to detect an error (in this case, the main control board M side and the sub control board S side may The aggregation period on the sub-control board S side may be varied).
I7. Calculation of information related to winning a ball by processing in the second ROM/RAM area of the main control board: Winning may be detected, calculated, or displayed in an area not used during normal game progress.
I8. Display processing of calculation results of information related to ball entry is executed by processing in the second ROM/RAM area of the main control board: Winning is detected, calculated, or displayed in an area that is not used during normal game progress. good

Next, J.J. The subordinate concepts of the method of measuring time (method of measuring a period that is the standard unit of information related to ball entry) include the following sub-items.
J1. Interrupt timer: timer measurement processing is provided in interrupt processing that is executed at predetermined intervals.
J2. Clock outside the gaming machine (for example, wristwatch, stopwatch): Time is measured by the inspector himself, not by a timer or the like inside the gaming machine.
J3. RTC: Uses RTC to perform timer measurement.

Next, the major items shown in the upper left of FIG. 118, K. Subordinate concepts of the display target of the maintenance mode (information related to game balls that can be displayed during the maintenance mode) include the following minor items.
K1. Base value: For example, the base value at the start of the maintenance mode may be displayed, the base value for a predetermined period while the maintenance mode is running, or the base value only for a specific game state may be displayed.
K2. Ball entry ratio between main game start opening and general winning opening: For example, normality or abnormality may be displayed at a predetermined timing (predetermined total number of discharges, total number of winnings, etc.).
K3. Number of balls entered in starting hole, general winning hole, big winning hole: The number of balls entering starting hole, general winning hole, and big winning hole only in a specific game state may be displayed.
K4. Number of winning balls in starting opening, general winning opening, and large winning opening: The number of winning balls in starting opening, general winning opening, and large winning opening only in a specific game state may be displayed.
K5. Total number of prizes won: Cumulative number of prizes won at the start gate, general prize gate, and big prize gate.
K6. Total Confirmed Emission Number: Synonymous with the number of all game balls that have been shot, and is the counter value of the total confirmed ejection number counter.
K7. Accessory ratio: The ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls, which is accounted for by the number of prize balls provided by the big prize openings and the prize winning openings provided with electric accessories (in this example, the second main game start opening).
K8. Continuous role ratio: The ratio of the number of prize balls by the big winning opening to the number of all prize balls.
K9. Number of shot balls: The number of all game balls that have been shot.

Next, the major item, L. The subordinate concepts of the maintenance mode display method (method of displaying information related to game balls during maintenance mode) include the following minor items.
L1. Entering state display device (main control board M side): Displayed by 7 segments on the board (x2 in this example).
L2. Effect display device (sub control board S side): A second effect display device may be provided for display.
L3. Dedicated display on prize ball payout control board: invisible to players (eg, 7-segment display).
L4. Dedicated display on the main control board: invisible to the player (eg, a 7-segment display, 7 segments x 4 in this example).
L5. First (second) main game symbol display device: Only during the maintenance mode, a specific lamp may be lit in a specific mode.
L6. Auxiliary game symbol display device: Only during the maintenance mode, a specific lamp may be lit in a specific mode as a lighting mode.
L7. Frame decoration lamp (may also be game effect lamp D26): A lamp that can be lit in three or more lighting modes may be used to create a variety of lighting modes (for example, different lighting modes for special symbols and general winning openings depending on the game state) The ratio is reported by the light emission mode). With such a configuration, a large amount of information can be reported as information relating to ball entry.
L8. Audio: Audio may be used to notify whether the information related to ball entry is normal or abnormal. It should be noted that the sound volume and the like may be different between the case of normality and the case of abnormality.

M.M. The subordinate concepts of the backup mode (mode for storing information related to game balls) include the following sub-items.
M1. Backup of information such as the number of winnings only when predetermined conditions are met: Predetermined conditions include, for example, the day on which 10,000 or more balls were fired, the day on which 6,000 or more balls were discharged, and the steering wheel was operated for a predetermined period of time. , a predetermined number of balls detected in an out hole, a predetermined number of balls entering a winning hole, and the like.
M2. Backup for a certain period of time regardless of whether the conditions are satisfied: It may be overwritten and updated sequentially.
M3. Back up the erased data on the main control board M side on the sub control board S side: For example, it may be saved in the FRWM on the sub control board S side.
M4. No backup: When power is restored, information such as the number of winnings may be cleared.
M5. Erasing old information when new information is stored: For example, it may be backed up using a ring buffer.

Further, the pachinko game machine in this example may have the following configuration. Moreover, the configuration described in detail below may be configured to have a combination of a plurality of configurations.

Outside of business hours, in order to prevent the case where the hall staff adjusts the base value such as the number of prizes (for example, manually entering the game ball into the general prize gate), The S side may be configured to store the number of prizes won per unit time.

Also, the password may be changed for each day of the week or date to be verified when the maintenance mode is activated, and the maintenance mode may be activated (displayed) only when the input key and the verification key match.

It may be configured such that both the main control board M side and the sub control board S side collect the information related to the ball entry and check whether there is any discrepancy between the collected results. In this case, the main control board M side counts every hour, while the sub control board S side counts every 15 minutes, and the sub control board S side and the main control board M side count It may be configured to have different periods. For example, if the sub-control board S side counts in a shorter period than the main control board M side, the number of balls entered will increase in a short period of time on the sub-control board S side. or decrease, it becomes a criterion for judging that some kind of adjustment or fraud may have been implemented as soon as possible. Since the secondary control board S side has a larger capacity, even if the tallying period is shortened, the problem of capacity is less likely to occur in storing the number of wins per unit period.

The information data related to the ball entry erased on the main control board M side may be stored in the FRWM on the sub control board S side. With such a configuration, the person in charge of the game hall cannot adjust the number of balls entered, for example, by removing the battery or short-circuiting the battery to erase the data and make the adjustment.

During shooting of the game ball {for example, the period during which the shooting handle D44 is on by the shooting handle touch sensor (sensor for detecting that the shooting handle D44 is being operated)} may be counted. In addition, after being detected by the launch handle touch sensor, start counting the number of entered balls after entering one of the entrances, and after a certain period of time after the launch handle touch sensor is no longer detected (or fired) After a certain period of time after the game ball wins, the number of entering balls may be totaled.

A sensor that recognizes the strength of shooting a game ball (called a game ball firing strength recognition sensor) recognizes the strength of the strength, and determines whether it is right-handed (fired strength = strong) or left-handed (fired strength = weak). Judging the game state by which one is being executed (non-time-reduced game state when hitting left, time-reduced game state when hitting right, etc.), and calculating data corresponding to the determined game state You can do it.

By opening the front door unit D18 (the door open flag is ON), and winning a prize in a winning opening at the time of invalid winning (for example, entering a big winning opening when a special game is not being executed, etc.) It may be configured to display the maintenance mode. When the door unit D18 is opened and the grape clogging is cleared, the system is switched to the maintenance mode, and the maintenance mode display is prevented from being visually recognized by the player. It is supposed to be displayed only in the case of

In addition to displaying the total of all winning ratios, the winning ratio may be displayed according to the winning opening (first (second) main game start opening, big winning opening, general winning opening) .

Since all commands are transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the number of passes to each winning hole, the out hole, and the number of balls entering, the sub control board S side can display the time series of each data. By displaying the graph, it is possible to check changes in the base value, whether or not illegal games are being played, and the like, from the slope of the graph and the like.

Display device on the main control board M side {entering state display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device, etc.} information related to ball entry under control by the main control board M side When displaying , it is necessary to develop it into display data and display it, but when using a verification machine, the data is directly retrieved from the specified RAM and displayed in hexadecimal, etc. on the verification machine. becomes possible.

The number of winnings and the number of payouts for each winning slot may be displayed on the display on the main control board M side. In such a configuration, switching of each display content can be made possible by pressing a RAM clear button, for example. In addition, it may be configured such that the display content of the maintenance mode is invisible to the player by making it possible to display the maintenance mode under the condition that the disconnection/short-circuit error can be displayed (for example, the connector of the starting port is pulled out). .

The cumulative number of prize balls may be configured to be displayed on an error display device for errors (for example, 7-segment display) provided on the prize ball payout control board. By configuring in this way, it is possible to confirm the number of payouts at that point in time after the power is turned on on the actual machine. Also, the number of prize balls (the number of payouts) may be output to the outer end as the prize ball information.

On the main control board M side, the number of balls passed to the out port (= number of balls fired), total number of payouts (total number of payouts scheduled), value for low base calculation The total number of prize balls) and the value for high base calculation (the total number of prize balls for a specific winning hole in the time-reduced game state) are saved, and the indicator lamp on the main control board M side is displayed. May be used for data display.

By constantly monitoring the information related to the incoming ball, the value for low base calculation {base value, non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state (main game probability variable flag is off and main game short time flag is off ), for example, when the value for low base calculation/the number of shot balls x 100 (%) becomes less than a predetermined percentage, the main control board M side A command may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and may be notified by a performance display device, a frame decoration lamp (which may be a game effect lamp D26), or the like.

From the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the number of passages to each winning hole and the out hole and the number of winning balls may all be transmitted as commands. Also on the board S side, it is possible to execute a display equal to or greater than that on the main control board M side by the effect display device.

Data such as the number of wins is displayed by the control on the side of the main control board M. When displaying, in order not to interfere with the display of pattern fluctuations, pattern display, number of continuous operation of the conditional device (number of times of continuous operation), status notification when power is turned on, etc., for example, during the display of the standby demo screen ( A switch or the like on the back side of the board may be used) to shift to the maintenance mode.

The game board surface may be a one-piece molding and may be constructed without using any game nails. Moreover, it is good also as a form which continues in a row by using the game nail which concerns on a prize-winning hole as a U-shaped nail. Further, by providing a marking (for example, a colored engraving) of a size that hides the head of the game nail, the misalignment may be recognized at a glance. .

Further, the gaming machine in this example may be configured so that the player can display information related to ball entry. Therefore, an example of a configuration that allows a player to display information related to ball entry will be described in detail below.
(1) Always display information related to ball entry on the performance display device.
(2) It is possible to optionally select whether or not to display the total number of hits during a game by performing a predetermined operation on the standby demo screen (when there is no hold).
(3) When a predetermined operation is performed by a player during a game, it is possible to arbitrarily switch to a state in which the total number of hits can be displayed.
(4) If a specific effect is executed in a situation where the information related to the ball entry is displayed on the effect display device, the information related to the ball entry is not displayed during the execution of the specific effect. (displayed again after the production ends).
(5) When configured to have two effect display devices, the first effect display device and the second effect display device, as the effect display device, the effect display device is displayed in a part of the display area of the first effect display device. It is possible to switch so that the information related to the incoming ball is displayed on the second effect display device.
It may be configured as described above.

In this example, the configuration of the pachinko game machine is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration of displaying information related to ball entry in a reel-type game machine may be applied. Here, a supplementary description of the well-known reel-type game machine will be given.

First, the well-known reel-type game machine displays a main board as a main game control section that controls the progress of the game, a sub-board as a sub-game control section that controls the execution of effects, and identification information for the main game. A plurality of rows (generally three rows) of reels on which a plurality of pieces of identification information are respectively arranged on the outer periphery as a main game identification information display unit for the main game, and a main game start that can be operated by the player and instructs the start of the game. It has a start lever as an instruction device and a stop button as a main game progress instruction device that can be operated by the player and instructs the progress of the game. The main board includes main game random number acquisition means for acquiring main game random numbers when the start lever is operated, and one or more stop identifications based on the random numbers acquired by the main game random number acquisition means. Main game identification information display content determination means for temporarily determining information (for example, display content determination means for internally determining a winning combination such as a small winning combination or a special combination), and main game identification information display content determination Based on one or more pieces of stop identification information provisionally determined by the means and the operation timing of the stop button, the main that controls to confirm and display one stop identification information on the reel that is the main game identification information display unit Game identification information display control means (for example, reel control means for stopping the reels at a predetermined position based on the internally determined winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed), and main game identification information display When a predetermined mode is displayed as the stop identification information on the reel which is the part, special game execution control means (for example, "777 etc." for controlling to shift to the special game is displayed on a predetermined effective line) As a trigger, a special accessory actuation means for activating a special accessory), a main game side information transmission control means for transmitting information about the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means to the sub game control section side, have. Further, when the stop identification information indicates a small winning combination, the number of game medals corresponding to the displayed small winning combination is paid out, and even during execution of the special game, the stop identification information becomes the specific mode. In that case, the number of game medals corresponding to the stop identification information of the specific mode will be paid out.

The well-known configuration of the reel-type game machine may be provided with a ball-entering state display device so that information relating to the ball-entering state can be displayed on the ball-entering state display device, or an effect display device. may be configured to display information related to the ball entry. In addition, the ball entry state display device may be provided on the outer surface of the reel-type gaming machine (the surface visible to the player), or other display devices (devices for displaying the number of credits, devices for displaying the number of payouts, etc.). device, etc.). Also, the ball-entering state display device may be arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized only by opening the door of the reel-type gaming machine.

The conditions for displaying information related to entering a ball are: "Open the door of the reel-type game machine + operate the sub-input button", "Press and hold the RAM clear button", "Open the door of the reel-type game machine". There is no problem with any condition such as "open", depending on the purpose (condition that only the administrator can operate, condition that even the player can operate, etc.).

In addition, the content displayed on the entering state display device is a bonus (or a special game Display the ratio of the game medals paid out, that is, "all game medals paid out including minor wins / game medals paid out by bonus (or by special game) x 100 (%)" (accessory ratio ), or display "the number of game medals inserted into the gaming machine in a predetermined period/the number of game medals paid out from the gaming machine in the predetermined period x 100" (so-called base value) may be configured as follows.

(Ninth embodiment)
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration for displaying the information related to the ball entry state display device J10 was illustrated, but the configuration for displaying the information related to the ball entry state display device J10 is described above. It is not limited to only the configuration with Therefore, as a configuration capable of displaying information related to the entering state display device J10, a configuration different from the configuration according to the above-described embodiments will be described as a ninth embodiment. , elaborate.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, a counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s in the non-time reduction game state, and the non-time reduction total discharge stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side A confirmation number counter MJ11c-91 and a counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s in the time reduction game state, and a time reduction total discharge confirmation number counter stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side. and MJ11c-92. In addition, it is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered in the first main game start opening A10 where no electric accessories are provided and the general winning opening P10 in the non-time-reduced game state, and is on the main control board M side. Measure the number of game balls entered in the non-time-reduction gaming state to the non-time-saving non-accessory counter MHc-7 stored in the RAM area of , and the second main game start opening B10 provided with the electric accessory. A non-time-saving accessory counter MHc-8 which is a counter and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side, a first main game start port A10 in which no electric accessory is provided, a general winning port P10, A time-saving non-accessory counter MHc-9 stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side and an electric accessory are provided. A time-saving accessory counter MHc-10, which is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the second main game start port B10 in the time-reducing game state and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side, is provided. is doing.

First, FIG. 119 is a main flowchart on the side of the main control board M in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2850 (ninth), that is, after the timer interrupt processing starts and the processing of steps 2000 to 1600 is executed, in step 2850 (ninth), the main control The board M executes a ball entry state calculation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1900 .

Next, FIG. 120 is a flow chart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the ninth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is steps 2508-1 (ninth) to step 2508-3 (ninth). is turned on, in step 2508-1 (ninth), the total discharged ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether the main game time reduction flag is off ( It is determined whether or not the current game state is a non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2508-1 (ninth), in step 2508-2 (ninth), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 adds 1 to the counter value of the non-time-saving total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-91. (Increment) and move to the next process (process of step 2600). On the other hand, if No in step 2508-1 (ninth), in step 2508-3 (ninth), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 increments the counter value of the time-saving total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-92 by 1. Add (increment) and move to the next process (process of step 2600). It should be noted that the counter value of the non-time-saving total ejection confirmation number counter MJ11c-91 is the total number of ejected balls in the non-time-reduction gaming state, in other words, the total number of game balls shot in the non-time-reduction gaming state. In addition, the counter value of the time-saving total ejection confirmation number counter MJ11c-92 is the total number of ejected balls in the time-reduced game state, in other words, the total number of game balls shot in the time-reduced game state.

Next, FIG. 121 is a flow chart of the number-of-prizing-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (ninth) in FIG. 9 in the ninth embodiment. First, at step 2741, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2741, in step 2450 (9th), prize ball payout determination means MH executes a non-time-saving prize ball number determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2741, in step 2550 (9th), the prize ball payout determination means MH executes a time-saving prize ball number determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the non-time-saving prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2450 (ninth) of FIG. 121 in the ninth embodiment. First, at step 2452, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the first main game start flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2452, at step 2454, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the prize ball payout number (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port A10. to add. Next, in step 2456, the prize ball payout determination means MH uses the non-time-saving non-accessory counter MHc-7 (the first main game start opening A10, the general winning opening P10, and the non-time It is a counter that measures the number of game balls entered in the shortened game state, and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side). In the example, 3) is added. Next, in step 2458, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10 are to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2460 . On the other hand, if No in step 2452, the process proceeds to step 2460 as well.

Next, at step 2460, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the second main game start flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2460, at step 2462, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the second main game start port B10. to add. Next, in step 2464, the prize ball payout determination means MH determines the non-time-saving accessory counter MHc-8 (the game entered in the second main game start port B10 in which the electric accessory is provided in the non-time-reduced gaming state) It is a counter that measures the number of balls, and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side). . Next, at step 2466, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the second main game start port B10 are to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2468 . On the other hand, if step 2460 is No, the process proceeds to step 2468 as well.

Next, at step 2468, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first (second) big prize entry ball flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes at step 2468, at step 2470, prize ball payout determining means MH turns off the first (second) big winning hole entry flag in the flag area of entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, at step 2472, the prize ball payout determining means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize ball payouts (in this example, 13 ) is added. Next, in step 2474, the prize ball payout determining means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the first big winning hole C10 (the second big winning hole C20) are to be paid out to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. (For example, information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out) is temporarily stored. Next, at step 2476, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize balls (in this example, 13) related to the first (second) big winning hole to the counter value of the continuous character counter MHc-6. , go to step 2478 . On the other hand, if the answer to step 2468 is No, the process proceeds to step 2478 as well.

Next, at step 2478, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the general winning hole entry flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2478, at step 2480, prize ball payout determining means MH turns off the general winning hole entry flag in the flag area of entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 2482, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2484, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize ball payouts (10 in this example) to the counter value of the non-time-saving non-accessory counter MHc-7. Next, in step 2486, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information (for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out) to the effect that prize balls related to the general winning opening are to be paid out to the undischarged prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2478, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). In the ninth embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out from the first main game start port A10 and the number of prize balls to be paid out from the second main game start port B10 are the same three balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of prize balls to be paid out may be changed. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out from the first main game start port A10 may be changed to 4 balls, or in the case of such a configuration, the number of prize balls to be paid out from the second main game start port B10 may be 1 to 3 balls less than the number of prize balls paid out from the first main game start port A10.

Next, FIG. 123 is a flow chart of the number of time-saving prize balls determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (ninth) of FIG. 121 in the ninth embodiment. First, at step 2552, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the first main game start flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2552, at step 2554, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls payout related to the first main game start port A10 (3 in this example). to add. Next, in step 2556, the prize ball payout determination means MH selects the time reduction non-accessory counter MHc-9 (the first main game start opening A10 in which no electric accessary is provided and the general winning opening P10 to reduce the time It is a counter that measures the number of game balls entered in the game state, and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side). Then add 3). Next, in step 2558, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10 are to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2560 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2552 as well, the process proceeds to step 2560 .

Next, at step 2560, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the second main game start flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 2560, at step 2562, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the second main game start port B10. to add. Next, in step 2564, the prize ball payout determination means MH is the time-saving accessory counter MHc-10 (the game ball entered in the second main game start opening B10 in which the electric accessory is provided in the non-time-reduced gaming state). It is a counter that measures the number, and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side). Next, at step 2566, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the second main game start port B10 are to be paid out (for example, the number of prize balls information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2568 . On the other hand, if No in step 2560, the process proceeds to step 2568 as well.

Next, at step 2568, the prize ball payout determination means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first (second) big prize entry ball flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, prize ball payout determination means MH turns off the first (second) big winning hole entry flag in the flag area of entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. . Next, at step 2572, the prize ball payout determining means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize ball payouts (in this example, 13) associated with the first big winning hole C10 (second big winning hole C20) ) is added. Next, in step 2574, the prize ball payout determining means MH stores information indicating that the prize balls related to the first big winning hole C10 (second big winning hole C20) are to be paid out to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. (For example, information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out) is temporarily stored. Next, at step 2576, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize balls (in this example, 13) related to the first (second) big winning hole to the counter value of the continuous character counter MHc-6. , go to step 2578 . On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process proceeds to step 2578 as well.

Next, at step 2578, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b to determine whether or not the general winning hole entry flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2578, at step 2580, prize ball payout determining means MH turns off the general winning hole entry flag in the flag area of entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, at step 2582, the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, at step 2584, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize ball payouts (10 in this example) to the counter value of the time saving non-accessory counter MHc-9. Next, in step 2586, the prize ball payout determination means MH stores information (for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out) to the effect that prize balls related to the general winning opening are to be paid out to the undischarged prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2578, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the number of balls entering the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general prize winning port P10 is determined depending on whether or not the game is in the time reduction game state. Since it is configured to measure with different counters, the number of balls entering the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general winning port P10 in the non-time shortening game state, and the time shortening game It is possible to measure the number of balls entered into the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general winning port P10 in the state.

Next, FIG. 124 is a flow chart of ball entry state calculation processing according to the subroutine of step 2850 (ninth) in FIG. 119 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2862, the entering ball information control means NS calculates the role ratio as "(non-time-saving role counter value + time-saving role counter value + continuous role counter value) ÷ (non-time-saving role counter value + time-saving Accessory product counter value + continuous accessory counter value + non-time saving non-accessory product counter value + time saving non-accessory product counter value) x 100” is calculated. Next, in step 2864, the entering-ball information control means NS calculates, as the continuous role ratio, "continuous role counter value/(non-time-saving role-counter value + time-saving role-counter value + continuous role-counter value + non-time-saving role Non-accessory product counter value + time saving non-accessory product counter value) x 100” is calculated. Next, at step 2866, the entering ball information control means NS refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2866, in step 2868, the entering ball information control means NS sets the base value in the non-time reduction gaming state to "(non-time-saving role counter value + non-time-saving non-accessory counter value) / non-time-saving total discharge Confirmation number counter value×100” is calculated, and the process proceeds to step 2872 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2866, in step 2870, the entering ball information control means NS sets the base value in the time-reduced gaming state to "(time-saving role counter value + time-saving non-accessory counter value)/time-saving total discharge confirmation number. Counter value x 100” is calculated, and the process proceeds to step 2872 .

Next, in step 2872, the ball entry information control means NS updates the calculated role ratio, continuous role ratio and base value (base value in non-time-reduced gaming state or base value in time-reduced gaming state). Temporarily store. Next, at step 2874, the ball entry information control means NS determines whether or not the display update timing has been reached. Here, in the ninth embodiment, the entering-ball state display device J10 displays the cumulative continuous role ratio for 2 seconds → the cumulative role ratio for 2 seconds → the cumulative base value in the time-reduced gaming state. is displayed for 2 seconds → display the total base value for 2 seconds in the non-time reduction game state → display update timing is reached → display the total continuous role ratio for 2 seconds → 4 items are displayed in 2 It is configured to repeat displaying every second. That is, the above four items are displayed for two seconds each, and the display update timing is the timing immediately before starting to display the total continuous role object ratio as the first item of the next four items. In other words, one cycle is eight seconds in total, in which four items are displayed for two seconds each, and the display update timing is the timing when the display of the one cycle ends. It should be noted that, although not shown, the information (continuous role product ratio, role product ratio, base value in non-reduced time gaming state, base value in reduced time gaming state) related to ball entry state display device J10 is displayed. The processing up to is configured as follows.
(1) Detecting balls entering each winning ball (2) Information related to winning balls generated by entering balls into each winning hole (number of winning balls for each winning hole, time-saving character counter value, time-saving non-character counter value, time-saving total emission confirmation number counter value, non-time-saving role counter value, non-time-saving non-office counter value, non-time-saving total emission confirmation number counter value, continuous role counter value, etc.) and temporarily stored (3 ) Execute the process of converting the information related to the generated winning ball into data that can be displayed on the ball entry status display device (processing data for display in 7 segments) (4) Display the entry status of the converted data Displayed on device J10

In the ninth embodiment, each time the display update timing is reached, the latest continuous role ratio, the role ratio, the base value in the non-time-reduced gaming state or the base value in the time-reduced gaming state temporarily stored Therefore, for example, when the display of the cumulative character ratio is started, the character ratio at the display update timing two seconds before is displayed. there is The display mode of the information related to the ball entry in this example is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration is such that the information related to the ball entry displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 is updated every predetermined time (for example, one second). You may Specifically, one second after the start of display of the total character product ratio, the latest total character product ratio is updated and displayed. In addition, the predetermined time related to the update is set to a timer interrupt cycle (eg, 4 ms), and the items displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 are switched every two seconds, but the display content is the timer interrupt cycle (eg, 4 ms). It may be configured to update and display the latest value (real-time value) every time (even for the same item).

In the case of Yes at step 2874, at step 2876, the entering-ball information control means NS stores the character ratio temporarily stored at step 2872, the continuous character ratio, the base value in the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the time-reduced gaming state. Display the base value in the ball entry state display device (as described above, the display mode is a display mode in which four items are displayed for 2 seconds each, and a specific example will be described in detail in FIG. 125), The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). On the other hand, if No in step 2874, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1900) without executing the process of step 2876. FIG.

Next, FIG. 125 is a display example of the ball entry state display device according to the ninth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the display mode of the ball entry state display device J10 in the ninth embodiment. The ball entering state display device J10 in the ninth embodiment is provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the game machine, and unlocks the door unit D18 with a key possessed by the game hall. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the rear surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check it. In the ninth embodiment, the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the gaming machine. , may be provided on the surface of the prize ball payout control board KH facing the back side of the game machine, or on the surface of the sub-control board S facing the back side of the game machine. Also, a ball entry state display unit composed of the ball entry state display device J10 and a harness may be configured to be connectable to the main control board M, the sub control board S, or the prize ball payout control board KH. In addition, when the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the sub control board S or prize ball payout control board KH facing the back side of the game machine, the main control board M and the ball entry state display device J10 are provided. It may be configured such that the board (sub control board S or prize ball payout control board KH) is accommodated in one case. Further, when the ball-entering state display unit is configured to be connectable to the main control board M, the ball-entering state display unit and the main control board M may be housed in one case. In such a configuration, it is desirable to use a transparent case so that the inside of the case can be visually recognized. In addition, the ball entry state display device J10 is displayed on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the game machine, the prize ball payout control board KH facing the back side of the game machine, and the sub control board S facing the back side of the game machine. Even if it is provided on the surface, the substrate on which the ball entry state display device J10 is provided may be covered with a transparent case. Further, in the case where the main control board M is polygonal and the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the game machine, the main control from the ball entry state display device J10 is provided. The distance from the ball entry state display device J10 to any of the nearest sides of the main control board M may be closer than the distance to the center of gravity of the board M facing the back side of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the influence on the main control board M of the noise generated by the display on the entering state display device J10.

The ball entry state display device J10 is configured to display in 4 bits, ie, upper two digits and lower two digits, and is configured to start displaying when the gaming machine is powered on. Also, what is displayed is (a) the cumulative continuous role ratio, (b) the cumulative role ratio, (c) the cumulative base value in the time-reduced game state, and (d) the cumulative total in the non-time-reduced game state. There are 4 types of base values, and when the game machine is turned on, 4 It is configured to display items of type. It should be noted that the display mode in the ball entry state display device J10 is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if the display order, the types of items to be displayed, etc. are changed. As an example, as in the eighth embodiment described above, in addition to the cumulative continuous role ratio, it may be configured to display the continuous role ratio during the most recent 60,000 ball firing period. Aside from the product ratio, it may be configured to display the character product ratio in the most recent period in which 60,000 balls were fired. In the case of such a configuration, (A) the cumulative continuous role ratio, (B) the continuous role ratio in the period in which the latest 60,000 balls were fired, (C) the cumulative role ratio, (D) the latest 60,000 The six types of the role ratio in the period when the ball was fired, (E) the cumulative base value in the time-reduced game state, and (F) the cumulative base value in the non-time-reduced game state are obtained by turning on the power of the gaming machine, "(A )→(B)→(C)→(D)→(E)→(F)→(A) …” in order of 2 seconds to display 6 types of items. . Also, like the base value, the cumulative continuous role ratio in the time-reduced game state may be displayed, or the continuous role ratio in the most recent 60,000 ball firing period in the time-reduced game state may be displayed. Alternatively, the cumulative continuous role ratio in the non-reduced time gaming state may be displayed, or the continuous role ratio in the most recent 60,000 ball firing period in the non-time-reduced gaming state may be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the total role ratio in the time-reduced game state, or to display the role ratio in the most recent 60,000 ball firing period in the time-reduced game state. It may be configured to display the total accessory ratio in the time-reduced game state, or to display the accessory ratio in the most recent 60,000 ball firing period in the non-time-reduced game state. Also, the base value may be configured to display the base value in the period during which the most recent 60,000 balls were fired in the time-reduced game state, or the base value in the period in which the most recent 60,000 balls were fired in the non-time-reduced game state. may be configured to display When displaying the base value in a predetermined game state in a situation where the most recent 60,000 ball firing period straddles the game state, for example, "(1) 10,000 ball firing in a non-reduced time gaming state → (2 ) 30,000 balls are fired in the time-reduced game state → (3) 20,000 balls are fired in the non-time-reduced game state.” When displaying the base value in the non-time-reduced game state, 10,000 balls fired in time-reduced game state + (3) 20,000 balls fired in non-time-reduced game state = 30,000 balls fired. It may be configured to calculate the base value (the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio may also be configured in the same manner). Further, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio on the entering state display device J10, if the counter value of the continuous accessory counter MHc-6 is 0, that is, the value used when calculating the continuous accessory ratio is If no big hit is won during the period of measurement, the display of the continuous role ratio in the ball entry state display device J10 is displayed as "99", and the display of "99" is calculated as an accurate value. It may be configured to suggest that the Also, items other than the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 may be configured to display "99" when an accurate value is not calculated.

In addition, as a specific display mode, the upper two digits indicate which item is currently displayed, "A0" is the cumulative continuous role ratio, "A1" is the cumulative role ratio, It is displayed that "BH" is the base value in the time-reduced game state, and "BL" is the base value in the non-time-reduced game state. In addition, the lower two digits indicate the value of the currently displayed item in %. In addition, when the displayed continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60, the display mode of the lower two digits is configured to blink to indicate that it is not a normal value (in other cases is lit up). In addition, when the displayed role item ratio exceeds 70, the display mode of the lower two digits is configured to blink to indicate that it is not a normal value (in other cases is illuminated). As in the eighth embodiment, if the data of 60,000 shots is not retained, for example, if only 20,000 game balls have been shot since the game machine started operating, the top two The display mode of the digits may be configured to be a blinking display (in other cases, the digits are lit). It should be noted that the items displayed on the ball-entered state display device J10 are not limited to those shown in the figure, and the display modes are only examples.

With the above configuration, in the ninth embodiment, by referring to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter, the number of game balls shot into the game area can be measured, and the base value and the like can be calculated. Information related to ball entry can be generated and displayed in real time. In addition, the number of game balls fired, the number of balls entered into each winning hole, etc., which are necessary for generating information related to ball entry such as the number of game balls fired, are determined in the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state. Therefore, it is possible to generate and display the base value in the non-time-reduced game state and the base value in the time-reduced game state.

In the ninth embodiment, the base value is generated and displayed for each game state (whether it is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state), but is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are generated and displayed for each game state. Further, in the ninth embodiment, as a configuration for displaying the base value for each game state, the base value in the non-time-reduced game state and the base value in the time-reduced game state can be displayed separately. As a configuration for displaying the base values separately for each situation, the following configuration may be used.
(1) A situation in which the game is progressed by executing left-handed hitting (non-time-reduced gaming state and jackpot is not being executed) and a situation in which the game is progressed by executing right-handed hitting (non-time-reduced gaming state and big hit is being executed) (2) divided into a non-time-reduced game state and a situation where a big win is not being executed and a situation where a time-reduced game state and a big win are not being executed. In addition, it may be configured to display only the base value in the non-reduced time gaming state and in the state where the jackpot is not being executed on the ball-entering state display device J10.

It should be noted that the timing (order) of executing the processing for determining the gaming state (processing for determining whether it is a non-time-reduced gaming state or a time-reduced gaming state) when generating information related to entering a ball is determined by the winning opening. It may be the timing of detecting the entry of a game ball into the game ball (every ball entering the winning opening), or the timing of calculating the number of winning balls related to the entering ball into the winning opening (each time the number of winning balls is determined). good too.

In addition, it may be configured to have a ball-entering state button that can change the display mode of the ball-entering state display device J10 by operating it (when the ball-entering state display device J10 is controlled by the main control board M, the input state button may be provided). The ball state button is also controlled by the main control board M, and when the ball entering state display device J10 is controlled by the prize ball payout control board KH, the ball entering state button is also controlled by the prize ball payout control board KH), In such a configuration, by operating the ball entry state button, only the information related to the ball entry when a predetermined number of game balls or more are shot may be displayed. Each time the ball state button is operated, the display on the ball entering state display device J10 may be switched in the manner of "character ratio→continuous character ratio→base value".

In addition, the ball entry state display device J10 is configured to display the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the base value when the number of shot balls equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 balls) is measured. (When the number of shot balls is less than the predetermined number, the character ratio, the consecutive character ratio, and the base value are not displayed on the ball entry state display device J10).

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, each winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) When a ball is played, the total number of prize balls corresponding to each prize opening is calculated based on the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize opening, and the role ratio, continuous role ratio, and base value are calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to calculate information related to ball entry for each winning hole. As an example, every time a ball enters the first main game start A10, the number of prize balls at the first main game start A10 is calculated, and "the calculated number of prize balls at the first main game start A10/shot The number of balls" may be calculated, and the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired for each winning hole may be calculated. With this configuration, even if a person involved in the game hall manually enters the game ball into a predetermined ball entrance and intentionally adjusts the base value to an appropriate value, the predetermined input By confirming the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls related to the ball opening, it is possible to easily detect the fraud. The method of calculating the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls related to a predetermined prize opening is as follows: (1) Calculate the number of prize balls each time a ball enters a predetermined prize opening, Using the number of prize balls after addition, calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls related to the predetermined prize winning opening, (2) Add the number of winning balls at any time every time the ball enters the predetermined winning opening, and then , Calculate the total number of prize balls from the number of balls entered after the addition, and use the calculated total number of prize balls to calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired in a predetermined prize opening, etc. It may be configured as

In this example, by measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s, the total number of game balls shot into the game area can be measured. A sensor capable of detecting a game ball is provided immediately after it flows into the ball (for example, a return ball prevention part provided on the launch rail), and a game ball can be detected in the game area by measuring the number of game balls detected by the sensor. By providing such a sensor, the total number of game balls shot into the game area (the total number of game balls discharged from the game area) may be measured.

(Tenth embodiment)
In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that information related to ball entry can be displayed on the ball entry state display device, and processing such as generation and display of information related to ball entry is configured to be executed by the main control board. However, the configuration related to processing such as generation and display of information related to ball entry is not limited to that of the present embodiment. Therefore, as a configuration related to processing such as generation and display of information related to entering a ball, a configuration different from the configuration according to this embodiment will be described as a tenth embodiment, and only the differences from this embodiment will be described in detail below. .

In the tenth embodiment, the prize ball payout control board KH is a counter that receives and measures the fact that the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s has detected the game ball from the main control board M side in the non-time-reduced game state. , the payout non-time-saving total discharge confirmation number counter HJ11c-91 stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the main control board indicating that the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detected the game ball in the time shortened game state It is a counter that receives and measures from the M side, and has a payout time reduction total discharge confirmation number counter HJ11c-92 stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side. In addition, the number of game balls entered in the non-time-reduced game state is received from the main control board M side and measured in the first main game start opening A10 in which no electric accessory is provided and the general prize winning opening P10. A payout non-time-saving non-accessory item counter HHc-7 stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side, which is a counter, and a non-time reduction to the second main game start port B10 provided with an electric accessory. A payout non-time-saving accessory counter HHc-8 stored in the RAM area of the prize ball payout control board KH, which is a counter that receives and counts the number of game balls entered in the game state from the main control board M side. , a counter that receives and measures the number of game balls entered in the time-reduced game state from the main control board M side to the first main game start port A10 in which no electric accessories are provided and the general prize winning port P10. Yes, the payout time reduction non-accessory counter HHc-9 stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side and the second main game start port B10 provided with the electric accessory are entered in the time reduction game state. A payout time reduction accessory counter HHc-10 which is a counter for receiving and measuring the number of played game balls from the main control board M side and stored in a RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side. there is Also, it is a counter that receives and counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20 from the main control board M side, and is stored in the RAM area on the prize ball payout control board KH side. It has a paid-out continuous accessory counter HHc-6.

First, FIG. 126 is an example of a diagram showing the structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the ball entry state display device J10 is provided in the same manner as in the eighth embodiment. It is provided on the ball payout control board KH. The display mode of the ball-entered state display device J10 in the tenth embodiment is the same as the display mode illustrated in FIG. In addition, the ball entry state display device J10 in the same figure is provided on the surface of the prize ball payout control board KH facing the back side of the game machine, and the door unit D18 is unlocked by the key possessed by the game hall. Since it is necessary to open the door unit D18 and check the substrates attached to the rear surface of the door unit D18 (game board), it is configured so that the player cannot check it.

Next, FIG. 127 is a flow chart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the tenth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2531 (tenth) and step 2532 (tenth). After turning on the ejection confirmation detection continuation flag in the area, in step 2531, the total ejection confirmation means MJ11-C90 issues a total ejection confirmation number command (a command to the prize ball ejection control board KH, total ejection confirmation A command indicating that the sensor C90s has detected a gaming ball) is set. Next, in step 2532 (10th), the total discharged balls confirmation means MJ11-C90 issues a command regarding the game state (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH, which indicates whether or not the time reduction game state is present). game state) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2508.

Next, FIG. 128 is a flow chart of the number-of-prizing-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the tenth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2706 (tenth), step 2715 (tenth), step 2725 (tenth) and step 2735 (tenth). After MH adds the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) related to the first main game start port A10 to the number of prize ball counter value, in step 2706 (10th), the prize ball payout determination means MH 1 Main game starting port entry command (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, a command to the effect that a game ball has entered the first main game starting port A10) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2708.

Also, in step 2714, after the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) related to the second main game start port B10 to the value of the prize ball counter value, step 2706 (10th). Then, the prize ball payout determination means MH issues a second main game start opening ball entry command (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a command indicating that a game ball has entered the second main game start opening B10). ) and go to step 2718 .

Also, in step 2724, after the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize balls (13 balls in this example) to the value of the prize ball counter value, , in step 2725 (10th), the prize ball payout determining means MH sends the first (second) prize ball entry command (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, the first big prize hole C10 or A command indicating that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole C20 is set, and the process proceeds to step 2728.

Also, in step 2734, after the prize ball payout determination means MH adds the number of prize balls (in this example, 10 balls) related to the general winning hole P10 to the value of the prize ball counter value, in step 2735 (10th), the prize ball The ball payout determining means MH sets a general winning hole ball entry command (a command to the prize ball payout control board KH side and a command indicating that a game ball has entered the general winning hole P10), and proceeds to step 2738. do. Thus, in the tenth embodiment, the winning openings such as the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20, the general winning opening P10, etc. When a game ball enters the game ball, a command indicating that the game ball has entered the winning hole is transmitted from the main control board M side to the prize ball payout control board KH side. The information included in the first main game start-up ball entry command, the second main game start-up ball entry command, the first (second) big winning entry entry command, and the general winning entry entry command includes: Includes information to the effect that a game ball has entered an opening (first main game start opening A10, second main game opening opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) Alternatively, in addition to information indicating that a game ball has entered each winning hole, it may be configured to include information relating to the number of prize balls paid out by the entry of game balls into each winning hole. good too. In addition, when a plurality of game balls continuously enter a predetermined winning hole in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), information on the total number of prize balls paid out by entering balls in the short period of time may be configured to be transmitted from the main control board M side to the prize ball payout control board KH, or the total number of prize balls entered into each winning hole during a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) The number may be calculated and transmitted from the main control board M side to the prize ball payout control board KH side as information on the total number of prize balls in each winning hole every predetermined period.

Next, FIG. 129 is a flow chart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. 30 in the tenth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3102 (tenth) and step 3126 (tenth). After the ball information is set, it is determined whether or not the flag turned on until the main control board M side receives the fact that the game ball payout is completed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. If Yes in step 3102 (tenth), the process proceeds to step 3105 , and if No, the process proceeds to step 3130 . Further, in step 3125, the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj erases the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time from the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means, shifts subsequent information, and then step 3126. At (10th), the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj turns on the payout incomplete flag, and proceeds to step 3130 . Thus, in the tenth embodiment, until the payout incompletion flag is turned off, that is, until the information (prize ball payout completion information) indicating that the payout processing is completed is received from the prize ball payout control board KH side, step In the process of 3130, the prize ball payout command is configured to be repeatedly transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH side.

Next, FIG. 130 is a flow chart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. 30 in the tenth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3232 (tenth), that is, in step 3230, the payout information transmission/reception means MHsj sets the prize ball payout command (at the completion of this payout) in the transmission command temporary storage means. After clearing the prize ball payout command), in step 3232 (10th), the payout information transmitting/receiving means MHsj receives information indicating that the payout has been completed (prize ball payout completion information) from the prize ball payout control board KH side. As a result, the payout incomplete flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 131 is a flow chart of a main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side in the tenth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 4650 (tenth) and step 4800 (tenth). At step 4650 (10th), the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the number-of-entered-balls measurement process, which will be described later. Next, in step 4800 (10th), the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a ball entry state calculation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 4100).

Next, FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the number-of-entered-balls measurement process according to the subroutine of step 4650 (10th) in FIG. 131 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 4652, the payout control means 3300 refers to the command related to the game state received from the main control board M side {command set in step 2532 (10th)}, the current game state is non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 4652, in step 4700 (10th), the payout control means 3300 executes a non-time-saving entering ball number measurement process described later, and proceeds to the next process {step 4800 (10th) process}. . On the other hand, if No at step 4652, at step 4750 (10th), the payout control means 3300 executes the time-saving entering ball count processing described later, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 4800 (10th)}. do.

Next, FIG. 133 is a flow chart of the non-time-saving incoming ball number measurement process according to the subroutine of step 4700 (10th) of FIG. 132 in the tenth embodiment. First, at step 4702, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the first main game starting port entry command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4702, in step 4704, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payout non-time-saving non-accessory counter HHc-7 to the number of prize balls related to the first main game start opening A10 (in this example, 3 balls ) is added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 4706 . On the other hand, if the result of step 4702 is No, the process proceeds to step 4706 as well. Next, at step 4706, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the second main game starting port entry command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4706, in step 4707, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payout non-time-saving accessory counter HHc-8 to the number of prize balls related to the second main game start port B10 (three balls in this example). is added (incremented) and the process proceeds to step 4708 . On the other hand, if No in step 4706, the process proceeds to step 4708 as well.

Next, at step 4708, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a general winning hole entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4708, in step 4710, the payout control means 3300 adds (increments) the number of prize balls related to the general winning opening P10 (10 balls in this example) to the payout non-time-saving non-accessory counter HHc-7. ) and go to step 4712 . On the other hand, if No in step 4708, the process proceeds to step 4712 as well. Next, at step 4712, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the first (second) big winning hole entry command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4712, in step 4714, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payout continuous accessory counter HHc-6 to the number of prize balls related to the big winning openings (in this example, the first big winning opening C10, the 13 balls for both of the two prize winning openings C20) is added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 4716. On the other hand, if No in step 4712, the process proceeds to step 4716 as well. Next, at step 4716, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the total discharge confirmation number command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4716, in step 4718, the payout control means 3300 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the payout non-time-saving total discharge confirmation number counter HJ11c-91, and performs the following processing {step 4800 (10th )}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4716, the next process {step 4800 (tenth)} is performed.

Next, FIG. 134 is a flow chart of the time-saving entering ball count measurement process according to the subroutine of step 4750 (tenth) of FIG. 132 in the tenth embodiment. First, at step 4752, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the first main game starting port entry command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 4752, at step 4754, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payout time reduction non-accessory counter HHc-9 to the number of prize balls related to the first main game start opening A10 (three balls in this example). is added (incremented) and the process proceeds to step 4756 . On the other hand, if step 4752 is No, the process proceeds to step 4756 as well. Next, at step 4756, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the second main game starting port entry command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 4756, at step 4757, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payout time reduction accessory counter HHc-10 to the number of prize balls related to the second main game start port B10 (three balls in this example). Add (increment) and move to step 4758 . On the other hand, if step 4756 is No, the process proceeds to step 4758 as well.

Next, at step 4758, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not a general winning hole entry command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 4758, at step 4760, the payout control means 3300 adds (increments) the number of prize balls (in this example, 10 balls) to the payout time reduction non-accessory counter HHc-9. and go to step 4762 . On the other hand, if No in step 4758, the process proceeds to step 4762 as well. Next, at step 4762, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the first (second) big winning hole entry command is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 4762, at step 4764, the payout control means 3300 sets the counter value of the payout continuous accessory counter HHc-6 to the number of prize balls related to the big winning openings (in this example, the first big winning opening C10, the 13 balls for both of the two grand prize openings C20) are added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 4766. On the other hand, if No in step 4762, the process proceeds to step 4766 as well. Next, at step 4766, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the total discharge confirmation number command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4766, in step 4768, the payout control means 3300 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the payout time-saving total discharge confirmation number counter HJ11c-92, and performs the following processing {step 4800 (10th) }. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 4766, the next process {step 4800 (tenth)} is performed.

Next, FIG. 135 is a flowchart of ball entry state calculation processing according to the subroutine of step 4800 (10th) of FIG. 131 in the tenth embodiment. First, in step 4802, the payout control means 3300, as the role ratio, "(payout non-time-saving role-thing counter value + payout time-saving role-thing counter value + payout continuous role-thing counter value) ÷ (payout non-time-saving role-thing counter value + payout time saving accessory counter value + payout continuous accessory counter value + payout non-time saving non-accessory product counter value + payout time saving non-accessory product counter value) x 100”. Next, in step 4804, the payout control means 3300 calculates, as the continuous role ratio, "the payout continuous role counter value ÷ (the payout non-time saving role counter value + the payout short time role counter value + the payout continuous role counter value + Payout non-time saving non-accessory product counter value + payout time-saving non-accessory product counter value) × 100” is calculated. Next, at step 4806, the payout control means 3300 refers to the command related to the game state received from the main control board M side {command set at step 2532 (10th)}, and the current game state is non-shortening It is determined whether or not it is in a game state. In the case of Yes in step 4806, in step 4808, the payout control means 3300, as the base value in the non-time-reduction gaming state, "(payout non-time-saving accessory counter value + payout non-time-saving non-accessory counter value) / payout non-time-saving "Total discharge confirmation number counter value x 100" is calculated, and the process proceeds to step 4812. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4806, in step 4810, the payout control means 3300 sets the base value in the time-reduced gaming state to "(payout short-time bonus counter value + payout short-time non-accessory counter value)/payout short-time total discharge confirmation number counter value x 100", and the process proceeds to step 4812.

Next, in step 4812, the payout control means 3300 calculates the role ratio, the continuous role ratio and the base value (the base value in the non-time-reduced gaming state or the base value in the time-reduced gaming state ) is updated and temporarily stored (the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the base value temporarily stored in the predetermined storage area of the prize ball payout control board KH are updated to the calculated character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and overwrite the base value and store it temporarily). Next, at step 4814, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the display update timing has been reached. Here, the display update timing is the timing of starting to display the continuous accessory ratio on the ball-entering state display device J10, as in the case of the ninth embodiment. In the case of Yes in step 4814, in step 4816, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores (temporarily stored in the process of step 4812) the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, and the base value in the non-time-reduced gaming state. And the base value in the time shortening game state is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 (as described above, the display mode is a display mode in which four items are displayed for 2 seconds each. A specific example is shown in FIG. 125. (detailed in Section 4100), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4100). Note that even if No in step 4814, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4100).

With the above configuration, in the pachinko game machine according to the tenth embodiment, the ball entering state display device J10 is attached to the back side of the game machine of the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board By configuring the KH to perform display control of the ball entry state display device J10, the main control board M performs processing related to display control of the ball entry state display device J10 and processing related to generation and storage of information related to ball entry. etc., and the data volume on the main control board M side can be reduced. In addition, by configuring the main control board M side to transmit information on the total number of game balls shot into the game area and information on the game state to the prize ball payout control board KH side, the prize ball payout control board KH side In addition to being able to generate information related to ball entry such as a base value, the information related to ball entry can be generated for each game state.

(Eleventh embodiment)
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration for displaying the information related to the ball entering state display device J10 was exemplified, but the configuration for displaying the information related to the ball entering state display device J10 is described above. It is not limited to only the configuration that Therefore, as a configuration capable of displaying information related to the entering state display device J10, a configuration different from the configuration according to the above-described embodiments will be described as an eleventh embodiment. , elaborate.

First, FIG. 136 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the eleventh embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are steps 1034 (eleventh) to step 1042 (eleventh), step 1044 (eleventh), step 1020, step 1022 (eleventh), step 1030 (eleventh), step 2850 ( 11th) and step 1032 (11th).

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
First, after the game machine is powered on, in step 1002, when the main control board M determines that the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E has been operated, in step 1034 (11th), the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1034 (eleventh), in step 1038 (eleventh), the main control board M stores the information related to the ball entry in the RAM (information to be displayed on the ball entry status display device J10). A predetermined range excluding the storage area is determined and set, and the process proceeds to step 1042 (11th). If No in step 1034 (11th), the process proceeds to step 1040 (11th). Also, in step 1008, after the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area (for example, compares the checksum recorded at the time of power failure with the amount of information stored in the RAM area), step 1036 ( In eleventh), the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1036 (eleventh), in step 1040 (eleventh), the main control board M sets the initialization range of the RAM to the information related to the ball entry in the RAM (for displaying on the ball entry state display device J10). information) is determined and set to a specific range including the storage area for storing the data, and the process proceeds to step 1042 (11th). If No in step 1036 (11th), the process proceeds to step 1012 . Next, in step 1042 (11th), the main control board M initializes the RAM ( RAM clear) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1006 . Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, when the power failure recovery data in the RAM is normal and the RAM clear is executed (when the RAM clear button is operated), the data is generated by the process in the second ROM/RAM area. And while the storage area that stores the information related to the stored ball entry is configured not to be initialized, if the power failure recovery data in the RAM is abnormal and the RAM is cleared (the RAM clear button is operated RAM clearing is executed even if you do not operate it), the storage area that stores the information related to the ball entry generated and stored by the processing in the second ROM/RAM area is initialized. It is In this way, the information related to ball entry is not data used during normal progress of the game. If the data is normal, it is configured not to initialize (clear the data) even if the RAM clear is executed, but if the power return data is abnormal, the information related to the ball entry is normal data. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the RAM is cleared, the information related to the ball entry is also initialized (data is cleared) when the RAM is cleared. An example of a case where the power recovery data becomes abnormal is (1) discharge occurs because the power has been turned off for one week or longer, and (2) the main control board M and the power supply unit E are connected. (3) The result of checking the contents of the RAM area is abnormal. Power failure recovery data is determined to be abnormal. It should be noted that turning on the power when the power recovery data is abnormal may be referred to as abnormal power up.

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
Next, in step 1018, after the main control board M executes various random number updating processes, in step 1044 (eleventh), the main control board M determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 1044 (11th), the process proceeds to step 1018 to repeatedly execute various random number updating processes. On the other hand, if No in step 1044 (eleventh), in step 1020 (eleventh), the main control board M sets power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area (storage area). . Next, in step 1022 (eleventh), the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not power failure occurs in main loop processing (processing that is not interrupt processing). By configuring in this way, when a power failure occurs in a situation where interrupt processing such as processing related to information related to ball entry (ball entry state calculation processing) is being executed and processing in the second ROM/RAM area is being executed Also, it is configured to determine that a power failure has occurred in the main loop processing (processing in the first ROM/RAM area) after the execution of the interrupt processing, and to execute the processing when the power failure occurs. Thus, the power-off processing can be executed after the execution of the interrupt processing is completed, that is, the processing of the first ROM/RAM area can be executed after the processing of the second ROM/RAM area is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing in the first ROM/RAM area (for example, the process at the time of power failure) is started during the execution of the process in the second ROM/RAM area. It should be noted that when an NMI interrupt occurs at the time of a power failure as in the above-described embodiment, and the processing at the time of the power failure is executed by the processing at the time of the NMI interrupt, the execution of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area is performed. If a power failure occurs during this period, the NMI interrupt is preferentially executed, and the process in the first ROM/RAM area is executed while the process in the second ROM/RAM area is being executed.

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
Further, when the timer interrupt processing is started, after executing the processing of steps 2000 to 1600 as the processing in the first ROM/RAM area, in step 1030 (11th), the main control board M Executes a call to a RAM area process.

<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>
Next, at step 2850 (eleventh), the main control board M executes the ball entry state calculation process. Next, in step 1032 (eleventh), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area, and thereafter executes steps 1900 to 1990 as processing in the first ROM/RAM area. Note that the ball entry state calculation process in step 2850 (eleventh) is the same as the ball entry state calculation process in step 2850 (ninth) described above in the ninth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. do. In addition, in the ball entry state calculation process, the display of the information related to the ball entry displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 before the display update timing (continuous role ratio, role ratio, base value, etc.) It is configured to execute a clearing process and a process of updating the display contents of the information related to the ball entry to be newly displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 when the display update timing is reached.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment, the first ROM area and the second ROM area are provided, and the first RAM area and the second RAM area are provided. and the processing of displaying the base value are executed in the second ROM/RAM area, thereby reducing the data capacity used in the first ROM/RAM area in the main control board M. can be done. Also, when a power failure occurs, it is determined that the power failure has occurred in the main loop processing, which is different from the interrupt processing, without generating an NMI interrupt as in the above-described embodiment ( (executes processing for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred), and then executes the processing for when the power is shut off in the main loop processing, thereby calculating the entering state, which is processing and interrupt processing in the second ROM/RAM area. Even if a power failure occurs during execution of processing (processing for generating and displaying information related to entering a ball), the processing in the second ROM/RAM area during interrupt processing is completed, and the first ROM during interrupt processing is completed.・Processing in the first ROM/RAM area after the processing in the RAM area has been completed. Since the main loop process is configured to execute processing related to power failure, the processing in the second ROM/RAM area is executed. A situation in which the power is turned off in the middle, and after the power is turned on, the process in the first ROM/RAM area is executed after the power is turned on even though the process in the second ROM/RAM area is being executed when the power is turned off. can be prevented, and when the process in the second ROM/RAM area is executed, the process in the first ROM/RAM area is executed after the execution of the process in the second ROM/RAM area is completed. can be

In the eleventh embodiment, when an abnormal power source is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether or not the information related to the ball entry is normal data. This storage area is also configured to be initialized, but the information related to ball entry must be accumulated normally without being initialized in order to check whether the machine is operating as a fair game machine. is preferred. Therefore, as a measure to prevent abnormal power startup, the connector that connects the main control board M and the power supply unit E (all connectors that electrically connect the main control board M and the power supply unit E ), it may be configured to provide a crimped portion so that it cannot be removed, or it may be configured to have a button battery inside the crimped portion of the main control board M, and even if an unintended power cut occurs may be configured to enable execution of backup of information related to.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, at the start of interrupt processing, a process for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred is executed, and if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power failure flag is turned on, If it is determined that the power failure has not occurred, the power off flag is turned off. After that, check the power off flag at the start of the main loop processing after the execution of the interrupt processing is completed, and if it is determined that the power off flag is ON = power off has occurred, turn off the power in the main loop processing It may be configured to execute time processing. Here, in the processing that is executed in the order of "main loop processing → interrupt processing → main loop processing → interrupt processing → ...", the execution period of one main loop process (after the interrupt process ends, the next It is configured so that the execution period of one interrupt process is longer than the period until the start of the interrupt process), and the period of the process when the power is turned off is relatively short. By executing this in the main loop process, it becomes difficult for the power to be cut off when noise occurs. Also, in the main loop process, a process for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred is executed. The processing may be configured to execute processing when the power is turned off. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed at the time of disconnection. Also, in the main loop processing, the processing for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred is executed. With such a configuration, the execution period of one main loop process is short compared to the period of executing one "main loop process → interrupt process". , the occurrence of power failure determined during the execution period of the main loop process can be treated as a valid determination. In such a configuration, it is preferable to use a noise filter to reduce the influence of noise on the gaming machine.

(12th embodiment)
In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to generate the character product ratio, the continuous character product ratio, etc. as the information related to the ball entry, but the information related to the ball entry that can be generated is not limited to the above. Therefore, as the information related to the entering ball that can be generated, a configuration that can generate information related to the entering ball in a manner different from that generated in the above-described embodiment will be described as a twelfth embodiment. Only the differences between are described in detail.

First, FIG. 137 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the twelfth embodiment. Step 1037 (twelfth), step 2850 (twelfth), and step 2900 (twelfth) are different from the present embodiment. ), the main control board M turns on the short-term excess ball payout A flag {when the excess ball payout A (details will be described later) is detected when the number of prize balls paid out in a predetermined period is large. flag} is off. If Yes at step 1037 (twelfth), the process proceeds to step 2000 to execute timer interrupt processing thereafter. On the other hand, if No in step 1037 (12th), the timer interrupt processing of steps 2000 to 3000 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 2850 (12th). In this way, when the short-term excess ball payout A flag is on (when the excess ball payout A is detected), the processing of steps 2000 to 3000 relating to normal game progress is not executed, In other words, it is configured to stop the progress of the game (details will be described later).

Also, after executing the prize ball payout command transmission control process in step 3000, or when it is determined that the short-term excess balls A flag is on in step 1037 (12th), in step 2850 (12th), the main The control board M executes a ball entering state calculation process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2900 (twelfth), the main control board M executes a ball entering state determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3500 .

Next, FIG. 138 is a flow chart of the discharged ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the twelfth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2530 (twelfth), that is, after adding (incrementing) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter value in step 2508, in step 2530 (twelfth), total discharge ball The confirmation means MJ11-C90 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-T90 (counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s in a predetermined period), The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, FIG. 139 is a flow chart of the number-of-prizing-balls determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the twelfth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are step 2740-1 (twelfth), step 2740-2 (twelfth), step 2740-3 (twelfth) and step 2740-4 (twelfth), that is, step After adding the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) related to the first main game start port A10 to the number of prize balls counter value at 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH at step 2740-1 (twelfth). , the counter value of the short-term prize ball counter TMHc (a counter that measures the total number of prize balls related to all the winning holes paid out in a predetermined period) is added to the number of prize balls related to the first main game start port A10 Then, 3 balls) are added, and the process moves to step 2708 . Also, after adding the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) related to the second main game start port B10 to the number of prize balls counter value in step 2714, the payout of prize balls is determined in step 2740-2 (12th). The means MH adds the number of prize balls (three balls in this example) to the counter value of the short-term prize number counter TMHc, and proceeds to step 2718 . In the twelfth embodiment, the number of prize balls related to the first main game start port A10 is 3 balls, and the number of prize balls related to the second main game start port B10 is 3 balls. The number of prize balls is not limited to this, and the number of prize balls related to the first main game start port A10 may be 4 or more (4 or 5, etc.), or the prize related to the second main game start port B10 The number of balls may be less than 3 (1 or 2), and candidates for the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls related to the first main game start port A10 is 3 or more, The number of prize balls is 1 to 3). morphology).

Also, in step 2724, after adding the number of prize balls (13 balls in this example) related to the first (second) big prize opening C10 (C20) to the number of prize ball counter value, step 2740-3 (12th) The prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize balls (13 balls in this example) to the counter value of the short-term prize ball counter TMHc, and Go to step 2728 . Also, after adding the number of prize balls (in this example, 10 balls) related to the general winning hole P10 to the number of prize balls counter value in step 2734, in step 2740-4 (12th), the prize ball payout determination means MH , the number of prize balls (in this example, 10 balls) related to the general winning hole P10 is added to the counter value of the short-term prize ball counter TMHc, and the process proceeds to step 2738 . In the twelfth embodiment, the number of prize balls related to the first (second) big prize hole C10 (C20) is 13 balls, but the number of prize balls in each big prize hole is not limited to this. The number of prize balls associated with the first big prize opening C10 may be set to any one of 10 to 15, and the number of prize balls associated with the second big prize opening C20 may be set to any value of 10 to 15. Also, from among these candidates for the number of prize balls (10 to 15 prize balls for the first big prize opening C10, 10 to 15 prize balls for the second big prize opening C20) The number of prize balls associated with the winning opening C10 and the number of prize balls associated with the second big winning opening C20 may be appropriately combined (applicable to all embodiments). In the twelfth embodiment, the number of prize balls for the general prize hole P10 is 10, but the number of prize balls for the general prize hole P10 is not limited to this, and the number of prize balls for the general prize hole P10 is not limited to this. The number may be set anywhere from 3 to 10. In addition, the second general winning opening P20, which serves as both an auxiliary game starting opening and a general winning opening (when a game ball enters the second general winning opening P20, an auxiliary game content determination random number is acquired and a prize ball is paid out. ) may be provided, and the number of prize balls related to the second general winning hole P20 may be set to one or two. In addition, one or more general winning openings P10 may be provided and one or more second general winning openings P20 may be provided. A position where a game ball can easily enter (a position where a game ball can easily enter when hitting left, for example, a direction in which a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area deviates from the flow path toward the first main game start opening A10) On the other hand, the second general winning hole P20 is set at a position where a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area can easily enter (a position where a game ball can easily enter when hitting the right side). For example, it may be provided in the vicinity of the big winning opening, upstream of the big winning opening, or downstream of the big winning opening.

Next, FIG. 140 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 20 in the twelfth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1426 (twelfth), step 1350 (twelfth), step 1442 (twelfth) and step 1444 (twelfth). If it is determined that there is, in step 1426 (twelfth), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C will turn on the fluctuation fixing flag (flag that turns on when the fluctuation fixing time) is on. Determine whether or not If Yes in step 1426 (12th), the process proceeds to step 1444 (12th), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Also, after turning off the fluctuating flag at step 1424, at step 1350 (twelfth), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C executes fluctuation fixed time determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1442 (twelfth), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the fluctuation fixing flag, and proceeds to step 1444 (twelfth). Next, at step 1444 (twelfth), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the timer value of the variable fixed time timer MN30t (a decrement timer for measuring the variable fixed time). is 0. If Yes in step 1444 (12th), the process proceeds to step 1430, and if No in step 1444 (12th), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). In the twelfth embodiment, it is added to the variable start condition determined in step 1403 that the variable fixed time is not set.

Next, FIG. 141 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1350 (twelfth) of FIG. 140 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 1352, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the short-term excessive ball-out B flag {excessive ball-out B detected when the number of prize balls paid out in a predetermined period is large (details (to be described later) is detected, it is determined whether or not a flag} is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 1352, in step 1354, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the variable fixed time timer MN30t to a long fixed time (relatively long variable fixed time, this example Then, 5 seconds) is set, the variable fixed time timer MN30t is started, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 1442 (12th) process}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1352, in step 1356, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the short-term excess ball output C flag {detected when the number of prize balls paid out in a predetermined period is large. It is determined whether or not a flag} that is turned on when an excessive number of balls C (details will be described later) is detected is on. In the case of Yes in step 1356, in step 1358, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the variable fixed time timer MN30t to a medium fixed time (shorter than long fixed time and shorter than short fixed time). A variable fixed time of a long time value (1 second in this example) is set, the variable fixed time timer MN30t is started, and the next process {step 1442 (12th) process} is performed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1356, in step 1360, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the variable fixed time timer MN30t to a short fixed time (relatively short variable fixed time). , 0.3 seconds in this example) is set, the variable fixed time timer MN30t is started, and the next process {step 1442 (12th) process} is performed. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the number of prize balls paid out is large in a predetermined period, it is possible to detect the excessive number of paid balls. It has three excess balls, C and excess balls. Although the details will be described later, the total number of balls paid out in a predetermined period, in other words, the total number of prized balls related to all the winning holes in the predetermined period is in descending order of "excess balls paid out A>excess balls paid out B>balls paid out". Excessive balls C”, and when excessive balls paid A are detected, the progress of the game is stopped. not configured. In addition, when excessive balls are detected, it can be determined that game balls are excessively paid out in the short term, so excessive balls are detected more than when excessive balls are not detected. The case is configured so that the variable fixed time is longer. In addition, in the situation where the excess balls are paid out, the case where the excess balls paid out B occurs is more important than the case where the excess balls paid out C occurs. When the total number of prize balls is large (the pace at which game balls are paid out is fast), the variable fixed time is set to be longer.

Next, FIG. 142 is a flow chart of ball entry state calculation processing according to the subroutine of step 2850 (twelfth) of FIG. 137 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 2870, the ball-entering information control means NS determines whether or not the ball-out rate timer counting flag (the flag that turns on when the ball-out rate timer DRt is counting) is off. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, the ratio of the total number of prize balls related to all the winning holes to the total number of balls fired for each predetermined period (in this example, it is 60 seconds, and may also be referred to as a confirmation value) , and is configured to measure the predetermined period using a ball payout rate timer DRt. If Yes at step 2870, at step 2871, the entering ball information control means NS clears the timer value of the ball output rate timer DRt to zero, and starts the ball output rate timer DRt. Next, at step 2872 , the entering ball information control means NS turns on the ball output rate timer clocking flag, and proceeds to step 2873 . It should be noted that even if the result of step 2870 is No, the process proceeds to step 2873 .

Next, at step 2873, the entered-ball information control means NS sets the timer value of the ball-discharge rate timer DRt to the confirmation value (the short-term ball-discharge counter value and the short-term total discharged-confirmation-count counter value are temporarily stored to determine the short-term ball-discharge rate). In this example, it is determined whether or not the time has reached 60 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 2873, the entering ball information control means NS overwrites the counter value of the short-term winning ball counter TMHc on the oldest area of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term winning ball counter value and temporarily stores it (Fig. 143). reference). Next, at step 2875, the entering ball information control means NS overwrites the counter value of the short-term total confirmed discharge number counter MJ11c-T90 to the oldest area of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term total confirmed discharge number counter value, and temporarily stores it. (See FIG. 143). Next, at step 2876, the entering ball information control means NS sets the short-term ball output rate as "the sum of the short-term winning ball counter values stored in the ring buffer/the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter stored in the ring buffer. value×100”, and overwrites and temporarily stores the calculated short-term ball payout rate. The short-term ball output rate is the sum of the number of winning balls related to all the winning holes with respect to the total number of balls fired in a predetermined period. It is configured to calculate a ball rate. Next, at step 2877, the entering ball information control means NS clears the counter value of the short-term prize ball number counter TMHc and the counter value of the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-T90 to zero. Next, in step 2878, the entering ball information control means NS turns off the ball output rate timer clocking flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 2900 (twelfth) process}. Incidentally, even if the result of step 2873 is No, the next process {process of step 2900 (twelfth)} is performed.

Next, FIG. 143 is an image diagram of short-term payout rate calculation in the twelfth embodiment. In the figure, the short-term prize ball counter value is stored in the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term prize ball counter value, which is a ring buffer used for calculating the short-term ball payout rate, and the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value. The manner in which the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value is stored in the ring buffer corresponding to is described in detail. A1 to A13 represent the data of the short-term winning balls counter value, and B1 to B13 represent the data of the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value. First, as shown in the first row, the ring buffers corresponding to the short-term winning ball counter value have "No. 1 = A1", "No. 2 = A2", "No. 3 = A3", ..., "No. 8 = A8", "9th = A9", and "10th = A10", where A1 is the oldest data and A10 is the latest data. Also, in the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term total discharge confirmation counter value, "No. 1 = B1", "No. 2 = B2", "No. 3 = B3" ... "No. 8 = B8", "No. 9 = B9" and "10th=B10", where B1 is the oldest data and B10 is the latest data (the latest data is stored in the 10th area). The address indicating the area storing the latest data is stored and managed in a predetermined variable such as a pointer, and by sequentially changing the address, the area storing the latest data can be specified. can. In addition, in the area corresponding to one number of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term prize ball count counter value, the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value measured in 60 seconds is stored, and the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value is stored. In the area corresponding to one number of the ring buffer corresponding to the value, the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value measured in 60 seconds is stored.

After 60 seconds have passed since the data related to the short-term prize ball count counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value are stored as shown in the first stage of the figure, the short-term prize balls are displayed as shown in the second stage of the figure. In the first area where "A1", which is the oldest data of the ring buffer corresponding to the number counter value, is stored, " A11" is overwritten and stored, so the data stored in No. 1 is changed from "A1" to "A11". Similarly, in the first area storing the oldest data "B1" of the ring buffer corresponding to the counter value of the short-term total emission confirmation number, the short-term total amount measured in the newly elapsed 60 seconds is stored. Since "B11", which is the discharge confirmation number counter value, is overwritten and stored, the data stored at No. 1 changes from "B1" to "B11". The area in which the latest data is stored is changed from the 10th area to the 1st area (see the second row in the figure).

When 60 seconds have passed after that, as shown in the third stage of the same figure, in the area No. 2 storing the oldest data "A2" of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term winning ball counter value, the relevant Since "A12", which is the short-term winning ball counter value measured in the newly elapsed 60 seconds, is overwritten and stored, the data stored in No. 2 changes from "A2" to "A12". Similarly, in the area No. 2 where "B2", which is the oldest data of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term total emission count counter value, is stored, the short-term total amount measured in the newly elapsed 60 seconds is stored. Since "B12", which is the discharge confirmation number counter value, is overwritten and stored, the data stored in No. 2 changes from "B2" to "B12". The area in which the latest data is stored is changed from area 1 to area 2 (see the third row in the figure).

When 60 seconds have passed after that, as shown in the fourth row of the same figure, the oldest data "A3" of the ring buffer corresponding to the short-term winning ball counter value is stored in the area No. 3. Since "A13", which is the counter value of the number of short-term winning balls measured in the newly elapsed 60 seconds, is overwritten and stored, the data stored in No. 3 changes from "A3" to "A13". Similarly, in the area No. 3 where "B3", which is the oldest data in the ring buffer corresponding to the counter value of the number of short-term total emission confirmations, is stored, the short-term total amount measured in the newly elapsed 60 seconds is stored. Since "B13", which is the discharge confirmation number counter value, is overwritten and stored, the data stored in No. 3 changes from "B3" to "B13". The area in which the latest data is stored is changed from the second area to the third area (see the fourth level in the figure).

Thus, in the twelfth embodiment, the short-term prize ball number counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value measured in the 60 seconds every 60 seconds are overwritten on the oldest data and stored. Since it is configured, the ring buffer is configured to store the short-term prize ball count counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation count value measured in the last 600 seconds (60 seconds x 10 pieces). The short-term ball payout rate is updated every 60 seconds by calculating the short-term ball payout rate using the short-term prize ball counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value measured in the last 600 seconds. It is configured so that it can be calculated by

In the twelfth embodiment, the ring buffer is used to store the short-term prize ball counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation counter value to calculate the short-term ball payout rate. As long as the short-term ball payout rate can be calculated each time, the method of storing the short-term prize ball number counter value and the short-term total discharge confirmation number counter value can be changed in any way.

Next, FIG. 144 is a flow chart of the entering ball state determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (twelfth) of FIG. 137 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 2902, the incoming-ball information control means NS determines whether or not data are stored in all areas of the ring buffer relating to the payout rate. Here, the ring buffer relating to the ball payout rate is the ring buffer relating to the short-term total confirmed discharge counter value and the ring buffer relating to the short-term winning ball counter value. For example, immediately after the power is turned on (300 seconds after the power is turned on), data is not stored in all areas of the ring buffer related to the payout rate (data is stored in one area every 60 seconds, and 10 It takes 600 seconds for data to be stored in all areas), and excess balls (excessive balls A, B, C) occur. It is configured not to determine whether or not the

If Yes at step 2902, at step 2904, the entering ball information control means NS determines that the temporarily stored short-term ball payout rate is a predetermined value A (short-term ball payout rate at which excessive ball payout A is detected). , in this example, 400%) or more. If Yes at step 2904, at step 2906, the incoming ball information control means NS turns on the short-term excess ball output A flag. Next, at step 2908, the incoming ball information control means NS sets a short-term excess ball-out A command (a command to the sub-control board S side and a command indicating that the excess ball-out A is detected), The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500).

If No at step 2904, at step 2910, the ball-entering information control means NS turns off the short-term excess ball-out A flag because the short-term ball-out rate is less than 400% (short-term excess ball-out A flag is already off, the process of step 2910 is not executed). Next, in step 2912, the ball-entering information control means NS determines that the temporarily stored short-term ball-out rate is a predetermined value B (a short-term ball-out rate at which excessive ball-out B is detected. In this example, , 350%) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2912, in step 2914, the incoming ball information control means NS turns on the short-term excess ball output B flag. Next, at step 2916, the incoming ball information control means NS sets a short-term excess ball-out B command (a command to the sub-control board S side and a command indicating that an excess ball-out B is detected), The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500).

If No at step 2912, at step 2918, the ball-entering information control means NS turns off the short-term ball-out excess B flag because the short-term ball-out rate is less than 350% (short-term ball-out excess B flag is already off, the process of step 2918 is not executed). Next, in step 2920, the ball-entering information control means NS determines that the temporarily stored short-term ball-out rate is a predetermined value C (a short-term ball-out rate at which excessive ball-out C is detected. In this example, , 300%) or more. If Yes at step 2920, at step 2922, the incoming ball information control means NS turns on the short-term excess ball output C flag. Next, in step 2924, the incoming ball information control means NS sets a short-term excess ball-out C command (a command to the sub-control board S side and a command indicating that an excess ball-out C is detected), The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500).

If No at step 2920, at step 2926, the ball-entering information control means NS turns off the short-term excessive ball-out C flag because the short-term ball-out rate is less than 300%. If it is already off, the process of step 2922 is not executed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500). Note that even if No in step 2902, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500). In the twelfth embodiment, the short-term ball payout rate is overwritten and temporarily stored each time the short-term ball payout rate is calculated. It is the latest calculated short-term ball delivery rate. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when the short-term ball payout rate is excessively high, excessive ball payout is detected. In addition, there are three types of excess balls paid out, ie, excess balls paid out A, excess balls paid out B, and excess balls paid out C, and the excess balls paid out are arranged according to the height of the short-term ball payout rate. ing. In addition, the three excess balls paid out are, in order from the short-term ball paid-out rate, "excessive ball paid-out A (short-term ball paid-out rate of 400% or more)>excessive ball paid-out B (short-term ball paid-out rate of 350% or more and less than 400%)> Excess ball output C (short-term ball output rate of 300% or more and less than 350%)”. In addition, although the details will be described later, when an excessive number of paid balls is detected, the progress of the game is delayed (or stopped), thereby eliminating the excessive number of paid balls. It is configured such that the process of delaying (or stopping) the progress of the game differs depending on the type of excess balls paid out (detected).

Next, FIG. 145 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 137 in the twelfth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are steps 1643-1 (twelfth), step 1643-2 (twelfth) and step 1850 (twelfth). At step 1643-1 (twelfth), the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game end demonstration execution permission flag, and proceeds to step 1643-2 (twelfth). Also, if it is determined in step 1602 that the condition device operation flag is off, or if it is determined in step 1627 that the timer value of the open timer has not reached the predetermined time at which the round ends, Go to step 1643-2 (12th). Next, at step 1643-2 (twelfth), the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the final round of the special game being executed has ended. In the case of Yes at step 1643-2 (12th), at step 1850 (12th), the special game control means MP30 executes a special game end demonstration time control process to be described later, and the next process (process of step 1900). transition to On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1643-2 (12th), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

Next, FIG. 146 is a flowchart of the special game end demonstration time control process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (twelfth) of FIG. 145 in the twelfth embodiment. First, at step 1852, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the special game end demonstration running flag (flag turned on during execution of the special game end demo time) is off. In the case of Yes at step 1852, at step 1854, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the short-term excess ball output B flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 1854, at step 1856, the special game control means MP30 sets the end demonstration time timer SDt (a timer for measuring the special game end demonstration time, a decrement timer) to a long demonstration time (relatively long time). A special game ending demonstration time (120 seconds in this example) is set, an ending demonstration time timer SDt is started, and the process proceeds to step 1864 .

Moreover, in the case of No in step 1854, in step 1858, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the short-term excess ball output C flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 1858, at step 1860, the special game control means MP30 sets the end demo time timer SDt to a middle demo time (a special time value that is shorter than the long demo time and longer than the short demo time). A game ending demonstration time (10 seconds in this example) is set, an ending demonstration time timer SDt is started, and the process proceeds to step 1864 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1858, at step 1862, the special game control means MP30 sets the end demonstration time timer SDt to a short demo time (relatively short special game end demo time, in this example, 3 seconds) is set, an end demonstration time timer SDt is started, and step 1864 is entered.

Next, at step 1864, the special game control means MP30 sets a special game end display instruction command (command to the sub-control board S side). In the twelfth embodiment, the special game end display instruction command includes information related to the special game end demonstration time (set to the end demonstration time timer SDt) determined in step 1856, step 1860 or step 1862. On the sub-control board S side, by receiving the special game end display instruction command, it is possible to grasp whether the special game end demonstration time is a long demonstration time, a middle demonstration time, or a short demonstration time. is configured so that Next, at step 1866, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game end demonstration running flag, and proceeds to step 1868. It should be noted that even if No in step 1852 , the process proceeds to step 1868 .

Next, at step 1868, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the timer value of the end demonstration time timer SDt is zero. In the case of Yes at step 1868, at step 1870, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game end demonstration running flag. Next, at step 1872, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game end demonstration execution permission flag. Next, at step 1700, the special game control means MP30 executes the above-described game state determination process after the end of the special game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Incidentally, even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, when the excess ball payout B occurs (when the short-term excess ball payout B flag is ON), the special game end demo time is relatively long. In this example, it is 120 seconds), and when the excess ball payout C occurs (when the short-term excess ball payout C flag is on), the special game end demo time is longer than the short demo time, which is the middle demo time (this example). 10 seconds). In other words, when excessive ball payout B or excessive ball payout C occurs, the short-term ball payout rate is suppressed by making the special game end demonstration time longer than when the excess ball payout does not occur. is configured to allow It should be noted that, if the excess balls A is generated, the progress of the game is stopped (see the processing of step 1037 (12th) in FIG. 137), so the It is configured so that it is not necessary to determine the special game end demo time to be used. In this way, when excessive ball payout B or excessive ball payout C occurs, the fixed time of fluctuation in pattern fluctuation becomes longer than when excessive ball payout does not occur, and the special game end demo time is displayed. It is relatively longer than when the ball excess does not occur, and is configured to suppress an excessive increase in the short-term ball payout rate. In addition, when the excess ball payout B or the excess ball payout C occurs in a situation where the special game is not being executed, the short-term ball payout rate is suppressed by setting the fluctuation fixed time in the pattern fluctuation to a long time, and the special game is performed. is being executed, the short-term ball payout rate is suppressed by increasing the special game end demo time to a longer time when the excess ball payout B or the excess ball payout C occurs. To suppress the short-term ball-out rate when excessive ball-out occurs regardless of whether or not a game is being executed. In addition, it is configured to have a special game start demonstration time (a time set before the start of the first round in the special game), and the excess balls paid out (excessive balls paid out B or The short-term ball output rate may be suppressed by configuring the special game start demonstration time to be relatively longer when the ball excess C) is occurring. In addition, although the configuration has been exemplified in which the short-term ball payout rate can be suppressed by adjusting the time value of the special game end demonstration time and/or the special game start demonstration time, the short-term ball payout rate can be suppressed by adjusting the time between rounds. It may be configured so that the rate can be suppressed (the short-term ball payout rate is suppressed by increasing the time between rounds).

In addition, in the gaming machine according to this example, the configuration regarding the special game ending demonstration time may be configured as follows.
(1) As a special game, a high-profit special game with a relatively high expected value of winning prize balls (for example, a jackpot where the number of execution rounds is 16R and the game state changes to a probability variable game state after the jackpot ends) is relative to the expected value of winning prize balls. It has a relatively low profit special game (for example, the number of execution rounds is 4R and a big hit that shifts to a non-probability variation game state after the end of the big win).
(2) The special game end demo time in the high-profit special game won in the non-time-reduced gaming state (non-electrical support state) is relatively long (for example, 10 seconds), and the non-time-reduced gaming state (non-electrical support state) The special game end demo time in the low-profit special game won in the support state) is relatively short (for example, 5 seconds).
(3) The special game end demonstration time in the high-profit special game won in the time-reduced gaming state (electrical sapo state) is the special game end demonstration in the high-profit special game won in the non-time-reduced gaming state (non-electrical sapo state) It is shorter than time (for example, 6 seconds).
(4) The special game end demonstration time in the low-profit special game won in the time-reduced gaming state (electrical sapo state) is the special game end demonstration in the low-profit special game won in the non-time-reduced gaming state (non-electrical sapo state) The special game end demo time in the low-profit special game that is equal to the time (for example, 5 seconds) or won in the time-reduced gaming state (electrical support state) is in the non-time-reduced gaming state (non-electrical support state) Although it is shorter than the special game end demo time in the low-profit special game won (for example, 4 seconds), the special game end demonstration time in the low-profit special game won in the time-reduced game state (electric sapo state) and non- The difference in the time value from the special game end demo time in the low-profit special game won in the time-reduced game state (non-electrical support state) is the special game in the high-profit special game won in the time-reduced game state (electrical support state) It is less than the difference in the time value between the end demonstration time and the special game end demonstration time in the high-profit special game won in the non-time shortening game state (non-electric support state).
The above configurations (1) to (4) may be applied to the pachinko game machine according to this example. It should be noted that the above-described numerical values (values in parentheses) are only examples, and each numerical value can be changed if the magnitude relationship of each illustrated numerical value (including the magnitude relationship of each difference) has the above configuration. no problem. Also, the above configuration is related to the special game end demonstration time, but the same configuration may be applied to the special game start demonstration time.

Next, FIG. 147 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 6500 (twelfth) and step 5600 (twelfth), that is, a loop process for repeatedly executing (e), which is the repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM, is executed. In this case, first, in step 6500 (twelfth), the sub control board S executes an excess ball payout display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 5100 . Also, after executing the decorative symbol display control process at step 5500, at step 5600 (twelfth), the sub-control board S executes a special game-related display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 5700.

Next, FIG. 148 is a flow chart of the excessive ball payout display control process according to the subroutine of step 6500 (twelfth) of FIG. 147 in the twelfth embodiment. First, in step 6502, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the short-term excessive ball payout A command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 6502, at step 6504, the error notification control means SM30 issues a command to display the excess ball payout display A (display for notifying that the excess ball payout A is detected) on the performance display device SG. set. Next, in step 6505, the error notification control means SM30 causes the effect display device SG to display an ending effect (an effect executed during a period in which the progress of the game is stopped due to the detection of the excessive number of paid balls A). , which is an effect mode for displaying the ending of the effect executed during the special game, details of which will be described later). It should be noted that the ending effect will end when the excess ball payout A is eliminated and the progress of the game is resumed. Next, in step 6506, the error notification control means SM30 sets the frame decoration lamp D18-L to the lighting mode A (the lighting mode corresponding to the situation in which the excess ball output A is detected, and in this example, in red). turn on) to set a command to turn on the light, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). Further, if No in step 6502, in step 6508, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not a short-term excess ball payout B command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 6508, at step 6510, a command is set to display an excessively paid ball display B (display for notifying that the excessively paid ball B is detected) on the performance display device SG. Next, in step 6512, the error notification control means SM30 sets the frame decoration lamp D18-L to the lighting mode B (the lighting mode corresponding to the situation in which the excess ball output B is detected, and in this example, in red). flashing) to set a command to light up, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). Note that even if No in step 6508, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). In this way, in the case where the excessive ball output A or the excessive ball output B occurs, the fact that the excessive ball output is generated is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the frame decoration lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the excessive ball output. Configured to illuminate D18-L. In addition, when excessive ball output C occurs, the short-term ball output rate is lower than when excessive ball output A or excessive ball output B occurs, and the urgency to suppress the short-term ball output rate is relatively low. It is configured so as not to inform the user that the excess balls C have been paid out by the display in SG or the lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L. In addition, it is not limited to this, and even when the excessive ball output C occurs, it is configured to inform the fact that the excessive ball output C is displayed by the display on the effect display device SG or the lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L. good too. In addition, as a configuration for notifying that an excessive number of balls has been released depending on the lighting mode, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is configured to light up, but the present invention is not limited to this, and games other than the frame decoration lamp D18-L are provided. The effect lamp (only) may be lighted, or the frame decoration lamp D18-L and the game effect lamp other than the frame decoration lamp D18-L may be lighted. In addition, since the progress of the game is stopped when the excessive number of paid balls A occurs, the excessive number of paid balls A is generated by voice output from the speaker D24 as a notification mode other than the display on the effect display device SG and the lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L. It may be configured to notify that it is being done (it may be only an audio output from the speaker D24, or an appropriate combination of display on the effect display device SG, lighting of the frame decoration lamp D18-L, and audio output from the speaker D24 may be used). Also, an LED (such as the error lamp SS3 mentioned above) dedicated to the detection of an excessive number of paid balls is provided near the performance display device SG, and the LED lights up when the excessive number of paid balls A or B is detected. (The lighting mode of the LED may be made different between when the excess ball output A is detected and when the excess ball output B is detected). In addition, the notification mode on the side of the sub-control board S (notification mode in the effect display device SG and various LEDs) when the excessive number of paid balls A occurs is a notification mode that makes it easy to recognize that the degree of importance is high (a notification mode that stands out for the player). The notification mode on the side of the sub-control board S (notification mode in the effect display device SG and various LEDs) when the excess ball output B occurs is a notification mode that makes it easy to recognize that the importance is low (a notification mode that is inconspicuous for the player). Or, it may be a notification mode that only the people involved in the game hall can recognize.

Next, FIG. 149 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 5600 (twelfth) of FIG. 147 in the twelfth embodiment. First, at step 5631, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 5631, at step 5632, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 5632, at step 5633, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag. Next, in step 5634, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the start of the big win on the effect display device SG (performs appropriate display based on the type of the big win), and proceeds to step 5635. It should be noted that even if No in step 5631 , the process proceeds to step 5635 .

Next, at step 5635, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (game It may be executed appropriately as necessary based on the nature and the type of jackpot). Next, at step 5636, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 5636, at step 5637, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the received special game end display instruction command, and sets the special game end demonstration time of the special game being executed to the long demonstration time (this example 120 seconds). In the case of Yes at step 5637, at step 5638, the background effect display control means SM23 executes a blessing effect (that a large number of game balls to the player, details of which will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 5642 .

Also, if No in step 5637, in other words, if the special game end demo time in the special game being executed is medium demo time (10 seconds in this example) or short demo time (3 seconds in this example). , at step 5640, the background effect display control means SM23 executes the end demonstration time effect (effect to be executed at the special game end demo time) when the normal effect (the end demo time effect) is not executed. (details of which will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 5642. Next, at step 5642, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700). It should be noted that even if No in step 5632 or step 5636, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700). As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the effect mode of the end demonstration time effect can differ depending on the length of the special game end demonstration time (whether it is a long demo time or not). It should be noted that the variable fixed time may also be configured so that the mode of presentation during the variable fixed time can differ depending on the time value of the variable fixed time.

Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram at the time of detection of excessive ball payout in the twelfth embodiment. In the figure, there are cases in which excessive ball payout A is detected during execution of a special game, cases in which excessive ball payout B is detected during execution of a special game, and excessive ball payout C during execution of a special game. When it is detected, and are exemplified.

<When excess ball output A is detected>
First, the jackpot symbol "777" is stopped as the decorative symbol to be stopped (at this point in time, there is a possibility that the excess balls C have already been detected). After that, the big win is started and the excess ball payout B is detected (the short-term ball payout rate is 350% or more), so the effect display device SG displays the excess ball payout display B. Note that the frame decoration lamp D18-L is lit in the lighting mode B (red flashing). After that, since the short-term ball payout rate further increased during the execution of the big win, excess ball payout A is detected and the progress of the game is stopped. Also, in the effect display device SG, the display of the character image and "Congratulations!!" is executed as the ending effect, and the excess ball output display A is displayed. Here, when the progress of the game is stopped, the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are closed and the winning becomes invalid, and the other winning holes (first main game starting hole A10 etc.) Winning a prize is also invalidated, the main game pattern is not changed, and the game ball cannot be shot. After that, the short-term ball-out rate is lowered, the excess-ball-out A is eliminated, the progress of the game is resumed (the stopped progress of the jackpot is also restarted), and the special game ends while the excess-ball-out B is detected. Since the demo time has started, the special game end demo time is 120 seconds, which is the long demo time, and the end demo time effect is a blessing effect in which a character image and "Big Explosion!" are displayed. The progress of the game is not restarted until the excess ball payout A is resolved (the excess ball payout B is detected). After that, the special game end demonstration time ends, and the special game ends. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, even when the excess balls A are detected and the progress of the game is stopped, when an error is detected such as when illegal magnetism or illegal radio waves are detected (for example, the speaker outputting a warning sound from the effect display device SG or notifying that fraud is detected by the effect display device SG), by configuring to execute an effect in which a character appearing during a pattern change is displayed, It can be constructed so as not to arouse the player's excessive uneasiness that an abnormality may occur in the gaming machine. still. The game is stopped because the excess ball payout A is detected, and after that, the short-term ball payout rate decreases, so the excess ball payout A is canceled and the excess ball payout B is detected, and then the short-term ball payout rate rises again. When the excessive number of paid balls A is detected, the progress of the game is stopped again.

<When excess ball output B is detected>
First, the jackpot symbol "777" is stopped as the decorative symbol to be stopped. After that, the big hit is started and the excess ball payout C is detected, but since the sub-control board S side does not execute the notification when the excess ball payout C is detected, the display mode on the performance display device SG does not change. After that, since the short-term ball payout rate further increased during the execution of the big win, the excess ball payout B was detected, and the effect display device SG displayed "Congratulations!!" Is displayed. After that, since the special game end demo time was started while the excess ball output A was detected, the special game end demo time was 120 seconds, which is a long demo time, and the end demo time effect was a character image and a "big explosion" as a blessing effect. !” is displayed. After that, the special game ending demonstration time ends, and the special game ends.

<When excess ball output C is detected>
First, the jackpot symbol "777" is stopped as the decorative symbol to be stopped. After that, the big hit is started and the excess ball payout C is detected, but since the sub-control board S side does not execute the notification when the excess ball payout C is detected, the display mode on the performance display device SG does not change. After that, since the special game end demo time is started while the excessive ball output C is detected, the special game end demo time becomes 10 seconds, which is the middle demo time, and the end demo time effect is the normal effect, and the display at the end of the special game. {display the number of consecutive games (the number of consecutive jackpots won in the time-reduced game state including the first win) and the total number of game balls acquired in the series} is executed, and the special game ends. Become.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the special game end demonstration time is started in a situation where the excess ball output B is detected, the special game end demonstration time is set to 120 seconds, which is the long demonstration time. However, even if the excess ball payout B is resolved during the special game end demo time, the special game end demo time is configured not to end until the long demo time of 120 seconds elapses, but it is not limited to this. However, if the excess ball payout is resolved during the special game end demo time (for example, when the excess ball payout B is resolved and the excess ball payout C is detected), the special game end demo time is forcibly terminated. Alternatively, the special game end demonstration time may be shortened (for example, the special game may end 10 seconds after the excess ball payout B is resolved and the excess ball payout C is detected). In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to configure so that there is no inconsistency in the presentation during the end demonstration time presentation, and it is possible to switch smoothly even when the special game end demonstration time is forcibly terminated or shortened. It may be configured so as to have a production mode of the end demonstration time production.

With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment, the total number of prize balls related to all the winning holes accounts for the total number of balls fired in a predetermined period (600 seconds in this example). The short-term ball payout rate, which is a ratio, can be calculated each time a specific period (in this example, 60 seconds) passes, and when the short-term ball payout rate is excessively rising, the short-term ball payout rate is calculated. 3 levels of excess balls (excessive balls paid A, excess balls paid B, excess balls paid C) can be detected. In addition, depending on the type of detected excess balls, the presence or absence of notification on the sub-control board S side, the notification mode, the effect mode during the special game, the effect mode of the end demonstration time effect, and the game progress on the main control board M side. If the short-term pay-out rate is too high, the game is stopped and the short-term pay-out rate is changed by structuring so that the presence/absence of stoppage, the length of the special game end demonstration time, the length of the variable fixed time, etc. can be different. If the rate is slightly high, a control suitable for the short-term ball payout rate can be executed, such as delaying the progress of the game without executing the notification, and the excessively increased short-term ball payout rate can be reduced to an appropriate value. It is possible to return. In addition, by configuring in this way, when a model test is conducted, even if a series of games that rarely occur in a normal game accidentally occurs, the short-term ball output rate can be reduced. can be suppressed. In addition, even if the short-term ball payout rate is suppressed by controlling to stop the game progress or delay the game progress, the display on the effect display device SG may perform an effect such as congratulating the player. Since it is constructed so as not to execute an easily recognizable warning such as time, the player can concentrate on the game without being distracted by the excess number of balls paid out.

Incidentally, in this example, when the excessive ball output A is detected during execution of the special game, the main control board M side is configured to stop the progress of all the games including the big win. is not limited, and during the detection of the excess ball output A, the progress of the big win may not be stopped and the pattern variation may not be executed (detection of balls entering various winning openings may be enabled or disabled. good). In the case of such a configuration, when the excess ball payout A is detected after the big win is completed, the main game pattern does not start to change until the excess ball payout A is canceled, so the excess ball payout A is canceled. The jackpot end demonstration time may be extended until the end of the jackpot is reached, or the same performance mode as the end demo time performance is performed until the excess balls are released (the end demo time performance appears to be extended). production) may be configured to be executed. In addition, as a configuration that can be applied to all the excess balls paid out (excessive balls paid A, At least one of the excessive balls display A, the excessive balls paid out display B, the excessive balls paid out display C, etc.) and the stop of the game progress may be configured not to be executed.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the short-term ball payout rate is calculated every 60 seconds and the presence or absence of excessive ball payout is monitored. It may be configured to calculate the short-term ball payout rate and monitor the presence or absence of excessive ball payout. In addition to the short-term ball-out rate, the long-term ball-out rate may be configured so that the ratio of the total number of prize balls related to all winning holes to the total number of balls fired in the most recent hour is calculated every 10 minutes. good. In the case of such a configuration, the notification mode of the performance display device SG or various LEDs may be made different between the short-term ball-out rate and the long-term ball-out rate.

In the twelfth embodiment, three types of excess balls paid out, ie, excess balls paid out A, excess balls paid out B, and excess balls paid out C are configured to detect three types of excess balls paid out. There is no problem even if the number of .

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when the excess ball payout A or the excess ball payout B is detected, the fact that the excess ball payout is detected is notified on the sub-control board S side (effect display device SG and However, an LED dedicated to detection of excessive ball output controlled by the main control board M side or an LED dedicated to error detection is provided, and the LED is used to output balls. It may be configured so as to notify an excess. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the main control board M side is configured to calculate the short-term ball payout rate and determine whether or not excessive ball payout occurs. It may be configured such that information relating to the detected ball entry is transmitted to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side executes calculation of the short-term ball payout rate and determination of the occurrence of excessive ball payout.

Next, FIG. 151 is an example of error control applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. In the configuration of errors applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, the error type, error occurrence condition, processing on the main control board side, processing on the sub control board side, and error canceling condition may be configured as follows.

<<Error type: Electric Accessory Award Abnormality>>
<Error occurrence condition>
(1-1) Win 20 or more balls at the second main game starter B10 from the start of opening the second main game starter electric accessory B11d to the end of the open period (1-2) Second main game starter electric accessory Winning 13 balls or more at the second main game start port B10 during a period other than the period from the start of opening of B11d to the end of the opening period (1-3) After the occurrence of (1-1) or (1-2) above, the second Winning 1 ball or more at the main game start gate B10 <Processing on the main control board side>
No change in game state <Processing on the sub-control board side>
(2-1) Various LEDs (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) light up or blink (2-2) Abnormal notification sound is output from speaker D24 <Error release condition>
(3-1) Power OFF→ON to clear the error (3-2) If the power is not turned OFF, the lighting or blinking of the LED in (2-1) ends 300 seconds after the error occurs (3 -3) If the power is not turned off, the output of the abnormal notification sound from the speaker D24 in (2-2) ends after 100 seconds have passed since the error occurred.

In addition, in the above electric accessory winning abnormality, the end of the opening period of the second main game start electric accessory B11d of (1-1) and (1-2) is changed to 1 of the second main game start electric accessory B11d. The opening period may end at the timing of the last opening → closing in the opening mode of the round (winning of the auxiliary game side once), or the opening mode of the second main game start electric accessory B11d once ( After the last opening → closing in the winning of the auxiliary game side once), until the opening of the next second main game start opening electric accessory B11d starts (the interval period related to this opening ends up to). Also, the various LEDs of (2-1) may be one, or may be configured so that a plurality of LEDs light up and blink. In addition, when a plurality of LEDs are lit/blinking, it may be configured such that a predetermined LED is blinking and a specific LED is lighting.

<<Error type: Special prize winning error>>
<Error occurrence condition>
(4-1) Winning 10 or more balls in the big winning opening during the execution of the small winning (4-2) Winning a predetermined number of balls or more in the big winning opening based on the big winning pattern during the executing of the big winning (4-3) The big winning is also small. Winning 3 or more balls in the big prize opening without any hits (4-4) 1 or more balls in the big prize opening after the occurrence of (4-1), (4-2) or (4-3) above Winning prize <Processing on the main control board side>
No change in game state <Processing on the sub-control board side>
(5-1) Various LEDs (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) light up or flash (5-2) Abnormal notification sound is output from speaker D24 <Error release condition>
(6-1) Power OFF → ON to clear the error (6-2) If the power is not turned OFF, the lighting or blinking of the LED in (5-1) ends after 300 seconds have passed since the error occurred (6 -3) If the power is not turned off, the output of the abnormal notification sound from the speaker D24 in (5-2) ends 100 seconds after the error occurs.

In addition, when applying the above-mentioned big winning opening winning abnormality, it is preferable to have a small win, and even if only the first main game side has a small win, only the second main game may have it, or both the first main game side and the second main game side may have it. In addition, it may have only one big winning opening, or may have two big winning openings, that is, a first big winning opening and a second big winning opening. In addition, the big winning opening corresponding to the above "big winning opening" may be only the first big winning opening, only the second big winning opening, or the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening. Both can be used. Also, the "predetermined number of balls based on the jackpot pattern" in (4-2) is a numerical value that differs depending on the jackpot pattern. In the case of a big hit with the number of rounds being 16R, there are 320 balls. Also, the various LEDs of (5-1) may be configured to have only one, or may be configured so that a plurality of LEDs light up and blink. In addition, when a plurality of LEDs are lit/blinking, it may be configured such that a predetermined LED is blinking and a specific LED is lighting. Also, (4-4) may be configured to be applied when the power is left on after occurrence of (4-1), (4-2) or (4-3). However, as long as the RAM is not cleared, it may be configured to be applied even when the power is turned off to on after the occurrence of (4-1), (4-2) or (4-3).

Next, FIG. 152 is an example of error control that can be applied to the gaming machine according to this example. In the configuration of errors applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, the error type, error occurrence conditions, processing on the main control board side, processing on the sub control board side, and error release conditions may be configured as follows.

<<Error type: Special prize winning error>>
<Error occurrence condition>
(7-1) A game ball enters the big winning hole one second after the big winning hole is opened → closed A game ball enters the ball * Execute an error notification when the number of prizes corresponding to (7-1) or (7-2) above reaches a predetermined number <Processing on the main control board side> No change in game state <Sub Processing on the Control Board Side>
(8-1) When 15 or more winning balls corresponding to (7-1) or (7-2) above are won, various LEDs (for example, frame decoration lamp D18-L) light up or flash (8- 2) When the number of winning balls corresponding to (7-1) or (7-2) above is 30 or more, an abnormality notification sound is output from the speaker D24 <Error release condition>
(9-1) If there are less than 30 winning balls corresponding to the above (7-1) or (7-2), the error notification ends after 2 seconds (9-2) Above (7-1) or If there are 30 or more winning balls corresponding to (7-2), the error notification ends after 60 seconds.

In addition, when applying the above-mentioned special prize winning opening abnormality, it is possible to have only one special prize opening, or to have two special prize openings, ie, a first special prize opening and a second special prize opening. You may have In addition, the big winning opening corresponding to the above "big winning opening" may be only the first big winning opening, only the second big winning opening, or the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening. Both can be used. Further, it may be configured to have a small hit, or may be configured not to have a small hit. Further, the various LEDs (8-1) may be configured to have only one, or may be configured so that a plurality of LEDs light up and blink. In addition, when a plurality of LEDs are lit/blinking, it may be configured such that a predetermined LED is blinking and a specific LED is lighting.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and not only can these listed concepts be combined or separated (generalized concepts), but also concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. may

The pachinko machine related to this concept (1) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
an operable operating member (eg, sub-input button SB, firing handle D44) provided on the front side of the game machine;
Equipped with an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, ball entry state display device J10, performance display device SG),
A game to each of the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) The information display section (for example, the ball entry state display device J10, the performance display device SG) is configured to display the ball entry state display, which is a display based on the ball entry state,
In a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, performing a predetermined operation on an operation member (eg, sub-input button SB, firing handle D44) displays the ball entry state display. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (2) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
an operable operation member (for example, a RAM clear button) provided on the back side of the gaming machine;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, ball entry state display device J10, performance display device SG),
A game to each of the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) The information display section (for example, the ball entry state display device J10) is configured to display the ball entry state display, which is a display based on the ball entry state,
A pachinko game machine configured to display a state of entering a ball by executing a predetermined operation on an operation member (for example, a RAM clear button) while a predetermined condition is satisfied. be.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (3) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Control information transmission means (e.g., information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for information display executed on the sub-game part (e.g., sub-control board S) side to the sub-game part (e.g., sub-control board S) side MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Information display content control means (for example, , effect display control means SM20),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
As the control information, the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10) detected by entering ball determination means (for example, entering ball determination means MJ10) , first big winning hole C10, second big winning hole C20) to the side of the sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S). can be sent, and
When the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) receives ball-in detection information from the main game unit (for example, main control board M), based on the ball-in detection information, the plurality of winning openings (for example, , 1st main game starter A10, 2nd main game starter B10, general winnings P10, 1st big winnings C10, 2nd big winnings C20). A pachinko game characterized by generating ball-entering state information as information and displaying a display based on the generated ball-entering state information on an information display unit (for example, a performance display device SG). machine.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (4) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Information based on the entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning ports (eg, first main game start port A10, general winning port P10) based on detection results by ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10) a ball entry state information generation means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating ball entry state information;
Control information transmission means (e.g., information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for information display executed on the sub-game part (e.g., sub-control board S) side to the sub-game part (e.g., sub-control board S) side MT) and
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
an information display content control means for controlling the information display content to be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the control information received by the control information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40); prepared,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
As the control information, ball entry state information can be transmitted to the sub game section (eg, sub control board S) side,
When the sub game section (eg, sub control board S) receives the ball entry state information from the main game section (eg, main control board M), the information display section (eg, This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it can be displayed on the effect display device (SG).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (5) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
an information display unit capable of displaying information (e.g., ball entry state display device J10);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
with
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first Generating ball entry state information based on the state of entry of a game ball into each of the big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20), and displaying information based on the generated ball entering state information. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to display in a section (for example, ball entry state display device J10).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (6) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) provided on the back side of the game machine for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display unit (e.g., ball entry state display device J10) attached to the main game unit (e.g., main control board M) capable of displaying information,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
with
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first Entering state information, which is information based on the state of entry of a game ball into the big winning hole C10, second big winning hole C20), is displayed based on the generated ball entering state information by an information display unit (for example, This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it can be displayed by a ball entry state display device J10).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (7) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
The main game department
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) A period measuring means (for example, a base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring the period for monitoring the
Based on the detection result detected by the ball entry determination means (e.g., ball entry determination means MJ10) in the period measured by the period measurement means (e.g., base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning holes (e.g., the first main game start (A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20). is configured to obtain
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that a display based on ball entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, performance display device SG, ball entry state display device J10).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (8) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10);
A launching device (for example, launching device D42) capable of shooting game balls into the game area,
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
A period measuring means (for example, a base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring the period during which the game ball is being shot by the shooting device (for example, the shooting device D42);
Based on the detection result detected by the ball entry determination means (e.g., ball entry determination means MJ10) in the period measured by the period measurement means (e.g., base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning holes (e.g., the first main game start (A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20). is configured to obtain
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that a display based on ball entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (9) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
A first game state and a second game state in which a ball is easier to enter the predetermined winning hole than the first game state are provided as game states related to the ease of entering the predetermined winning hole,
A game to each of the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) The information display unit (for example, the performance display device SG, the ball entry state display device J10) is configured to display the ball entry state display, which is a display based on the ball entry state,
The display mode of the ball entry state display is different between when the ball entry state display is displayed in the first game state and when the ball entry state display is displayed in the second game state. It is a pachinko machine that features.

The pachinko machine according to this concept (10) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry state display device J10),
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result detected by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, ball entry state information generation means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating ball entry state information that is information based on the state of entry of a game ball into the first big prize hole C10, second big prize hole C20); with
A pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to retain ball entry state information even after a power failure occurs while ball entry state information is held and recovery from the power failure. is.

The pachinko machine according to this concept (11) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result detected by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, ball entry state information generation means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating ball entry state information that is information based on the state of entry of a game ball into the first big prize hole C10, second big prize hole C20); ,
A ball entry state output terminal (for example, an external terminal) that is an output terminal capable of outputting ball entry state information,
A pachinko machine characterized in that ball entry state information generated by ball entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) is output from a ball entry state output terminal (for example, an external terminal). It is a game machine.

The pachinko machine according to this concept (12) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A main game part (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game is provided, and a first display area and an area different from the first display area are provided as areas of the information display part (for example, effect display device SG) and a second display area that is
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
with
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first Generating ball entry state information, which is numerical information based on the state of entry of a game ball into each of the big winning holes C10 and second big winning holes C20), and displaying the generated ball entering state information on the information display unit ( For example, it is configured to be displayed on the effect display device SG),
When the ball entry state information is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the display mode of the ball entry state information displayed in the first display area is set to a predetermined mode A,
When the ball-entering state information exceeds a predetermined value, the display mode of the ball-entering state information displayed in the first display area is set to a predetermined mode B different from the predetermined mode A. ,
During a certain period of time, the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20). When the total number of game balls thrown does not reach the predetermined number of balls, the display mode of the ball entry state information displayed in the second display area is set to the specific mode A,
During the certain period, to the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) When the total number of game balls entered has reached a predetermined number, the display mode of the ball entry state information displayed in the second display area is set to a specific mode B different from the specific mode A. The game machine is characterized in that

The pachinko machine related to this concept (13) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first Main game ball entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating main game ball entry state information that is information based on the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole C10, second big winning hole C20) When,
Control information transmission means (e.g., information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for information display executed on the sub-game part (e.g., sub-control board S) side to the sub-game part (e.g., sub-control board S) side MT), and as the control information, the entry detection information, which is information related to the detection result detected by the entry determination means (e.g., entry determination means MJ10), is sent to the sub game section (e.g., sub control board S) can be sent to the
The sub game part (for example, sub control board S),
Control information receiving means (for example, information transmission/reception control means SM40) for receiving control information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the ball entry detection information received by the control information receiving means (for example, the information transmission/reception control means SM40), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning Sub-game ball entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance Mode display control means SM32),
The main game ball entry state information is configured to be generated every predetermined period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sub-game ball-entered state information is configured to be generated for each specific period that is shorter than the predetermined period.

The pachinko machine according to this concept (14) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
a current time clock (for example, a real-time clock RTC) having a frequency oscillator and capable of clocking based on a clock signal oscillated by the frequency oscillator;
an authentication information operation unit (for example, a sub-input button SB) capable of inputting input authentication information;
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) capable of detecting
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (eg, ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (eg, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first ball entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) for generating ball entry state information that is information based on the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole (C10, second big winning hole C20);
a ball-entering related information display control means for displaying the ball-entering state information generated by the ball-entering state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) on an information display section (for example, performance display device SG);
Authentication information generation means (for example, maintenance mode display control means SM32) capable of generating or updating gaming machine authentication information;
authentication information determining means (for example, maintenance mode display control means SM32) capable of determining whether the input authentication information input to the authentication information operation section (for example, the sub-input button SB) matches the gaming machine authentication information; prepared,
A current time clock (for example, a real time clock RTC) is configured to be able to hold time information, which is the elapsed time from a predetermined reference time, as the current time,
Authentication information generating means (for example, maintenance mode display control means SM32) is configured to generate or update gaming machine authentication information based on the current time,
When it is determined that the input authentication information and the game machine authentication information match, the ball entry state information is displayed on the information display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). It is a gaming machine that

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A1) is
A game area where game balls can flow down (for example, a game area D30);
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry state display device J10),
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) an entering ball determination means capable of detecting
Ejection number measuring means capable of detecting all game balls ejected from a game area (for example, game area D30);
Based on the detection results by the ball entry determining means and the number of discharge measuring means, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10 , a ball entry state information generating means for generating ball entry state information that is information based on the entry of a game ball into the second big prize hole C20),
It is configured to generate and temporarily store ball entry state information at predetermined time intervals,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the temporarily stored ball entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, entry state display device J10).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A2) is
A game area where game balls can flow down (for example, a game area D30);
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry state display device J10),
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) an entering ball determination means capable of detecting
Ejection number measuring means capable of detecting all game balls ejected from a game area (for example, game area D30);
Based on the detection results by the ball entry determining means and the number of discharge measuring means, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10 , a ball entry state information generating means for generating ball entry state information that is information based on the entry of a game ball into the second big prize hole C20),
As a game state related to the ease of entering a ball into a predetermined winning port (for example, the second main game start port B10), the first game state and the predetermined winning port (for example, the second main game It has a second game state in which it is easy to enter the start port B10),
The ball entry state information generation means includes:
Based on the detection results by the entering ball determination means and the discharge count measurement means in the case of the first game state, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, first big winning hole C10, second big winning hole C20) first ball entering state information which is information based on the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole C20), entering ball determination means and ejection in the case of the second game state Based on the detection result by the number counting means, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) is configured to generate second ball entry state information, which is information based on the entry of a game ball into C20),
A pachinko game machine characterized in that the generated first ball entry state information or second ball entry state information can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, a ball entry state display device J10). .

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A3) is
A game area where game balls can flow down (for example, a game area D30);
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
A main control board (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
a payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH) that controls the payout of prize balls communicably connected to a main control board (for example, main control board M);
An information display unit (for example, ball entry state display device J10) capable of displaying information connected to a payout control board (for example, prize ball payout control board KH),
The main control board (for example, the main control board M)
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) an entering ball determination means capable of detecting
Ejection number measuring means capable of detecting all game balls ejected from a game area (for example, game area D30);
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information necessary for information display executed on the payout control board (eg, prize ball payout control board KH) side to the payout control board (eg, prize ball payout control board KH) side. ,
The payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH)
Control information receiving means for receiving control information transmitted from a main control board (for example, main control board M);
Based on the control information received by the control information receiving means, the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, a ball entry state information generating means for generating ball entry state information that is information based on the entry of a game ball into the second prize winning opening C20);
The payout control board (for example, the prize ball payout control board KH)
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the generated ball-entering state information can be displayed on an information display unit (eg, ball-entering state display device J10).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A4) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry state display device J10);
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) an entering ball determination means capable of detecting
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening ball entry state information generating means for generating ball entry state information that is information based on the entry of a game ball into the opening C20);
The generated ball entry state information is configured to be displayed on an information display unit (e.g., ball entry state display device J10),
As information storage areas for storing processing result data by the program, it has at least a first information storage area for storing at least ball entry state information, and a second information storage area which is an area different from the first information storage area. and
When initializing the information storage area,
When it is determined that the power is turned on normally when the gaming machine is turned on, the second information storage area is initialized, but the first information storage area is not initialized,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that the first information storage area and the second information storage area are initialized when it is determined that the power supply is abnormal when the power supply of the game machine is turned on. is.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A5) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry state display device J10),
Entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) an entering ball determination means capable of detecting
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means, the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening ball entry state information generating means for generating ball entry state information that is information based on the entry of a game ball into the opening C20);
The generated ball entry state information is configured to be displayed on an information display unit (e.g., ball entry state display device J10),
after receiving the supply of the power supply voltage for driving, permitting the occurrence of interrupt processing controlled to occur periodically, and executing non-interrupt processing other than the interrupt processing;
is configured to generate ball entry state information when the interrupt process is executed,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to determine the occurrence of power interruption when the non-interrupt processing is executed.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A6) is
A game area where game balls can flow down (for example, a game area D30);
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, First big prize mouth C10, second big prize mouth C20),
A predetermined notification unit that can notify the occurrence of an error (for example, effect display device SG, frame decoration lamp D18-L),
As states related to the ball payout rate, there are a state A in which the ball payout rate is equal to or higher than a specific value A, and a state in which the ball payout rate is equal to or higher than a specific value B which is smaller than the specific value A and less than the specific value A. has at least B and
For each of state A and state B, the presence or absence of notification of error occurrence in the predetermined notification unit (for example, effect display device SG), and the predetermined notification unit (for example, effect The pachinko game machine is characterized in that at least one of the reporting mode when reporting the occurrence of an error on the display device SG) is different.

(13th embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that information related to ball entry can be displayed on the ball entry state display device, and processing such as generation and display of information related to ball entry is configured to be executed by the main control board. , the configuration related to processing such as generation and display of information related to ball entry is not limited to that of the present embodiment. Accordingly, a configuration relating to processing such as generation and display of information relating to ball entry will be described in detail as a thirteenth embodiment.

First, FIG. 153 is an example of a diagram showing the structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the main control board M as in the eighth embodiment, but the configuration of the ball entry state display device J10 is different from that in the eighth embodiment. , 8-segment displays of 4 digits are arranged in a horizontal row and configured to be able to display section information based on the total number of outs, base ratios, and the like. The ball-entering state display device J10 in FIG. 1 is provided on the surface of the main control board M facing the back side of the game machine. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the rear surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check it.

Next, FIG. 154 is a main flowchart of the main control board M side in the thirteenth embodiment. 105 of the eighth embodiment is that step 1000 (13th), step 1001-1 (13th), step 1001-2 (13th), step 1018-1 (13th), step 1018 -2 (13th), step 1992 (13th), step 1992-1 (13th), step 1992-2 (13th), step 1992-3 (13th), step 1992-4 (13th), Step 8650 (13th), step 1992-6 (13th), step 8000 (13th), step 7000 (13th), step 1992-7 (13th), and step 1992-8 (13th).

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
First, after the power is turned on, in step 1000 (13th), the main control board M checks the first RAM area and the second RAM area (for example, check Sam). Next, at step 1001-1 (13th), the main control board M determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the first RAM area or the second RAM area.

<Processing in First ROM/RAM Area, Processing in Second ROM/RAM Area>
If Yes at step 1001-1 (13th), at step 1001-2 (13th), the main control board M clears all the data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. At this time, the order of clearing the data in the RAM area is 1. data in the second RAM area;2. data in the first RAM area. The first RAM area is updated only by the first ROM/RAM control (processing in the first ROM/RAM area), and the second RAM area is updated only by the second ROM/RAM control (processing in the second ROM/RAM area). Therefore, the first RAM area is cleared by the process in the first ROM/RAM area, and the second RAM area is cleared by the process in the second ROM/RAM area.

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
If No in step 1001-1 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1002, and the main control board M determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated. If Yes in step 1002 , go to step 1004 ; if No, go to step 1012 . At step 1012, the main control board M acquires various power-off commands from the RAM, and at step 1014, the main control board M transmits the acquired various information commands to the sub side, and shifts to the process of step 1016. do.

After executing the process of step 1018 as the process in the first ROM/RAM area, in step 1018-1 (13th), the main control board M loads the value of the power-off signal input port. Next, in step 1018-2 (thirteenth), the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the input port indicates the occurrence of power failure. For example, if the value of the input port is 0, it indicates that the power has not been interrupted, and if the value of the input port is 1, it indicates that the power has been interrupted. If Yes in step 1018-2 (13th), step 1018 is entered. On the other hand, if step 1018-2 (13th) is No, the main control board M performs the processing of steps 1020 and 1022 and waits until the power is turned off. In the timer interrupt process, after executing the processes of steps 2000 to 1990, in step 1992 (13th), the main control board M calls the process in the second ROM/RAM area.

<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>
At step 1992-1 (13th), the main control board M saves the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and makes settings for using the second stack area. Next, in step 1992-2 (13th), the main control board M saves the register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area to the second stack area. Next, in step 1992-3 (13th), the main control board M creates and outputs a signal for external output from the first RAM area and register values used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area. A test signal output process (the test signal will be described later) is executed. Next, in step 1992-4 (13th), the main control board M refers to the values of the first RAM area and registers used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area to determine the current gaming state. The second area game state inspection process is executed. Next, at step 8650 (thirteenth), the main control board M executes SW (switch) counting processing. Next, at step 1992-6 (13th), the main control board M performs a register setting process of setting "F2H" in a register Q, which will be described later, in order to refer to the RAM in the second area. Next, at step 8000 (thirteenth), the main control board M executes a ball entry state display device calculation process, which will be described later. Next, at step 7000 (13th), the main control board M executes a ball entry state display device display control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1992-7 (thirteenth), the main control board M restores the values of the registers used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area from the second stack area. Note that the value of register Q is "F2H" at step 1992-6 (13th), but since the values of all registers have been saved at step 1992-2 (13th), step 1992-7 The value of the register Q is also restored ("F0H" is set) in the (thirteenth) process. Next, in step 1992-8 (13th), the main control board M restores the stack pointer and switches the stack area, and makes settings for using the first stack area. It should be noted that processing (for example, test signal output processing, second region game state inspection processing, SW counting processing, etc.) that often refers to the values of the RAM in the first region and the register used in the processing of the first region is performed by the register Q Placed before changing the value of , and processing that often refers to the value of the RAM in the second area or the register used in the processing of the second area (e.g. display control processing, etc.) are placed after changing the value of the register Q, and the frequency of use of the LDQ instruction, which will be described later, makes it possible to simplify and speed up the processing.

As a supplement, after the process in the second ROM/RAM area is called in the timer interrupt process, which is the process in the first ROM/RAM area, the second ROM/RAM area is used instead of the first ROM/RAM area for processing. is executed. Since the counters and control data (register values, etc.) used for processing on the main control board M side are backed up, the All data stored in the second RAM area is also backed up. In addition, the term "clear" in the thirteenth embodiment is not limited to zero clearing, but also includes initialization (that is, the term "clear" is used to return to the initial state, which is the game start state. do).

If the data in the first RAM area and the data in the second RAM area are cleared in step 1001-2 (13th), the main control board M sends the data in the first RAM area and the data in the second RAM area to the sub-control board S. When the data in the first RAM area is cleared in step 1004, the main control board M transfers the data to the sub control board S to the first RAM It may be configured to transmit a command indicating that the data in the area has been cleared (transmit command B). With this configuration, the sub-control board S can notify in a manner corresponding to the command A and the command B received from the main control board M (for example, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp D26 is When command A is received, the game effect lamp is lit in red for 5 seconds, and when command B is received, the game effect lamp is lit in blue for 5 seconds, etc.). It is possible to have the hall staff confirm whether the first RAM area and the second RAM area have been cleared.

Next, FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an outline of a program for clearing data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area in the thirteenth embodiment. The left side is the present invention, and the data is cleared in the order of data in the second RAM area→data in the first RAM area. The data is cleared in order. First, the program structure of the present invention will be described along the order of the program. 2) Abnormal: Jump to RAM clear processing, (2) Determine whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated, (2-1) If yes: Jump to first RAM area clear processing, ( 2-2) When "none": Jump to normal power failure recovery processing (processing to recover from power failure without clearing RAM), (3) RAM clear processing, (3-1) second RAM area clear processing, (3-2) first RAM area clearing process, and (4) normal power failure recovery process. Next, a hypothetical program configuration will be described along the order of the program. 2) Abnormal: Jump to RAM clear processing, (2) Determine whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated, (2-1) If yes: Jump to first RAM area clear processing, ( 2-2) When "none": Jump to normal power failure recovery processing (processing to recover from power failure without clearing RAM), (3) RAM clear processing, (3-1) first RAM area clear processing, (3-2) Determine whether or not the RAM clear button is operated, (3-2-1) When operated: Jump to normal power failure recovery process, (3-2-2) When not operated: Second RAM (3-3) second RAM area clearing process and (4) normal power interruption recovery process for clearing the area.

In other words, in the hypothetical configuration in which data is cleared in the order of data in the first RAM area→data in the second RAM area, "(3-2) Determining whether or not the RAM clear button is operated, (3- 2-1) During operation: Jump to normal power failure recovery process, (3-2-2) During non-operation: Clear the second RAM area. Even if you want to perform the clearing process of the first RAM area and not to perform the clearing process of the second RAM area when "RAM clear button is operated", the clearing process of the first RAM area and the clearing process of the second RAM area are not performed. Both will be executed. Therefore, in order to avoid such a configuration, "(3-2) Determine whether or not the RAM clear button is operated, (3-2-1) When operated: jump to normal power failure recovery process, ( 3-2-2) During non-operation: Clear the second RAM area" must be prepared. In other words, in the hypothetical program configuration, there will be an extra program, which puts pressure on the program capacity. , the program capacity can be reduced.

Next, FIG. 156 is a list of test signals that can be output in test signal output processing in the thirteenth embodiment. A description of each signal is omitted. In the test signal output process, the values of the first RAM area and the register used in the process in the first ROM/RAM area are used in order to create signal data to be output. For example, first main game symbol high probability state signal, first main game symbol variation time shortened state signal, second main game symbol high probability state signal, second main game symbol variation time shortened state signal, normal symbol high probability state signal. , Normal symbol fluctuation time shortening state signal, normal electric accessary product open extension state signal, etc. In order to output, the value of the first RAM area and the register used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area can be exemplified. The test signal is a signal used in the model test, and is a signal that can be output to the outside of the game machine by using a dedicated jig from a terminal dedicated to the model test provided on the main control board M. .

Next, FIG. 157 is a flow chart of SW totalization processing, which is control by the second ROM/RAM area, according to the subroutine of step 8650 in FIG. 154 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, at step 7500, the main control board M reads the detection information of each winning hole in the first RAM area. Specifically, in the program based on the second ROM, it is determined that the detection information in the first RAM area is ON, and that there is a ball hit by one edge detection (OFF → ON). Of the storage area (2 bytes) for winning ball information in the second RAM area, the flag in the storage area for the corresponding winning opening is turned on (set to 1). For example, when the detection information of the second main game start opening in the first RAM area is ON, when it is determined that the detection information of the second main game start opening in the first RAM area is ON by the program by the second ROM, , once it is determined to be ON, 1 is set in D1, which is a storage area for ball entry information in the second RAM area. Then, in the next step 8651, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entry based on the ball entry information set here. It should be noted that the storage area for ball entry information in the second RAM area is not limited to 2 bytes, and may be changed to 1 byte or the like according to the number of ball entry sensors. Next, at step 8651, the main control board M determines whether or not the ball entry flag of any ball entry sensor is on. In the case of Yes in step 8651, in step 8651-1, the main control board M determines which ball entry sensor's ball entry flag is to be checked. determined based on the value of α). On the other hand, if No in step 8651, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8800). First, when α=0, at step 8652, the main control board M determines whether or not the second big winning hole entry flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 8652, at step 8653, the main control board M turns off the second big winning opening ball flag, and at step 8654, the main control board M turns on the second big winning opening prize ball flag. , increments α by 1 in step 8679, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8652, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=1, at step 8655, the main control board M determines whether or not the first big winning hole entry flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 8655, at step 8656, the main control board M turns off the first big winning opening ball flag, and at step 8657, the main control board M turns on the first big winning opening prize ball flag. , increments α by 1 in step 8679, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8655, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=2, at step 8658, the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start entrance entry flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 8658, at step 8659, the main control board M turns off the second main game start entry ball flag, and at step 8660, the main control board M turns off the second main game start prize ball flag. It is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8658, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=3, at step 8661, the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start entrance entry flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 8661, at step 8662, the main control board M turns off the first main game start entry ball flag, and at step 8663, the main control board M turns off the first main game start prize ball flag. It is turned on, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8661, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=4, at step 8664, the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning hole 1 entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 8664, in step 8665, the main control board M turns off the general winning mouth 1 entering ball flag, in step 8666, the main control board M turns on the general winning mouth 1 prize ball flag, and step At 8679, 1 is added to α, and the process proceeds to the next process (process at step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8664, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=5, at step 8667, the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning hole 2 entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 8667, in step 8668, the main control board M turns off the general winning hole 2 entering ball flag, in step 8669, the main control board M turns on the general winning hole 2 prize ball flag, and step At 8679, 1 is added to α, and the process proceeds to the next process (process at step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8667, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=6, at step 8670, the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning hole 3 entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 8670, in step 8671, the main control board M turns off the general winning hole 3 entry ball flag, in step 8672, the main control board M turns on the general winning hole 3 prize ball flag, and step At 8679, 1 is added to α, and the process proceeds to the next process (process at step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8670, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=7, at step 8673, the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning hole 4 entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 8673, in step 8674, the main control board M turns off the general winning hole 4 entry ball flag, in step 8675, the main control board M turns on the general winning hole 4 prize ball flag, and step At 8679, 1 is added to α, and the process proceeds to the next process (process at step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8673, 1 is added to α in step 8679, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, when α=8, at step 8676, the main control board M determines whether or not the total discharge confirmation sensor flag is on. If Yes at step 8676, at step 8677, the main control board M turns off the total discharge confirmation sensor flag, at step 8678, the main control board M turns on the out number counter addition flag, and at step 8679-1 Clear α and proceed to the next process (process of step 8680). On the other hand, if No in step 8676, α is cleared in step 8679-1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8680). Next, at step 8680 (13th), the main control board M executes counter addition processing, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 8800). It should be noted that the ball entry sensor of a plurality of general winning openings may be combined into one. Equipped with a first general winning hole ball sensor that detects balls entering the winning holes 1 to 3, and a second general winning hole ball detecting ball entering the general winning hole 4 that can be entered when hitting right. It is good also as a structure provided with a sensor.

Next, FIG. 158 is a flowchart of counter addition processing, which is control by the second ROM/RAM area, according to the subroutine of step 8680 of FIG. 157 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, at step 8682, the main control board M adds the number of winning balls counter in the normal time. In addition, there is a condition for executing the addition of the number of prize balls counter at normal time. Winning opening prize ball flag, 1st big winning opening prize ball flag, 2nd main game start opening prize ball flag, 1st main game start opening prize ball flag, general winning opening 1 prize ball flag, general winning opening 2 prize ball flag , general winning hole 3 prize ball flag, general winning hole 4 prize ball flag) are turned on, addition of the normal prize ball number counter is executed. In addition, it may be configured so as to execute the addition of the number of prize balls counter in the normal state in the probability variable game state and the non-time shortened game state. If the position to be played does not change (for example, left-handed), it may be configured to add the number of winning balls counter in the normal state in the probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state. (2) When the non-probability variable state and non-time shortened game state and the position to be shot changes (for example, change from left to right), the normal number of prize balls in the probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state It is preferably configured so that no counter addition is performed. In the configuration of (1), the number of prize balls in the non-assisted game state (low base state) other than during the big win is counted. In addition, when the addition of the normal prize ball number counter is completed, the prize ball flag is turned off. As a supplement, the normal prize ball number counter consists of 2 bytes, and it is checked whether the value obtained by adding the number of prize balls exceeds the upper limit value (whether or not the carry flag is generated). , is configured not to be added (maintained at the upper limit value of 2 bytes) if it exceeds. Next, at step 8684, the main control board M increments the normal out number counter. In addition, there is a condition for executing the addition of the normal out number counter, and the out number counter addition flag is set when the game state is a non-probability fluctuation game state, a non-time reduction game state, and not during a big hit. It is configured such that when it is on, addition of the normal out number counter is executed. In addition, the normal time out number counter may be configured to perform addition in the probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state like the normal time prize ball number counter. When the shooting position does not change from the time reduction game state (e.g. left-handed), addition of the normal out number counter is executed in the probability variable game state and non-time reduction game state. (2) When the non-probability variable state and non-time shortened game state and the position to be fired changes (for example, change from left to right), the probability variable game state and non-time shortened game It is preferable to configure so that addition of the out number counter is not normally executed in the state. In the configuration as in (1), the number of outs in the non-assisted game state (low base state) other than during the big win is counted. As a supplement, the normal out number counter consists of 2 bytes, and it is checked whether the added value exceeds the upper limit (whether a carry flag is generated), and if it exceeds is not added to (maintained at the upper limit of 2 bytes). Since the out number counter addition flag is also used in the addition of the total out number counter in the next step 8686, it is not turned off even after the addition of the out number counter in the normal state, but remains on. Next, at step 8686, the main control board M performs addition of the total out number counter. If the out number counter addition flag is ON, the normal prize ball number counter is added, and when the addition is completed, the out number counter addition flag is turned off and the process proceeds to the next process (step 8800). do. As a supplement, the total out number counter consists of 2 bytes. are configured not to be added (maintained at the upper limit of 2 bytes).

Next, FIG. 159 is a configuration diagram of registers in the thirteenth embodiment. The registers include register A, flag register F, register B, register C, register D, register E, register H, register L, and register Q, each of which consists of 8 bits. Register B and register C, register D and register E, and register H and register L can be used together as a 16-bit register.

Next, FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how to read data stored in the RAM area using the register Q in the thirteenth embodiment. In this embodiment, when reading data stored in the RAM area, the main control board M does not specify all the upper and lower addresses of the RAM area in which the data is stored, but instead specifies the lower address. It is possible to read data by specifying only Data referred to by the program are stored in the F000H to F3FFH areas of the RAM area. In addition, the main control board M has a dedicated register (register Q) for storing the upper address of the data storage area as a fixed value, and fixed values 0F0H, 0F2H, etc. do.

The example shown in FIG. 160 shows the case of reading data stored at address F230H in the RAM area. In this case, using the command LDQ for reading data using the register Q, only the lower address 30H is specified and the data read operation is performed {specifically, LDQ A, (30H) is executed}. . Then, the main control board M specifies the upper address of the data storage area from the fixed value set in the register Q (for example, F2H), specifies the lower address 30H specified by the LDQ instruction, and specifies the upper and lower addresses. is specified as F230H. Then, the main control board M reads the data (α) stored in the data storage area corresponding to the specified F230H and stores it in the register A. In this figure, the fixed value is F2H, and an example of reading data corresponding to F230H has been described. However, as described above, the fixed value may be changed. By specifying only 30H, the data read operation {specifically, LDQ A, (30H) is executed}, and the data (30H) stored in the data storage area corresponding to F030H is read. , in register A. A normal LD instruction requires 2 bytes for addressing, whereas an LDQ instruction requires only 1 byte for addressing. That is, in this example, two bytes of F230H (11110010B/00110000B) are required, but since the upper F2H (11110010B) is set in the register Q, only the lower address 30H (00110000B) is specified.
In other words, one-time addressing instruction can reduce the processing by one byte, and the capacity and reading speed are increased by one byte.

The initial value of the register Q is set to F0H by the program executed at the start of the program when the gaming machine is turned on and the power supply is started. Alternatively, it may be configured to be initialized by hardware and automatically set to the initial value F0H when the system is reset. For example, when power is turned on to the game machine and power supply is started, the lower 4 bits of the Q register are initialized to 0, and the upper 4 bits are inverted by an inverting circuit to become all 1. As a result, the initial value of the register Q can be automatically set to F0H.

<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>
Next, FIG. 161 is a flow chart of the ball-entered state display device arithmetic processing, which is control by the second ROM/RAM area, according to the subroutine of step 8000 of FIG. 154 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, at step 8500, the main control board M executes section determination, which will be described later. Next, at step 8800, the main control board M executes arithmetic processing which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 162 is a flowchart of section determination, which is control by the second ROM/RAM area, according to the subroutine of step 8500 of FIG. 161 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, at step 8502, the main control board M determines whether the display data switching flag 1 is 0 or not. The display data switching flag 1 is a flag indicating a section in the calculation processing of the ball entry state display device. If the display data switching flag 1 is 0, the section A number (for example, less than 300)}, and if the display data switching flag 1 is 1, section B {for example, the total number of outs from the first power-on is a predetermined number (for example, 300) or more and a specific number ( For example, less than 60,000)}, and if the display data switching flag 1 is 2, it is switched every time the value of the total out number counter reaches a specific number (eg, 60,000) after the interval N {for example, after the interval B section}. Further, the display data switching flag 1 is backed up so as not to be cleared even if the power is turned off. Next, in the case of Yes in step 8502, in step 8600, the main control board M executes the section A time determination described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 8800). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 8502, in step 8700, the main control board M executes time determination after section B, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 8800).

Next, FIG. 163 is a flowchart of section A time determination, which is control by the second ROM/RAM area, according to the subroutine of step 8600 of FIG. 162 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, at step 8602, the main control board M determines whether or not the total out number counter value is 300 or more (the numerical value of "300" used here is an example, and the inspection at the time of manufacturing the game machine Any value that is larger than the assumed value counted in the process is acceptable). Next, in the case of Yes in step 8602, in step 8608, the main control board M sets the display data switching flag 1 to 1 (changes from 0 to 1). Next, at step 8610, the main control board M clears the counter and proceeds to the next process (process of step 8800). The counters that are cleared here are the normal prize ball number counter, the normal out number counter, and the total out number counter. On the other hand, if No in step 8602, the process proceeds to the next process (step 8800).

Next, FIG. 164 is a flow chart of determination after section B, which is control by the second ROM/RAM area, according to the subroutine of step 8700 of FIG. 162 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, at step 8702, the main control board M determines whether or not the total out number counter value is 60000 or more (the numerical value of 60000 used here is an example, and the game ball shooting interval is 100/100). It is an assumed value that the shooting time of the game ball has reached 10 hours in the case of minutes). Next, if Yes at step 8702, at step 8706, the main control board M sets the display data switching flag 1 to 2 (including resetting the display data switching flag 1 to 2). Next, at step 8707, the main control board M stores the final base value of the section. Next, at step 8708, the main control board M clears the counter and proceeds to the next process (process of step 8800). The counters that are cleared here are the normal prize ball number counter, the normal out number counter, and the total out number counter. On the other hand, if No in step 8702, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 8800).

Next, FIG. 165 is a flowchart of arithmetic processing, which is control by the second ROM/RAM area, according to the subroutine of step 8800 of FIG. 161 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, at step 8802, the main control board M determines whether or not there is a section change. If Yes at step 8802, at step 8804, main control board M performs base calculations. Here, the base value is calculated by the formula {(normal prize ball count counter value/normal out count counter value)×100}. When the value of the normal out number counter is 0, it is judged as an abnormal state, and a predetermined value (for example, 127) is stored as the calculation result. Next, in step 8806, the main control board M displays the base value (ball entry state information) calculated in step 8804 as the current base value (ball entry state information) on the ball entry state display device J10. Store for display, and proceed to the next process (process of step 7000). The base value (entering state information) stored here is a value rounded off to the first decimal place. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 8802, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 7000).

<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>
Next, FIG. 166 is a flowchart relating to the ball entry state display device display control process (step 7000 (13th)) which is the control by the second ROM/RAM area of FIG. 154 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, at step 7600 (thirteenth), the main control board M executes display content update processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 7610, the main control board M executes updating of the flashing state. Here, in step 7630 to be described later, if the first segment information is set to "flashing", the flashing display control ( cycle of 0.6 seconds ±10%) is executed, and in step 7640 described later, when the second segment information is set to "flashing", lighting and extinguishing are performed during the display related to the second segment information. Control of blinking display that switches every 0.3 seconds (preferably a period of 0.6 seconds ± 10%) is executed, and in step 7642 described later, when the third segment information is set to "blink", the second During the display of the 3-segment information, blinking display control (preferably a period of 0.6 seconds ± 10%) is executed to switch between lighting and extinguishing every 0.3 seconds. is set to "flashing", the blinking display control (preferably a period of 0.6 seconds ± 10%) that switches between lighting and extinguishing every 0.3 seconds during the display of the 4th segment information is executed. . Here, the display switching method will be described using <Regarding update of blinking state> in the lower part of the figure. First, when blinking, each time switching between lighting (0.3 seconds) and lighting (0.3 seconds), 1 is added to the blinking number counter, and the value of the blinking number counter becomes 15 (details will be described later). When the extinguishing period ends in 15 as described above), the display is switched by the display switching process of the segment information described later, and when the display switching (change of display content) by the display switching process is completed, the value of the blinking counter is reset to 0. configured to be By configuring in this way, the display mode starts from lighting (it is configured to turn on when the value of the blinking number counter is 0) and goes out at the timing when the value of the blinking number counter is 15 (0. 3 seconds), so by switching the display at this timing, it is possible to switch the display without a sense of discomfort. More specifically, the value of the blinking number counter is reset to 0 in 4.8 seconds, and the display content is switched at the same time when the light is switched from off to on. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem if the display is switched at the timing when the value of the blinking number counter is 14, starting with the lights off, so that the switching can be performed at the timing when the lights are off. . However, it is preferable to switch segment information within 5 seconds ±10%. In addition, although the process of adding the value of the blinking number counter has been exemplified, there is no problem even if it is a process of subtracting. is also possible. Returning to the flowchart, next, at step 7620, the main control board M executes display switching processing of segment information. For example, the 1st segment information, the 2nd segment information, the 3rd segment information, and the 4th segment information are switched in order every 4.8 seconds (within 5 seconds ± 10%) (after the 4th segment information, the 1st segment information ). The 1st segment information to the 4th segment information are composed of an identification segment and a ratio segment. "bL." indicates that the final base value of the previous interval is displayed, "b1." ), and "b3." .” is displayed). When the process of step 7620 is finished, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1992-7).

Next, FIG. 167 is a flow chart of the display content updating process, which is controlled by the second ROM/RAM area, according to the subroutine of step 7600 in FIG. 166 in the thirteenth embodiment. First, functions of the first segment information, the second segment information, the third segment information, and the fourth segment information will be described. First, the first segment information is information about the base value updated in real time in the current section, and the second segment information is the final value ( The 3rd segment information is information about the final value (final base value) in the interval two times before the current interval, and the 4th segment information is information about the 3 This is information about the final value (final base value) in the previous section.

Next, a flowchart of display content update processing will be described. First, at step 7630, the main control board M sets (updates) the first segment information. As a premise, the ratio segment is configured to display "00" if the value of the normal out count counter is 0, and to display "99." if the calculation result (calculated base value) is 100 or more. there is In the 2nd segment information, the 3rd segment information, and the 4th segment information, if the value of the normal out number counter in the corresponding section ends at 0, "00" can be displayed, and the final base value is 100 or more. If so, "99." will be displayed. Even if the calculation result cannot be displayed as it is, it is displayed appropriately so that the confirming person (for example, a store clerk) can understand the display content. ing. The display contents of the first segment information are set such that, in section A (when the display data switching flag 2, which will be described later, is 0), "bL." be. In section B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), when the normal output number counter value is 0 to 5999, the identification segment blinks "bL." "bL." In the section C to section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment blinks "bL." In the above cases, it is set so that "bL." As described above, section C to section N are sections that are switched every time the value of the total out number counter reaches 60000 after section B. FIG.

Next, at step 7640, the main control board M sets (updates) the second segment information. The display contents of the second segment information are set so that, in the interval A (when the display data switching flag 2 is 0), "b1." In the interval B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), the identification segment is set to flash "b1." and the ratio segment is set to display "--". In section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to display "b1.", and the ratio segment is set to display the final value (final base value) of the first measurement (section B). be done. In section D (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to display "b1.", and the ratio segment is set to display the final value (final base value) of the second measurement (section C). be done. In section E (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to display "b1.", and the ratio segment is set to display the final value (final base value) of the third measurement (section D). be done. In section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), "b1." value).

Next, at step 7642, the main control board M sets (updates) the third segment information. The display contents of the third segment information are set so that, in section A (when the display data switching flag 2 is 0), "b2." In the interval B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), the identification segment is set to flash "b2." and the ratio segment is set to display "--". In section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to flash "b2." and the ratio segment is set to display "--". In section D (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to display "b2.", and the ratio segment is set to display the final value (final base value) of the first measurement (section B). be done. In section E (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to display "b2.", and the ratio segment is set to display the final value (final base value) of the second measurement (section C). be done. In section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), "b2." value).

Next, at step 7644, the main control board M sets (updates) the fourth segment information. The display contents of the fourth segment information are set so that, in section A (when the display data switching flag 2 is 0), "b3." In the interval B (when the display data switching flag 2 is 1), the identification segment is set to flash "b3." and the ratio segment is set to display "--". In section C (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to flash "b3." and the ratio segment is set to display "--". In the section D (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to flash "b3." and the ratio segment is set to display "--". In section E (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), the identification segment is set to display "b3.", and the ratio segment is set to display the final value (final base value) of the first measurement (section B). be done. In section N (when the display data switching flag 2 is 2), "b3." value).

Next, at step 7650, the main control board M updates the display data switching flag 2. FIG. The display data switching flag 2 is updated in accordance with the display data switching flag 1, and is a display flag for displaying the base value on the ball entry state display device J10.

Next, FIG. 168 is an image diagram of stack area switching in the thirteenth embodiment. This figure shows how data is stacked in the stack area and how the first stack area and the second stack area are switched, and the circled addresses indicate the set stack pointers. . First, processing is being executed in the first ROM/RAM area, and a stack pointer A (address is A) for using the first stack area is set. Next, the process is executed in the first ROM/RAM area, and then the process in the second ROM area is called. Next, in the processing of the second ROM area, the stack pointer A is saved in the second RAM area, and the stack pointer B (address is B) for using the second stack area is set. Next, after saving all the registers to the second stack area, the address of the stack pointer B is changed. Next, processing is executed by the second ROM/RAM area, and all registers are restored. Next, the stack pointer A of the first stack area is restored, the calling source of the first ROM area is restored, and then the processing of the first ROM/RAM area is executed.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the second RAM area is checked when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when power is turned on). Compared to the process of checking the second RAM area every time the process in the area is executed, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the process without excessively checking the second RAM area.

(14th embodiment)
Next, FIG. 169 is an electrical overall configuration diagram in the fourteenth embodiment. The difference from FIG. 6, which is the present embodiment, is the flow path image diagram of the game ball. In the fourteenth embodiment, the sensors for detecting the out number of game balls are not only the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s but also the first discharge confirmation sensor and the second discharge confirmation sensor. The first discharge confirmation sensor is mainly configured to detect a game ball that enters a winning opening (first main game start opening A10, general winning opening) and an out opening when hitting to the left. 2 Ejection confirmation sensor mainly detects the game ball that entered the winning opening (second main game start opening B10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20) that enters when hitting right. It is configured. In addition to this configuration, when each winning opening is detected in series in the SW counting process of step 8650 (that is, the second big winning opening → the first big winning opening → the second main game start Check each time in the order of opening → first main game start opening → general winning openings 1 to 4 → discharge confirmation sensor), a case where two balls are added by one counter addition process can occur. At this time, it is possible that the value of the total-out number counter for which the section is changed exceeds 60,000. In this case, the result of performing the addition for two balls may be stored as the final base value of the section. In this way, in order to calculate the number of winning balls and winning balls that occur at the same time as the base value in the same section, the values of the normal winning ball number counter and the normal out number counter are added for two balls. It becomes possible to calculate an accurate base value.

In addition, in the above game machine, if RAM clear processing (clear processing of the first RAM area) occurs during the prize ball payout operation (for example, when the RAM clear button is operated at the time of power failure, abnormal noise due to noise or instantaneous electricity) after the occurrence of power failure) is assumed. For example, when RAM clear processing occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 6) of prize balls is paid out while a specific number (for example, 10) of prize balls is being paid out, the remaining number of prize balls (for example, 4) is stored. Cleared, the payout operation for the remaining number of prize balls is not executed and the payout operation ends, but the ball entry state display device displays the base value calculated by adding the specified number of prize balls. be done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent intentional adjustment of the ball entry information such as the base value, and it is possible to generate structured ball entry information based on the number of balls entered into the prize winning opening.
(15th embodiment)

Next, FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of the maximum use route of the stack area in the fifteenth embodiment. Supplementally, the configuration of the program in this figure is different from the configuration of the program in the above-described embodiments (first to 14th embodiments), and in this figure, the program is configured in this way. This is illustrated as a modified example that may be used. The upper diagram is an example of the maximum stack area usage route in the processing of the first ROM/RAM area. Here, the route that maximizes the stack area used when executing the process related to "variation of main game symbols" is shown. By designing a route with a small number of processes as the maximum usage route, it becomes possible to easily determine the size of the stack area (first stack area) that must be secured. The lower diagram is an example of the maximum stack area usage route in the processing of the second ROM/RAM area. Here, it shows the route that maximizes the stack area used when executing the processing related to the "input status display device calculation process", and as with the first ROM/RAM area, it may vary depending on the model. By designing a route with a small number of processes as the maximum usage route, it becomes possible to easily determine the size of the stack area (second stack area) that must be secured. Also, when describing the maximum stack area usage route in the documents to be submitted at the time of model application, if the route to be described is the same even if the model is different, the same route can be described each time. Work becomes easier and faster. The maximum stack usage route in the processing of the first ROM/RAM area and the maximum stack area usage route in the processing of the second ROM/RAM area will be specifically described below.

First, the maximum stack area usage route in the processing of the first ROM/RAM area will be described. The maximum stack area use route in the processing of the first ROM/RAM area is, simply expressed, the case of timer interrupt generation→main game symbol display processing→command transmission setting processing. First, 2-byte data is stored as an address to return from the subroutine by a CALL instruction that calls the timer interrupt subroutine. Next, 2-byte data is stored as an address to return from the subroutine by a CALL instruction to call the subroutine of the main game symbol display process. Next, a total of 14 bytes of data is stored by a CALL instruction and a PUSH instruction for calling each process in the main game symbol display process. Specifically, 2-byte data is stored as an address to be returned from the subroutine by a CALL instruction for calling the subroutine for determination processing during the fluctuation standby. Next, 2-byte data is stored as an address to be returned from the subroutine by a CALL instruction for calling the subroutine for processing to start fluctuation. Next, 2-byte data is stored as an address to return from the subroutine by a CALL instruction for calling the variable time determination process. Next, in order to store the value of the BC register in the variable time determination process, 2-byte data is stored by the PUSH instruction. Next, 2-byte data is stored as a return address by a CALL instruction for calling a subroutine for command transmission data setting processing. Next, in order to store the value of the BC register in command transmission data setting processing, 2-byte data is stored by the PUSH instruction. Next, 2-byte data is stored as a return address by a CALL instruction for calling a subroutine for command transmission setting processing. When the above processing is executed, it becomes the maximum stack area usage route in the processing of the first ROM/RAM area, and a total of 18 bytes will be used. In other words, the maximum usage of the stack area when the process is executed by a route other than the root is configured to be smaller than the maximum usage of the stack area when the process is executed by the root. In this way, the main game symbol display process is configured so that there are many processes for saving register values, and the amount of usage of the stack area increases. However, the maximum stack area usage route may be a route for executing a winning monitoring process for monitoring whether or not a prize has been won in a winning slot, a route for executing a random number update process for updating random numbers, or the like. , There is no problem even if there are multiple maximum stack area usage routes in the processing of the first ROM / RAM area. It is also possible to configure the route that executes this to be the route that uses the maximum stack area.

Next, the maximum stack area usage route in the processing of the second ROM/RAM area will be described. The maximum stack area usage route in the processing of the second ROM/RAM area can be expressed simply as follows (at the time of shifting to the processing of the second ROM/RAM area) → all register saving → ball state display device calculation processing → This is the case of bL calculation processing. First, when the process of the first ROM/RAM area is shifted to the process of the second ROM/RAM area, 14-byte data is stored by the PUSH instruction for saving the values of all registers. Next, 2-byte data is stored as an address to be returned by a CALL instruction for calling a subroutine of the ball entry state display device arithmetic processing. Next, 2-byte data is stored as a return address by a CALL instruction for calling a subroutine for bL operation processing. Next, 2-byte data is stored as a return address by a CALL instruction for calling a subroutine for bL calculation data creation processing. When the above processing is executed, it becomes the maximum stack area usage route in the processing of the second ROM/RAM area, and a total of 20 bytes is used. It should be noted that the route for executing the b1 operation processing is not limited to this, and the maximum stack area use route may be used, and there is no problem even if there are multiple maximum stack area use routes in the processing of the second ROM/RAM area. For example, it is also possible to configure the route for executing the b1 operation to be the maximum stack area use route.

Here, when looking at the maximum stack area usage in the fifteenth embodiment, it is clear that the following feature points are provided.
(1) There is only one maximum stack area use route in one gaming machine program. As described above, the maximum stack area usage route (using 20 bytes) in the processing of the second ROM/RAM area is the maximum stack area usage route in the game machine program.
(2) The maximum stack area usage (20 bytes) for processing the second ROM/RAM area is configured to be larger than the maximum stack area usage (18 bytes) for processing the first ROM/RAM area. . The capacity (maximum 2749 bytes) of the processing program (first control area) in the processing of the first ROM/RAM area and the capacity (maximum 612 bytes) of the processing program (second control area) in the process of the second ROM/RAM area is configured so that the capacity of the processing program in the first ROM/RAM area is larger. (3) The maximum stack area usage route in the processing program in the processing of the first ROM/RAM area is when executing processing related to "main game symbol display processing (processing related to fluctuations in main game symbols)", and other processing. It is configured so that the amount of stack area used is larger than when it is executed.

Furthermore, as a modified example, in the gaming machines described in the present embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment, a setting change button may be provided to enable intentional change of the jackpot winning probability by the winning lottery means MN10 by the manager of the gaming arcade or the like. It is also possible to store the normal prize ball counter value, normal out ball counter value, total out ball counter value, final base value of each section (up to the past 3 sections), etc. for each setting, and display the ball entry status It can also be configured to be displayed on the device. Specifically, the prize ball payout control board KH is configured to have a RAM clear button, a setting change button, and a setting display device. In addition, it may not be provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and may be provided in the main control board M or the like. Furthermore, the RAM clear button, the setting change button and the setting display device may be provided on separate substrates. Next, a setting change method will be described. First, the setting change means that the manager of the game arcade or the like can intentionally change the probability of winning the jackpot, as described above. Next, the setting is high probability (for example, 1/250) for setting 1, medium probability (for example, 1/300) for setting 2, and low probability (for example, 1/320) for setting 3. ) indicates the probability of winning a big hit. In addition to the odds of winning the jackpot, the number of prize balls in each prize opening (for example, the number of prize balls in the big prize opening is set to 1: 15, set to 2: 14, and set to 3: 13). The maximum number of balls entered (the number of large winning openings to close, for example, setting 1: 10, setting 2: 9, setting 3: 8), round distribution in special games (for example, 16 round jackpot ratio However, setting 1: large, setting 2: normal, setting 3: small) can be changed. Next, the setting change method is configured such that the setting change button is operated by the manager of the game arcade or the like while the power supply (power switch Ea) of the gaming machine is on. is configured to be displayed on the setting display device. In addition, instead of making the setting change button operable at any time, a setting change key switch for executing setting changes (for example, when the power of the game machine is off, turning the setting change key to the left will When the setting change button is operated in this state, the setting change is performed, and when the setting change is returned to the original state, the setting change is confirmed) may be provided.

In a gaming machine provided with such "settings", it is preferable to generate ball-entering state information to be displayed on the ball-entering state display device J10 for each setting. More specifically, when the power is turned on, the performance of the gaming machine corresponding to the current settings (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot or the number of winning balls in each winning hole) is read, and a storage area corresponding to the current settings (for example, , normal prize ball counter value, normal out number counter value, total out number counter value, final base value of each section, etc.). Then, based on the values stored in the respective storage areas, the entry state information is generated and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately generate and display the incoming state information (for example, base value) for each setting. In addition, regarding the ball-entering state information displayed on the ball-entering state display device J10, the display content is switched by operating a dedicated ball-entering state display switching button or by operating a setting change button (for example, , when the current setting is 1, when the ball entry status display switching button is operated once, the ball entry status information of setting 2 is displayed, and when the ball entry status display switching button is operated once more, the ball entry status information of setting 3 is displayed. is displayed) so that the latest information for each setting can be confirmed. Here, when using the setting change button, in order to prevent the setting from being changed by operating the setting change button, the above-described configuration using the setting change key switch (for example, the power is turned on and the setting change key switch is turned on) is used. A configuration in which the display content is switched by operating the setting change button in the state of being turned counterclockwise is preferable. In addition, when the display of the entering state information is switched by the entering state display switching button or the setting change button, the display may be returned to the current setting after a predetermined time elapses.

The ball entry state display device J10 may display the ball entry state information for each set value. For example, in the thirteenth embodiment, the ball entry state display device J10 displays "bL." ”, “b2.”, and “b3.”, but by changing the display of “b” to “setting value”, it is possible to check the ball entry state information (base value) for each setting. may Specifically, if the setting is 1, "1L.", "11.", "12.", and "13." For example, "2L.", "21.", "22.", and "23." are displayed on the left two 7-segment displays of the entering state display device J10. In addition, it is possible to configure such that when the setting change button is operated, the ball entry state information in the set value is switched so that the ball entry state information for each setting can be confirmed. It is also possible to configure so that the entering ball state information for each setting can be checked every time. In particular, if the target of the setting change is only the success probability of the special symbol, there is no difference in the base value for each setting value, so the base value is always the same in any setting value, but the target of the setting change is , the probability of success or failure of normal symbols, the probability of winning a small hit, etc., there is a difference in the base value for each set value. It is possible to check the base value according to Note that the above-described display may be performed only when a specific operation is performed (for example, a setting confirmation method described later). Specifically, when a specific operation is not performed, "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." are displayed, but when a specific operation is performed, The set values may be displayed as "1L.", "11.", "12.", "13.", "2L.", "21.", "22.", "23.". Also, the setting value may be displayed on a setting value display device for displaying the setting value instead of being displayed on the entering state display device J10. The setting value display device is composed of a 1-digit 7-segment display or a 2-digit 7-segment display. When configured with a 1-digit 7-segment display, the set values are displayed as ``1'', ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', and ``6'' in the first RAM area or the second RAM area. is configured so that "E" is displayed when there is an abnormality in the . In the case of a 2-digit 7-segment display, the set values are displayed as "01", "02", "03", "04", "05", "06", and are displayed in the first RAM area or the first RAM area. If there is an abnormality in the 2RAM area, it is displayed as "E1", and if there is another abnormality, it is displayed as "E2". In addition, the display indicating the type of error may be changed depending on the type of error. If it is a RAM abnormality (abnormality in the first RAM area or the second RAM area), "E" is used, and for other errors, "F" is used. ” may be used for display. Further, it is preferable that the information that can be displayed as a set value is configured to display error information different from that of other error display devices (for example, the error indicator KH3).

It should be noted that the above-described configuration for displaying the ball-entering state information on the ball-entering state display device J10 corresponds to the configuration of the gaming machine in the embodiments and examples described below (e.g., the 16th embodiment, the 17th embodiment, each setting change method, setting confirmation method, etc.).

(16th embodiment)
Next, a configuration in which a plurality of setting values are provided will be described in detail as a 16th embodiment.

First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixteenth embodiment has a plurality of setting values for differentiating the winning probability of the main game pattern, etc., so that the key switch and the setting change button for changing the setting are provided as the setting change means. are provided. Hereinafter, as the device for changing settings in this example, a key switch for changing settings and a setting change button will be used for explanation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a general input device such as a DIP switch may be employed. Also, from the viewpoint of enabling only a specific administrator to change settings, it is preferable to use a key for changing settings. The configuration may be such that the setting can be changed using the system.

Here, in this example, the key switch for changing the setting can be switched between the ON state and the OFF state by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port and turning it in a predetermined direction. ing. In this example, when the power is turned on (under predetermined conditions), if the setting change key switch is in the ON state, the setting change mode is entered, and operation (for example, pressing) by the setting change button is valid. On the other hand, when the setting change key switch is in the OFF state, the setting change mode is not entered, and the operation (for example, pressing) of the setting change button is disabled. Further, the opening signal of the door D18 input to the main control board M can be given as a predetermined condition for enabling the setting change button. By configuring in this way, two conditions are required as conditions in which setting change can be executed: "the key switch for setting change is in the ON state" and "the door D18 is in the open state". Since this is a condition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the setting change key switch is turned on while the door D18 is closed (that is, an illegal setting change).

In the following, processing related to setting change at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. 171 .

First, FIG. 171 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M according to the sixteenth embodiment. Differences from the main processing on the main control board side shown in FIG. 8A, which is the present embodiment, will be described. After the gaming machine is powered on, at step 1001 (16th), the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch is off. If Yes in step 1001 (sixteenth), the process proceeds to step 1002 . If No in step 1001 (16th) (if the setting key switch is on), the main control board M executes the process of step 1003 (16th) (setting change process, which will be described later), and Go to processing. After step 1014, in step 1014-1 (sixteenth), the main control board M sets the return of the solenoid, and proceeds to the process of step 1015. FIG.

In this example, the game machine has a plurality of setting values, but the correspondence between the operation mode of the setting change button and the change of the setting value of the game machine can be freely designed. For example, if the number of setting values in this example is 6 (the setting value is one of "1" to "6") and the setting value is "6" when the power is turned on, the setting change button is pressed once. If the button is operated three times, the set value becomes "5", and if the button is operated three times, the set value becomes "3". → "1" may be moved down (similarly, according to the number of times the setting change button is operated, the setting value may be moved up sequentially from "1" to "6"). . Also, in this case, when the setting value is "1" and the setting change button is operated once, the setting value becomes "6". The setting value may be changed to the upper limit value when the button is operated. Similarly, according to the number of times the setting change button is operated, the setting value is incremented. , the set value may be changed to the lower limit value (“1” in this example). Alternatively, the setting values may be changed sequentially by pressing the operation button for a long time.

The number of setting values can be freely designed as appropriate, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like. The smaller the number of set values (for example, when the number of set values is 2 or 3), the more interesting the game based on having a plurality of set values is and the simpler the configuration of the game machine is. As the number of setting values increases (for example, when the number of setting values is 5 or 6), the game becomes more interesting.

Here, FIG. 172 shows a state in which the main control board M is housed in a case and a section around the setting operation section. As shown in FIG. 172, on the main control board M, a CPUMC is provided on the upper right side of the main control board M, and a mounting area for a test terminal TS, which is attached only when a ball payout test or the like is performed, is formed in the upper central part of the main control board M. At the lower right portion of the main control board M, the ball entering state display device J10 is provided. An operation unit for changing settings and a set value display device are provided on the upper left portion of the main control board M. FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU, the test terminal, the entering state display device J10, the operation unit for changing the settings, and the set value display device are arranged so that they do not overlap in plan view (rear view of the game machine). ), and a predetermined or more (for example, 30 mm or more) interval is provided so as to prevent misidentification between the entering state display device J10 and the set value display device. In this example, the left side in FIG. 172 is the free end for opening the game machine frame. On the other hand, the ball entry state display device J10 is placed on the side of the rotation axis when the game machine frame is opened, so that when the game machine frame is opened, the display information Consideration is given to prevent the player from unintentionally viewing it. Of course, if priority is given to prevention of tampering when changing set values, an operation unit for changing settings and a set value display device may be formed on the right side of the main control board when viewed from the front (on the side of the rotation axis of the game frame). Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above-mentioned points, an opening/closing cover SKC is provided at a portion corresponding to the operation unit for changing the setting so that the operation unit for changing the setting cannot be easily accessed, and the setting value can be changed. The operation unit for changing settings is configured so as not to be exposed except when performing work or confirming setting information. In the following, an operation unit for changing settings and a set value display device will be described with reference to the lower diagram of FIG. 172 (partial sectional view of related parts).

First, the upper surface of the substrate case corresponding to the operation unit for changing settings is designed so that a setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion port of the setting key switch SK1, and the setting change button SK2 can be operated. An opening of a predetermined size is formed so that However, a partition wall such as a side wall is formed from the opening toward the upper surface of the substrate, so that access to other electronic components (for example, CPU) of the main control substrate M cannot be made through the opening. A setting key SK1 having a setting key insertion opening corresponding to the opening and a push-type setting change button SK2 are arranged above and below. is attached to the substrate case so as to be openable and closable while being biased in a direction to always close the opening.

Next, a brief description will be given of an operation method for changing settings, etc., and an overview of the actions of changing settings and displaying settings. When confirming the set value, first, the opening/closing cover SKC is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force, the setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion opening of the setting key switch SK1, and the key is turned to the right. rotate in the direction By this operation, the current setting value (for example, if the setting value range is 1 to 6, the corresponding numerical value) is displayed on the setting value display device formed by the 7-segment LED, indicating that it is in the setting display mode. A segment DP (dot) is displayed for this purpose. In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is running (power is on), it is possible to display the setting values (transition to the setting confirmation state), but the setting value change processing is performed. is not possible (cannot move to the setting change mode newly).

On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power switch Ea (see FIG. 3) is operated to turn off the power. A setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion port of the switch SK1 and rotated clockwise. Then, the power switch Ea (see FIG. 3) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, if the range of the setting value is 1 to 6, the corresponding numerical value) blinks on the setting value display device formed by the 7-segment LED, indicating that it is in the setting change mode. segment DP (dot) is extinguished to indicate When the setting change button SK2 is pressed in this state, a new setting value obtained by adding 1 to the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. The administrator operates the setting change button SK2 to set any setting value. In the present embodiment, if the set value at the time of power-on is "1", "1", "2", ..., "5", "6", "1" is changed each time the setting change button SK2 is pressed once. , the setting value candidate after the setting change is changed. Then, by operating the setting change button, when the key inserted in the setting key switch SK1 is rotated counterclockwise in a state in which the setting value is changed to an arbitrary setting value (an arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting value display device), the setting value is changed. After the change processing is completed, the current set value is lit and displayed on the set value display device for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) and the segment DP (dot) is lit and displayed, and then both displays are extinguished. In this example, after selecting a setting value candidate after the setting change, the key inserted into the setting key switch SK1 is rotated counterclockwise to complete the setting change process (the setting value is confirmed). (1) detecting that a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entrance; (2) newly providing a switch for confirming the setting; (3) The configuration may be such that the setting change process is completed (the set value is confirmed) by long-pressing the setting change button (maintaining it on for one second or longer).

Also, when setting values are changed, if the setting values are displayed on the front side of the game machine, setting changes (change of setting values) can be performed smoothly. If the setting is changed during the game, the set value can be confirmed, and the fairness of the game is hindered. However, in the gaming machine of this example, since the setting key is used to change the setting value, only a specific manager holding the setting key can change the setting value. It is configured so that the settings are not changed during time (while the player is playing). In this case, the existing light-emitting means (for example, the special symbol display device in FIG. 1 (the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display device B20)) provided in the gaming machine is also used, and the setting is changed. By displaying the setting value only during confirmation of the setting, the confirmation of the setting value can be facilitated.

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing according to the sixteenth embodiment. When the setting change process is started, a command indicating the start of the setting change process is set and transmitted to the sub control board S in step 1003-1. As a result, the sub-control board S can display "in setting change mode" or the like on the effect display device (FIG. 175). At the same time, it is output to the external terminal board as an outer end signal (security signal). At step 1003-2, it is checked whether the set value (set value data) is within the normal range ("1" to "6"), and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1003-4. If NO in step 1003-2, that is, if the set value (set value data) is determined to be an abnormal value other than "1" to "6", the minimum payout rate is set in step 1003-3. A value (set value data) of "1" is set, and the process proceeds to step 1003-4. In step 1003-4, a special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20 or second main game symbol display device B20 may be called in a display mode (for example, full lighting) indicating that the setting is being changed. ) is turned on, and at the same time, the current set value is displayed on the setting display device. Next, in step 1003-5, it is confirmed whether or not there is an input from the setting change button, and if NO, the process proceeds to step 1003-11. If Yes at step 1003-5, at step 1003-6 the setting value data switched by the setting change button is obtained, and the process proceeds to step 1003-7. At step 1003-7, it is checked whether or not the current set value (set value data) is not the maximum value. to add. If NO at step 1003-7, that is, if it is determined that the set value (set value data) is the maximum "6", the lowest ball payout rate "1" is set at step 1003-8. At the same time, the process proceeds to step 1003-9, and 1 is added to the set value (set value data). Subsequently, in step 1003-10, the set value data is updated, and in step 1003-11, it is checked whether or not there is a fall of the set key signal. At step 1003-11, if there is no fall of the setting key signal, the processing proceeds to step 1003-5, and the processing from step 1003-5 to step 1003-11 continues until the fall of the setting key signal is confirmed. repeat. In the case of Yes in step 1003-11, that is, when it is determined that the setting key switch has returned to the state before the setting change, all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are turned off in step 1003-12, and the setting is being changed. After clearing the display mode indicating that the setting change process is completed, a command is set and transmitted to the sub-control board S in step 1003-13. As a result, the sub-control board S hides the message "setting change mode in progress" being displayed on the effect display device, and stops the output to the external terminal board. After the processing of step 1003-13 is completed, the processing shifts to step 1004 of this processing, and RAM clear is executed. In addition, in the processing flow of the fifteenth embodiment, the setting value switched by the setting change button is set when the setting key signal falls (step 1003-11). The set value may be determined by performing any one of the main operations (ball lending button, steering wheel sensor, etc., not shown). Furthermore, the input information of various switches (various gates, starting ports, attackers, etc.) provided on the board may determine the set values. Unauthorized change of settings can be prevented by not being able to change settings, and adopting such a complicated procedure for changing settings also serves to prevent unauthorized change of settings. Also, throughout the entire process, the setting value data managed by the RAM has been described using "1" to "6", but the setting value data "0" to "5" may be substituted for the processing. . By doing so, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM abnormality, the abnormality determination (NO in step 1003-2) due to setting "0" to the value of the RAM that manages the set value data can be avoided. can be done. If the set value data is managed as "0" to "5", "0" is treated as set value data and is not judged to be abnormal. Furthermore, when some kind of lottery is performed using set value data (for example, when different data is selected for each set value in a look-ahead table or the like), there is an advantage that offset processing in table selection is easy to perform. Specifically, when setting value data is managed with "1" to "6", when using it as it is as offset data for table selection, it is necessary to perform processing such as subtracting 1 from the start address. When the value data is managed with "0" to "5", the value can be used as it is as the offset data. When actually displaying the setting value data on the setting display device, the setting value data is displayed as "1" to "6" by adding 1 to the setting value data.

In this example, in step 1003-2, it is determined whether or not the set value (set value data) is within a normal range, in other words, the set value (set value data) is confirmed. However, as the execution timing of the confirmation process,
(1) Timing immediately after turning on the power (2) Timing of entering a ball into a predetermined opening (3) Timing of entering a ball into a main game starting opening (4) Timing of entering a ball into an auxiliary game starting opening (5) Big win Timing of entering the ball into the mouth (6) Main game pattern fluctuation start timing (7) Timing immediately after the game state is switched (8) Timing immediately after the start of the big win (9) Timing immediately after the end of the big win Execute at the above timing. good too. Note that the setting value (setting value data) confirmation process may be executed only at one of the above nine timings, or the setting value (setting value data) confirmation process may be executed at a plurality of the above nine timings. A confirmation process may be performed. For example, since it is configured to execute checksum processing when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to provide a process to check only the set values (set value data). The setting value data) may be configured so as not to execute the confirmation process.

Next, a description will be given of processing when a setting change key switch (sometimes referred to as a setting key switch) is turned on in a situation other than when power is turned on (predetermined conditions).

FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M according to the sixteenth embodiment. The CPU of the main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt at approximately 1.5 ms intervals), in step 1000-S (16th), the CPU of the main control board M judges the setting key operation described later. Execute the process and move to the process of step 1000-1.

The setting key operation determination process determines whether or not the setting key switch is operated (whether or not the setting key is input to the setting key insertion port, and whether or not the key switch for changing the setting is on). It is a process of judging whether or not When it is determined that the setting key switch has been operated in the setting key operation determination processing in the timer interrupt processing (i.e., the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port and the setting key is rotated in a predetermined direction). When the key switch for changing the setting is turned on by doing so, the current setting value of the gaming machine is displayed on a predetermined display device (in this example, the setting value display device).

Here, as described above, in the setting change process that is performed when the power is turned on (under predetermined conditions), if the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the next process until the setting key switch is turned off. On the other hand, in the setting key operation determination process, even when the setting key switch is on, the next process can be performed without waiting for the setting key switch to be turned off. Therefore, the situation in which the setting change process is being executed (specifically, the setting is being changed) and the situation in which it is determined that the setting key switch is on in the setting key operation determination process (specifically, the setting value displayed) may have different executable processes. Here, the following table shows an example of processing that can be executed when the setting is being changed and when the set value is being displayed. In the table, "○" indicates that the corresponding process can be executed, "X" indicates that the corresponding process cannot be executed, and "△" indicates that the corresponding process is suspended. indicates that In the table, "game-related input" is, for example, sensor input from a prize winning opening. Further, the "abnormality report A" is, for example, a frame opening error of the glass frame set/game board D35, an error due to an impact, or the like. Further, "anomaly report B" is, for example, anomaly report relating to magnetism, disconnection/short circuit/power supply, and radio waves. Also, the "production control command" is command transmission to the sub-control board S side, for example. Also, the "payout control command" is, for example, command transmission to the prize ball payout control board KH. In addition, "random number update" means, for example, random numbers per normal symbol (for example, random numbers for winning auxiliary game symbols), random numbers for normal symbols (for example, random numbers for stop symbols for auxiliary game symbols), random numbers for special symbols (for example, random numbers for symbol lottery ), and a process of updating soft random numbers per special symbol. Further, the "external output" is, for example, the output of a security signal (a signal indicating that settings are being changed or set values are being displayed) to be output to an external terminal board. Further, the "maintenance mode" is various setting modes regarding information output on the sub-control board S side. Further, "notification" is notification that the setting is being changed or the set value is being displayed on the sub control board S side. Also, "payout" is a game machine payout process on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Also, "shooting" means whether or not the game ball can be shot on the side of the shooting control board D40.

Next, the arrangement of each device will be described.

≪Arrangement of setting change means≫
First, the layout of the setting key slot will be described. The setting key slot is mounted on the main control board M, and is provided separately from the ball entry state display device J10, the RAM clear button, and the like.

≪Set value display device≫
Next, the set value display device will be described. The gaming machine according to this example includes a set value display device on the main control board M for displaying set values to be set when changing settings. The setting value display device is a 7-segment display device, and the display of "1" to "6" makes it possible to determine six levels of setting 1 to 6. In the sixteenth embodiment, an example in which the set value display device is provided separately from the ball entry state display device J10, the RAM clear button, etc. has been described. The setting value may be displayed by pressing the In this case, both the setting value and the base value are displayed on the ball entry state display device J10. may be configured to display the base value. It is also possible to keep the base value displayed during the setting change mode. can be considered. Further, by changing the display mode of the entering state display device J10, both the set value and the base value may be displayed simultaneously in 4-digit 7-segment. For example, of the 4-digit 7-seg, the most significant digit may display the current set value, and the remaining 3 digits may display the base value.

≪Change target≫
In the 16th embodiment, the winning probability of the winning lottery of the main game symbols in one game state is configured to be changeable. For example, 6 stages of setting 1 to 6 are provided, and the probability of winning the jackpot in each of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state gradually increases in the order of setting 1 to setting 6 (for the player Also, the winning probability of the probability variable gaming state for each setting is double the winning probability of the non-probability variable gaming state. Specifically, the winning probability of the non-probability variation gaming state is set 1: 1/320 (205/65536), set 2: 1/318 (206/65536), set 3: 1/317 (207/65536) , Setting 4: 1/315 (208/65536), Setting 5: 1/314 (209/65536), Setting 6: 1/312 (210/65536). , setting 1: 1/160 (410/65536), setting 2: 1/159 (412/
65536), setting 3: 1/158 (414/65536), setting 4: 1/58 (416/65536), setting 5: 1/157 (418/65536), setting 6: 1/156 (420/65536) It is provided so that In addition, the winning probability of the winning lottery of the main game pattern includes the winning probability of the small win, and the winning probability of the small win is regardless of the set value and the game state (variable probability game state, non-variable probability game state). It is set constant (eg, 1/99). It should be noted that the winning probability of the probability variable gaming state is within 10 times the non-probability variable gaming state, that is, setting 1: 1/30.7, setting 2: 1/30.3, setting 3: 1/ 29.9, setting 4: 1/29.5, setting 5: 1/28.0, and setting 6: 1/27.0.

Next, storage areas for setting values will be described.
<<Storage area for set values>>
The RAM area in the sixteenth embodiment has a setting value storage area (specific area) and other game data storage areas (for example, main game side random numbers, round numbers, etc.). is configured to store from the head address of the RAM area. If a setting is changed by the setting key switch and there is an error in the RAM area, the entire RAM area, including the setting value storage area, is cleared (initialized). When the RAM is cleared by operation, the memory area for setting values is not cleared, and only the data in other game data memory areas are cleared (initialized). Also, an example has been described in which the set value is stored at the start address of the RAM area for the purpose of facilitating designation of the clear range when clearing the RAM, but there is no problem in storing the setting value at any address in the RAM area. Also, a storage area may be provided that is not cleared even when a setting change is executed and there is an abnormality in the RAM area. The information related to the display on the entering state display device J10 may be configured not to be cleared.

≪Timing of confirmation of set value data≫
Next, confirmation processing of set values at the time of lottery will be described. Confirmation processing of the set value at the time of the lottery is performed before step 1410-1 during the main game symbol display processing of step 1400 in the processing at the time of timer interruption, confirms the currently set set value, and is set. This is the process of setting the main game table 1 corresponding to the set value (that is, the winning probability of the big hit corresponding to the setting described above). After confirming the set value at the time of the winning lottery, at step 1410-1, the CPU of the main control board M refers to the main game table 1 corresponding to each game state, and determines the first main game content determination random number ( Based on the second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game pattern winning lottery is executed.

<<Processing while changing settings>>
Next, processing during setting change will be described.

<Processing on the main control side>
First, the CPU of the main control board M is configured to be able to display that the setting is being changed on the special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20). Specifically, during the setting change, all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are configured to light up. It should be noted that it is desirable that all the LEDs of the special symbol display device are lit up in such a manner that they are not displayed during the game of the player. Also, if it is possible to indicate that the setting is being changed, it is not always necessary to use a special symbol display device, and for example, various LEDs provided on the board may be used. Also, by providing a dedicated LED and processing it to display only during setting change, various LEDs {special symbol display device and normal symbol display device (auxiliary game symbol display device H20)} that display other game information , the processing load can be reduced compared to using .

<Processing on the sub-control side>
Next, the CPU of the sub-control board S is configured to be able to suggest that the settings are being changed by means of the effect display device SG, the speaker D24, and the like. Specifically, the effect display device SG is configured to display an image of "Settings are being changed", and the speaker D24 is configured to output a voice of "Settings are being changed". Also, during the setting change, game data unrelated to the main game (not controlled by the CPU of the main control board M) can be changed. For example, it is possible to change the volume change setting (possible or impossible), RTC setting, energy saving mode setting (the amount of light is lower during game standby than during normal game), etc., and sub-input These can be changed by operating the button SB or the cross key. Moreover, you may substitute input devices, such as not only this but a touch panel. In this case, in addition to the effect display device used for the main game as the effect display device, it is desirable to provide another effect display device for performing only sub-inputs and use it as a touch panel.

<Input restrictions>
Next, input restrictions during setting change will be described. Specifically, in the process (setting change process) of step 1003 (16th), it is configured not to detect the ball entering the start port (first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10). there is For example, even if the input signal is input to the input port by detecting the input by the first main game start entrance detection device (A11s) or the second main game start entrance detection device (B11s), Since the CPU of the main control board M does not permit timer interrupt processing, it does not check the input port. However, it is configured to enable error detection such as door open detection and magnet detection. In the present embodiment, these abnormalities are detected only in timer interrupt processing. error detection, it is possible to prevent cheating from being performed in the setting changing state.

<External output>
Next, the information that the CPU of the main control board M outputs to the outside will be described. The information that the CPU of the main control board M outputs to the outside includes: 1. setting value;2. It is possible to output a signal indicating that the setting is being changed. In this example, 1. external output of set values;2. Information indicating that the setting is being changed is configured to be output from the main control board M to the hall computer. The signal indicating that the setting is being changed is continuously output during the setting change, and is configured to continue to be output until a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) elapses after the setting change is completed. Furthermore, the CPU of the main control board M is configured to transmit a setting value command, a setting change start command, and a setting change end command to the CPU of the sub control board S and the CPU of the prize ball payout control board.

<Payment processing>
Next, a description will be given of the process when the power is cut off during the payout process and then the setting is changed. Specifically, when power is cut off while prize balls are being paid out in the prize ball payout unit KE10, the power is turned off while the number of remaining prize balls is backed up in the RAM area. . When the power is restored, the number of remaining prize balls is still stored in normal power restoration (that is, RAM is not cleared). If the power is restored when the power is turned on, the entire RAM area, including the storage area for the set values, will be cleared, so the number of remaining prize balls that was backed up will also be cleared. Even if the power is cut off during the putting out, the number of remaining prize balls will not be put out when the power is restored. Although not shown, when the setting change mode is entered, the CPU of the main game board M notifies the prize ball payout control board KH (the CPU of the prize ball payout control board) that the setting change mode has been entered. A command (sometimes referred to as a setting change start command) is transmitted, and when the setting change mode ends, a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended (sometimes referred to as a setting change end command) is transmitted. . It should be noted that the number of remaining prize balls may be cleared after the setting change is effective.

<Random number update process>
The sixteenth embodiment is configured so that random number update processing is not performed during setting changes. In other words, the random number is updated in step 1018 of the main processing on the main control board side, or various random number update processing (not shown) in timer interrupt processing, initial value update type random number update processing (not shown), and initial value random number update. It is only performed in the process (not shown), and the process of updating the random number is not provided in the setting change process.

<<Display during setting confirmation>>
Next, the display during setting confirmation (sometimes referred to as setting confirmation state or setting display) will be described.

<Display on the main control side>
First, on the main control side, as described above, the LEDs of the special symbol display devices (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) are configured to be able to display that the settings are being changed. However, even during setting confirmation, the LEDs of the special symbol display devices (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) are configured to be able to display that the setting is being confirmed. , All the LEDs of the special symbol display device are configured to blink during setting confirmation. It should be noted that it is desirable that the mode in which all the LEDs of the special symbol display device flash and display is a mode that is not displayed during the player's game (the mode that is displayed during the player's game is, for example, A certain LED and another LED blink alternately). Also, when the setting is being confirmed during the fluctuation of the special symbols, the fluctuation display of the main game symbols on the special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) is It is configured to be displayed with priority over the display of setting values.

<Display on the sub-control side>
Next, during the confirmation of the setting, on the side of the sub-control board S, the effect display device SG displays the image "Confirming the setting", and the speaker D24 outputs the voice "Confirming the setting". It should be noted that during the setting change (sometimes referred to as setting change mode, during setting change mode), game data that is not related to the main game (not controlled by the CPU of the main control board M, does not affect the game result) is changed. Although it is configured to be changeable (maintenance mode), even game data unrelated to the main game (not controlled by the CPU of the main control board M and having no effect on game results) can be changed during setting confirmation. It is configured so that it is not possible and is configured not to be in a configurable state. In addition, it is desirable to set the output time according to the importance of other errors that extend the output time (for example, the importance of setting change notification is higher than that of initialization notification, and the is 5000 ms, the setting may be changed to a longer time of 6000 ms).

<Restrictions on input information>
Next, restrictions on input information will be described. As described above, input information is restricted during setting change, but input information is not restricted during setting confirmation. Specifically, the main control side (main Regardless of the control by the CPU of the control board M) or the sub-control side (control by the CPU of the sub-control board S), all the information related to the game is detected and processed.

<External output>
Next, external output during setting confirmation will be described. First, it is configured not to perform external output during setting confirmation for setting values that are to be externally output during setting change. Next, while the settings are being checked, a signal indicating that the settings are being checked is continuously output. Further, it is configured to continuously output until a specific time (for example, 500 ms) after setting confirmation is completed, and is configured to output for a time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) during setting change.

<Payment processing>
Next, prize ball payout control during setting confirmation will be described. First, when the setting is being checked while the prize balls are being paid out by the prize ball payout device KE, the prize ball payout control is temporarily interrupted. The setting can be confirmed by a game clerk or the like by opening the game machine frame and using the setting key switch from the back side of the game machine. In other words, by opening the game machine frame, there is a possibility that the ball supply device on the parlor side will not normally supply balls to the game machine. Therefore, it is preferable to temporarily suspend the payout of prize balls. Although not shown, when the payout of prize balls is temporarily interrupted, the CPU of the main game board M shifts to the setting confirmation state of the prize ball payout control board KH (the CPU of the prize ball payout control board). A command to that effect (sometimes referred to as a setting confirmation start command) is transmitted, and when the setting confirmation state ends, a command to the effect that the setting confirmation state has ended (sometimes referred to as a setting confirmation end command) is transmitted. It is

<Internal processing such as random number update processing>
Next, internal processing such as random number update processing during setting confirmation will be described. The random number update process is not performed during the setting change, but the random number update process and the like are performed during the setting confirmation process in the same manner as during the game.

<<Processing when the power is restored>>
Next, the processing at the time of power failure recovery will be described.

<Normal power failure recovery>
First, if the settings are not changed and the RAM is not cleared when the power is restored, the game state including the set values is restored to the state before the power was turned off, and the game is started.

<Processing when changing settings>
Next, processing when changing settings will be described. When the setting is changed, all data in the RAM area including the set value are cleared, and then the set set value is stored.

<Processing when clearing RAM>
Next, the processing when clearing the RAM will be described. When the RAM clear button is operated, game data other than the set values are cleared. In addition, in RAM clearing when there is an abnormality in the RAM area, all the data in the RAM area including the set values are cleared.

<<Command transmission timing>>
Next, in this embodiment, the command is transmitted in the control command transmission process in step 1990 in the timer interrupt process. is completed, the CPU of the main game board M issues a command for starting the setting change mode ( A setting change start command) is transmitted, and immediately after the setting change is completed, a command related to the end of the setting change (setting change end command) is transmitted. Also, at the start of the game (for example, the timing of transmitting the fluctuation start command), at the end of the game (for example, the timing to stop the fluctuation stop command), at the time of pending occurrence (for example, the read-ahead pass/fail command and the read-ahead fluctuation mode, which will be described later) A command related to the setting value may be transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S at a timing such as command stop timing. At this time, the sub-control board S stores the received set value, compares it with the set value received in the next game, and notifies if there is a discrepancy, thereby preventing illegal actions during the game. It can also facilitate discovery of configuration changes.

<<Summary of the 16th embodiment>>
As described above, the processing related to the setting change has been described, and the summary is as follows. First, in a situation where the setting is being changed, the main control means (for example, the CPU of the main control board M), the effect control means (for example, the CPU of the sub-control board S) and the payout control means (for example, prize ball payout A command (setting change start command) indicating that the process during setting change in the main control means is to be executed is transmitted to the CPU of the control board KH), and the random number update process related to the success or failure, the starting opening sensor, etc. game-related input, for example, low-priority abnormality notification such as ball tray full (error that the sensor that detects the full tank detects game balls due to excessive game balls being stored in the upper ball tray D20) prevent it from happening. Further, the main control means M outputs a signal indicating that the setting is being changed from the external terminal. It should be noted that high-priority anomaly notifications {for example, anomalies directly linked to fraud (magnetic detection, radio wave detection, etc.)} are also notified during setting changes. On the other hand, the production control means notifies that the settings are being changed, shifts to maintenance mode, and executes test output in the production control means, various production settings, setting of the effective range of player operation, etc. configured to allow Also, the payout control means is configured to prohibit both the payout process and the shooting process.

If the power is turned off while an error with a low priority or an error with a high priority is occurring (during detection), and the power is turned off, the setting key switch is turned on to turn on the power. When the change mode is entered and the setting value is changed in the setting change mode (when the setting value is confirmed), the detection and error notification of the low-priority error or high-priority error that has occurred will be terminated. may be configured. Further, even in such a configuration, if an abnormality is detected again after changing the set value, the error detection and error notification may be performed. In addition, when an abnormality with a low priority is detected during the setting change mode, it may not be judged as an error and error notification may not be executed. is detected, the error notification may not be executed without judging that there is an error.

In a situation where the set value is being displayed on the set value display device, the main control means indicates to the performance control means and the payout control means that the main control means will execute the process during which the set value is being displayed. While sending a command (setting display command), the same processing as usual, such as update processing of random numbers related to win/fail, game-related input such as a start opening sensor, and abnormality notification, is performed. However, a signal indicating that the set value is being displayed is output from the external terminal. Similarly, the effect control means also notifies that the setting value is being displayed, but does not shift to the maintenance mode. In the payout control means, the payout process is temporarily interrupted, but the operation of the shooting process is not prohibited.

Since it is configured as described above, in the sixteenth embodiment, in consideration of the point based on the operation that only the administrator performs such as setting change, the administrator Also, the main control means (for example, the CPU of the main control board M) and the payout control means (for example, the CPU of the prize ball payout control board KH) stop the game function. That is, when an operation that can be executed only by the administrator is executed in the other control means as well, a dedicated process is executed, and the process executed in normal game progress is not executed. Therefore, starting from one operation of changing the setting, a plurality of control means can execute corresponding management processes. On the other hand, during the confirmation work of setting display (setting confirmation state), by configuring so as to maintain normal game processing as much as possible, proper processing is realized without imposing unnecessary restrictions on control. be able to.

<<Modified Example of Sixteenth Embodiment>>
Modified examples of the sixteenth embodiment (setting change) are listed below.
≪Change target≫
In the 16th embodiment, the winning/losing probability of the main game symbols is made different for each set value, but it is also possible to change other parameters that affect the payout rate. Specifically, the ratio of transition to the probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot, the selection ratio of the jackpot type (symbol selection ratio at the time of winning), the probability of success or failure of the auxiliary game pattern, and the shift to the electric support It is possible to combine one or more of parameters such as ratio, special symbols, variation time of auxiliary game symbols (difference in relative number of variations per time), operating speed of movable objects that affect the winning rate. . Also, it is possible to configure the same ball payout rate even though the partial parameters for each set value are different. Of course, it is also possible to improve each parameter according to the improvement of the payout rate. Also, for example, a plurality of parameters such as the probability of success of special symbols and the probability of success of auxiliary game symbols may be set individually. The configuration may be such that the mode is shifted to a parameter change mode corresponding to the position of the key switch. It should be noted that, in addition to the parameters that affect the payout rate, it may also be possible to change the performance frequency that does not affect the payout rate.
≪Timing of confirmation of set value data≫
In the 16th embodiment, the process of confirming the set value is performed for each special symbol lottery process, but it is also possible to perform it only at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the information may be checked only once when the settings are changed and when the power is turned on, or may be checked at each change timing of the game state such as a big win. Also, in the case of a game machine equipped with the ball entry state display device J10, confirmation may be made in accordance with the display timing or calculation timing. As a result, the timing of checking the setting value can be reduced, and the load on other processes can be reduced.
≪Arrangement of setting key switches, etc.≫
In the 16th embodiment, the main control board is equipped with a setting key switch, a setting change button, and a set value display device. It can be provided in the unit E) or can be configured as an independent device. Further, for example, setting key switches are provided on the main control board, and setting change buttons are provided on the payout control board. In addition, since changing the setting value may be subject to unauthorized operation, the input function (setting key switch and setting change button) should be placed inside the control device with a sealed structure, such as the main control board and payout control board. It is desirable to have Also, in the sixteenth embodiment, an example of changing settings using setting key switches and setting change buttons has been described. can be done.

Next, FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode on the effect display device SG during setting change and setting confirmation.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 173 is an image diagram showing a list of items that can be set during the maintenance mode executed by the sub-control board S in the setting change process of FIG. In this example, by transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered from the main control board M side, it is indicated that the setting is being changed on the main control board M side, and the sub control board S side It is configured so that a maintenance mode (a mode for store settings and manufacturing confirmation) can be executed. In this example, during the maintenance mode, the effect display device SG displays a setting display image SGSHG (in this example, an image showing the current setting value "4") that guides the current setting value. configured to do so. Further, as shown in the figure, in the case of the setting change mode, the effect display device SG displays a setting change mode information display image SGHMH (an image for notifying that the setting is currently being changed). In the example, it is configured to be able to display an image displaying "in setting change mode").

As shown in the figure, in this example, a plurality of items can be selected as various settings related to information output during the maintenance mode. More specifically, in this example, during the maintenance mode, a shipping test mode (for example, a mode for testing lamps, sounds, liquid crystal display devices, input confirmation, etc.) is executed (the shipping test mode is , a series of operations may be completed, or, for example, by pressing and holding the sub-input button to return to the main screen, etc.), advertisement content setting {that is, advertisement at a specific timing such as a demo screen and whether or not to display the advertisement, and the specific advertisement content (for example, store name, etc.) when displaying the advertisement}, enabling or disabling the power saving mode (that is, when waiting for a game, etc., mode), selection of whether to enable or disable RTC effects (effects that are executed when a predetermined time is reached) (settings for whether or not to perform RTC effects, all The RTC effect may be uniformly set, or a plurality of RTC effects may be individually set), and the selection of whether or not to display the setting value in the setting confirmation state {that is, the current setting value of the gaming machine can be displayed on the effect display device SG, and a setting display mode (non-display setting) is a mode in which the current set value of the gaming machine is not displayed on the effect display device SG. }, selection of enabling or disabling the player's volume setting and selection of enabling or disabling the player's light intensity setting (in a normal state other than the maintenance mode, the player can press the sub-input button or It is a setting of whether or not it is possible to perform volume setting and light amount setting using a cross key or the like). Also, when the end of the maintenance mode is selected, or when the setting change is finished (for example, based on the reception of a command indicating return from the setting change mode (end of the setting change mode) from the main control board M side) ) The maintenance mode is ended, and a predetermined screen such as a demo screen, normal screen, or dedicated screen is displayed.

In this example, an item is selected by operating the cross key, and the content to be changed is determined by pressing the sub-input button. Further, the effect display device SG is configured to be able to display a button operation information image SGHMB (an image for explaining button operation in the maintenance mode). In addition, at the bottom of the setting change display area (for example, the effect display device SG), there is a caption SGHMJ that suggests and guides the end condition of the maintenance mode (in this example, "Maintenance mode will be forcibly terminated when the setting change is completed. ” subtitle) is scrolled. The caption SGHMJ may be displayed when "end of maintenance mode" is selected with the cross key, or may be displayed all the time during the maintenance mode. In addition, not only subtitles SGHMJ, but also predetermined text information, voice information, etc. may be used to suggest/guidance of conditions for ending the maintenance mode, etc., or such guidance/suggestion may not be performed. Alternatively, the maintenance mode may be automatically terminated based on the fact that the sub-input button or cross key has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. It may be configured to notify that the time (less than the predetermined time) has not been reached and the remaining time until the maintenance mode is automatically terminated.

Next, an example of a display screen during setting confirmation will be described. In the middle of the figure, the sub-control board S side is in a game standby state (a state in which no pattern variation is being executed and there is no hold), and the setting display mode in the above-described maintenance mode is changed to the setting display mode (display setting). ), and is an image diagram displayed when the main control board M side is confirming the settings. In this example, by transmitting a command indicating that the main control board M side has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the sub control board S side indicates that while the main control board M side is confirming the settings. It is configured so that display can be executed.

Further, in this example, the setting display image SGSHG exists in front of the image related to the demo screen displayed in the game standby state (that is, the setting display image SGSHG has priority over the image related to the demo screen). The visibility of the display of the setting display image SGSHG is not hindered depending on the image of the demonstration screen). Further, in this example, at the bottom of the demonstration screen display area (for example, effect display device SG), subtitles SGSMJ (in this example, "set display mode (Display setting is in progress. Remove the setting key to return to normal mode.") is scrolled.

Next, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram displayed when the sub-control board S side is in the symbol variation state (the symbol variation is being executed) and the main control board M side is confirming the settings. In the figure, as the decorative patterns, a first decorative pattern (a decorative pattern that is mainly displayed in the central portion of the effect display device SG and has a relatively larger display area than the second decorative pattern) and a second decorative pattern. Two decorative designs are displayed on the performance display device SG: a decorative design (a decorative design that is mainly displayed in the lower right portion of the performance display device SG, and has a relatively smaller display area than the first decorative design). However, both the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols are the same decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol fluctuations of the main game symbols (for example, if the first main game symbols are fluctuating, the first decorative symbols and the second decorative symbols 2 decorative patterns correspond to the first main game pattern), and even if the first decorative pattern is hidden during the execution of the super ready-to-win effect, etc., the player can is configured so that the decorative design can be confirmed by visually recognizing the second decorative design. Further, in this example, the setting display mode is set to non-display in the maintenance mode described above. More specifically, "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbols to constitute a ready-to-win state, two holds are displayed in the first hold display part SG12, and "red" is displayed as a prefetch effect for the second hold. is displayed, no suspension is displayed in the second suspension display unit SG13, and the display mode of the pseudo suspension display is "green" as a reliability suggestion advance notice corresponding to the change. This is a display example when the board M side is in the process of confirming the settings.

In this example, as described above, since the setting display mode is set to be non-display, "☆" is shown in the setting display image, and the specific setting value cannot be determined from the setting display image SGSHG. or difficult. Note that when the setting display mode is set to non-display, an image related to setting display (for example, setting display image SGSHG) may not be displayed. In this example, the setting display image SGSHG is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern existing in the center of the screen is hidden by the setting display image SGSHG), while the second decorative pattern The visibility of the decorative pattern is ensured by the decorative pattern (decorative pattern arranged at the bottom right of the screen). Also, in this example, at the top of the effect display device SG, subtitles SGSMJ (in this example, "Setting display mode (non-display setting) If you pull out the setting key, it will return to normal mode") is displayed. In addition, during the main game pattern change, the subtitle SGSMJ is configured so as not to overlap with the main game pattern, reserved display, etc., so as not to hinder the visibility of the reserved look-ahead effect and the reserved information related to the pattern change. there).

A second modified example of the sixteenth embodiment (setting change) will be listed below.
≪Amusement machines that do not require setting changes≫
In the 16th embodiment, an example was described in which the probability of success or failure of special symbols is changed for each set value. In some cases, it does not make much sense to provide a function (setting changing means) to perform the setting. However, when developing a game machine, it is not desirable from both a hardware and software standpoint to separately design a game machine equipped with a setting change means and a game machine without a setting change means. In order to reduce development costs, it is necessary to develop game machines with a wide variety of specifications using the same software and hardware configurations as much as possible. Therefore, an example of how to handle the setting change means in a gaming machine that does not require setting changes will be listed below. By configuring in this way, it is possible to develop a game machine with the same software and hardware configuration as a game machine that does not require the setting change means, even if the game machine does not require the setting change means. In addition, it is not necessary that the hardware and software configurations be the same between the game machine that does not require the setting change means and the game machine that does use the setting change means. There is no problem even if there is a design change.
<1 step setting>
A set value that can be changed by the setting change means is set to one type. As a result, the process of switching the setting value remains the same (for example, even though the setting change mode is entered, the setting value is not changed from "1" even if the setting change switch is operated). Similarly, it is possible to realize specifications similar to those of gaming machines that do not require setting changes. In this case, since there is only one type of numerical value that can be used as the setting value, by displaying "1" as the setting value data on the setting value display device, it is made to recognize that the processing for displaying the setting is being performed. It does not matter if it is displayed or not. Also, if the sub-control board is equipped with a process for displaying information about the set values, the default value (for example, "setting 1") may be sent, or the actual set values exist. You can send a command not to. When a command indicating that the setting value does not exist is transmitted, it is desirable that the sub-control board receives the command and displays that the setting value does not exist.
<Common setting value>
All setting values that can be changed by the setting changing means are set as the same setting value. Specifically, when using 6-level settings (settings 1 to 6), for example, by treating all setting values as "1", the same setting value is used regardless of which setting value is selected. can be done. This makes it possible to achieve the same specification as the one-step setting without changing the setting value switching process. When reading the set value data, the data of the set value "1" is stored in the ROM address corresponding to each of the settings 1 to 6, and the set value "1" is read from the address corresponding to the selected set value. data may be read out, or data of the setting value "1" may be stored at an address common to setting 1 to setting 6. FIG. At this time, it is conceivable that the set value display device displays the set values "1" to "6" in accordance with the operation of the setting change button. is suitable for machines that do not require setting changes, thereby avoiding misunderstandings when confirming setting values.
<Software processing that does not refer to set values>
The setting values stored in the RAM (the setting values selected by the setting changing means) are not referred to in processing. Specifically, in the case of a gaming machine that adopts set values, when referring to the win-or-fail probability table when drawing lots for special symbols, the set values stored in the RAM as the selected set values are referred to. A success/failure probability table corresponding to the set value is selected (described in an eighth embodiment to be described later). At this time, by omitting the process of referring to the set values from the RAM and determining one predetermined win-or-fail probability table, it is possible to realize specifications similar to those of gaming machines that do not require setting changes.
<Software processing that refers to set values>
The software processing that does not refer to set values has been described above as a game machine that does not require setting changes. This is not the case. Regardless of which set value data the selected set value is, the same right/wrong probability table is determined. As a result, there is no setting difference due to the set value.
<Identification flag>
A flag is provided to distinguish between a gaming machine that requires a setting change and a gaming machine that does not require a setting change, and the flag is determined at a predetermined trigger such as a game start timing to perform processing in the gaming machine that changes the setting; To change processing in a game machine that does not require setting change. Specifically, in the power-on process of FIG. 171, the flag stored in the ROM of the main control board M is referenced before the process of step 1001 to indicate that the game machine does not require a setting change. If it is a value, it is conceivable to proceed to the processing of step 1002 without performing the processing of step 1001 . In this case, software changes may occur, but at least hardware changes may not occur.
<Set number of settings>
Select the number of settings to use for setting changes. For example, three types of setting, 1-step setting, 3-step setting, and 6-step setting, are designed so that they can be appropriately selected according to game specifications. Specifically, a method of setting according to the rotational position of a setting key switch used when changing settings, and a method of selecting using an input switch such as a DIP switch are conceivable. As another means, as in the example using the identification flag, a flag indicating the number of selectable settings (1-step setting, 3-step setting, 6-step setting) stored in the ROM of the main control board M may be referred to before the processing of step 1001 (sixteenth) in FIG. 171 or before the processing of step 1003-1 in FIG. 173 to enable selection of the set number. By using such a method, the specifications of current gaming machines can be divided into three types: gaming machines corresponding to 1-level setting, gaming machines corresponding to 3-level setting, and gaming machines corresponding to 6-level setting. Therefore, it is possible to easily select a process according to the set number. Further, as a result, it is possible to function as a game machine that does not require a setting change when one-step setting is selected and used, and when three-step setting and six-step setting are selected and used, the selected setting step is used. It can function as a game machine whose settings can be changed. Also, as in the example using the one-step setting above, if the sub-control board is equipped with a process for displaying setting information, a value indicating the number of settings selected (for example, "three-step setting") may be sent. As a result, the sub-control board S notifies, according to the value received from the main control board M, "the currently selected setting is a three-step setting", etc., through the effect display device SG or the speaker D24. It can be carried out.
<Others>
Functions related to setting changes (setting change buttons, etc.) are provided on the sub-board (power supply board, etc.) instead of the main control board, and in the case of game machines that do not require setting changes, signal input to the main control board may not be performed. Specifically, there is a method that does not connect the harness between the sub-board that has the function related to setting change and the main control board, and a method that does not send commands related to setting change from the sub-board to the main control board. method, etc. can be considered.

<<Configuration being checked>>
Configurations during setting confirmation applicable to the gaming machine according to this example are listed below. It should be noted that the configurations enumerated below are applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and it should be supplemented that there is no problem by appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations (only when a plurality of setting values are provided).

<When the power is cut off while checking the settings>
If a power failure occurs while checking the settings and then recovers from the power failure,
(1) The setting confirmation is resumed (2) The setting confirmation is terminated (when the setting key switch is turned from off to on after that, the setting is being confirmed)
(3) Switch to setting change mode

<Action during setting confirmation>
During setting confirmation (setting confirmation state), the configuration may be as follows. (1) Entry into the first main game starter A10, second main game starter B10, auxiliary game starter H10, general winnings P10, first big winnings C10 and second big winnings C20 is invalid. (It is possible that only some entrances are invalid, and other entrances are valid. (2) 1st main game start gate A10, 2nd main game start gate B10, auxiliary (3) Operation of the launch handle D44 is disabled (the game ball is unfireable)
(4) The operation of the shooting handle D44 remains valid (the game ball is not disabled to be shot).
(5) Error detection is executable, but error notification is not displayed on effect display device SG. Display an error notification at (7) Do not display the demo screen (do not shift to game standby state)
(8) Main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) do not start changing (9) Auxiliary game symbols do not start changing

<Period during which settings cannot be confirmed>
It may be configured so that the setting cannot be confirmed even if the setting key switch is turned on during the following period (does not shift to the setting confirmation state).
(1) Special game start demo time (2) Special game end demo time (3) Special game in progress (4) Main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) fluctuating (5) Auxiliary game While the pattern is changing (6) During the operation of the normal electric accessory (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory) (7) During the specific effect (executing the effect related to RTC, etc.)
(8) During time reduction game state (9) During probability variation game state (10) During specific error (door open detection, magnet detection, etc.)

<When returning from checking settings>
The action when returning from the setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) (when the setting key is turned off) may be configured as follows.
(1) The volume setting is set to the initial setting (2) The light intensity setting is set to the initial setting (3) A demo screen is displayed (shifts to the game standby state)

<<Configuration of setting change mode>>
Configurations of setting change modes applicable to the gaming machine according to this example are listed below. It should be noted that the configurations listed below are applicable to all of the above-described embodiments, and it is supplemented that there is no problem in appropriately combining one or a plurality of configurations (only when a plurality of setting values are provided).

<When power failure occurs during setting change mode>
If a power failure occurs while in the setting change mode and then recovers from the power failure,
(1) The setting change mode is restarted. (2) The setting change mode ends.
(3) Transition during setting confirmation

<Action during setting change mode>
(1) Entry into the first main game starter A10, second main game starter B10, auxiliary game starter H10, general winnings P10, first big winnings C10 and second big winnings C20 is invalid. (It is possible that only some entrances are invalid, and other entrances are valid. (2) 1st main game start gate A10, 2nd main game start gate B10, auxiliary (3) Operation of the launch handle D44 is disabled (the game ball is unfireable)
(4) The operation of the shooting handle D44 remains valid (the game ball is not disabled to be shot).
(5) Error detection is executable, but error notification is not displayed on effect display device SG. Display an error notification at (7) Do not display the demo screen (do not shift to game standby state)
(8) Main game symbols (first main game symbol, second main game symbol) do not start changing (9) Auxiliary game symbols do not start changing

<When returning from the setting change mode>
The action when returning from the setting change mode may be configured as follows.
(1) The volume setting is set to the initial setting (2) The light intensity setting is set to the initial setting (3) A demo screen is displayed (shifts to the game standby state)

(17th embodiment)
Next, as a modification of the thirteenth embodiment, processing on the main control board side in a pachinko game machine provided with set values will be described as a seventeenth embodiment.

<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>
First, FIG. 176 is the main flowchart of the main control board M side in the seventeenth embodiment. Characteristic processing in FIG. 176 is step 1001 (17th), step 1003 (17th), step 1000 (17th), step 1005 (17th), step 1001-1 (17th), step 1001-2. (17th). First, after the power is turned on, in step 1001 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch is off. If Yes in step 1001 (17th), the process proceeds to step 1000 (17th). If Yes in step 1001 (17th), the set values backed up in the first RAM area at the time of power failure are restored. On the other hand, if No in step 1001 (17th), in step 1003 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M executes a setting change process, and proceeds to the process of step 1006 . Next, in step 1000 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M calls the second RAM area confirmation process at power-on of the second ROM/RAM area as the process in the first ROM/RAM area.
<Processing in the second ROM/RAM area>
Next, in step 1005 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M refers to the set values stored in the first RAM area by the program in the second ROM, and sets the second RAM area corresponding to the set values. (For example, when "1" is set as the setting value, the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" in the second RAM area is used). Next, in step 1001-1 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the second RAM area as the process in the first ROM/RAM area or the process in the second ROM/RAM area. (For example, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" in the second RAM area).
<Processing in First ROM/RAM Area/Processing in Second ROM/RAM Area>
If Yes in step 1001-1 (17th), in step 1001-2 (17th), the CPU of the main control board M clears all the data in the first RAM area and the second RAM area (for example, the first RAM area and "1" is set as the setting value, the data in the storage area corresponding to the setting "1" in the second RAM area is cleared). Since the first RAM area is updated only by the first ROM/RAM control and the second RAM area is updated only by the second ROM/RAM control, the first RAM area is cleared only by the first ROM/RAM control. This is performed by processing in RAM control, and clearing of the second RAM area is performed by processing in second ROM/RAM control.

Here, the second RAM area will be described with reference to the image diagram of the second RAM area on the upper right of FIG. The second RAM areas are provided to correspond to the setting values, and a second RAM area corresponding to setting 1, a second RAM area corresponding to setting 2, a second RAM area corresponding to setting 3, etc. are provided. . In other words, in the second RAM area corresponding to setting 1, the initial flag, display data switching flag 1, display data switching flag 2, normal winning balls counter value, normal out number counter value, total out number counter value, etc. Similarly, in the second areas that are stored and correspond to setting 2 and setting 3, the initial flag, display data switching flag 1, display data switching flag 2, normal winning balls counter value, normal out number counter value, total It is configured to store an out number counter value and the like.

In this embodiment, after the power is turned on, after determining whether the setting key switch is on or off, the information in the second RAM area is confirmed (step 1001-1), and the RAM is cleared as necessary. Although (initialization) processing (step 1001-2) is performed, initialization processing is provided after power is turned on (before step 1001). The configuration may be such that setting processing is performed. In this case, for example, in the RAM check process, if it is determined by using the checksum data of the first RAM area and the second RAM area that the data at the time of power failure is not normally stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area, , regardless of whether the stored information of the setting value is normal (if it is a 6-step setting, whether it is 1 to 6 or not) (without judging), after clearing the necessary storage area, the default setting A value (for example, setting 1) is set, and then the setting processing for each port is performed. It should be noted that the processing for setting the internal register of the CPU, which should be executed prior to the start of the program processing, is performed before the RAM check processing.

As described above, by performing the RAM check before changing the set value, even if the data in the RAM is abnormal, even if the set value data itself is normal, it is judged to be abnormal. A default setting value can be set by using the setting value, and the operation of the game machine based on unexpected settings can be restricted. In order to suggest that the default setting value has been set, when the power is turned on, an unusual power-on notification (for example, by changing the lighting pattern of the frame lamp, by changing the notification time, etc.) It is also preferred to perform

<Setting change mode and setting confirmation mode applicable to this example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 177 to 186, a setting change method and a setting confirmation method applicable to this example will be exemplified. It should be noted that setting change and setting confirmation can be performed not by the player but by a game clerk or the like. In addition, it should be added that the configurations illustrated below can be combined in any way without any problem, and that any configuration can be applied to all the above-described embodiments (implementation without the concept of setting values). Regarding the form, the following configuration can be applied assuming that a plurality of setting values are provided).

First, FIGS. 177 and 178 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method using a setting change button (setting change button formula 1). The setting change method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like releases the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14, if the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is off and the setting key switch is off, the next procedure is performed. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on or the setting key switch is on, it is turned off to proceed to the next procedure.
(3) A game clerk or the like rotates the setting key switch to the right to turn it on. (4) When the game clerk or the like turns on the power switch Ea, the game machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the set value is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to display a default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), or may be configured to display the currently set setting value. good too. Also, in order to make it possible to recognize that the setting change mode is in effect, a configuration may be adopted in which a voice saying "setting is being changed" is output.
(5) Every time the game clerk presses the setting change button (every time it turns from off to on), the set value (set value data, sometimes referred to as set value candidate) is changed to the next set value (set value data). , and the set value (set value data) is displayed on the set value display device. In the same figure, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and changed to the setting value 2, but the settings are jumped (for example, setting 1 → setting 3 → setting 5, setting 2 → setting 4 → setting 6, etc.). Even if it is configured, it is preferable to configure it so that the next set value (for example, set value 1 is changed to set value 3). Also, if the game clerk or the like presses the setting change button once, the setting may be decremented by -1. In this case, setting 6 is preferably the setting with the lowest jackpot probability, and the default setting value is preferably 6. Furthermore, characters or symbols that can be displayed on the set value display device of the 7-segment display may be used as settings, such as L (LOW) or H (HIGH). Here, display of setting values and selection candidates of setting values can be changed, and the setting is determined when the determination condition is satisfied. That is, the display of the setting value display device displays "1" when the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and each time the setting change button is operated, the display switches to "1→2→3→1→2". The setting value is set (fixed) to 2 when the confirmation condition is satisfied when the display of the setting value display device is "2".

<Example of action in setting change mode>
Here, the following configuration can be exemplified as an example of the action in the setting change mode applicable to this example.
(A) "The display of the setting value display device when shifting to the setting change mode is the default value of '1' → By operating the setting change button once, the display of the setting value display device is '2'. → Turn off the power switch → Turn on the power switch → The display of the setting value display device becomes the default value "1""
(B) "The display of the setting value display device when shifting to the setting change mode is the default value of '1' → By operating the setting change button once, the display of the setting value display device is '2'. → Turn off the power switch → Turn on the power switch → The display of the setting value display device becomes "2" before the power was turned off.
It may be configured as described above.

Returning to the description of FIGS. 177 and 178,
(6) The setting is confirmed when the game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button during the setting change mode (for example, ON for 0.5 seconds→OFF). Alternatively, the setting value may be determined by pressing the RAM clear button for a long time. Malfunctions are less likely to occur when settings are finalized. In addition, when the setting is confirmed, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device may remain displayed (in this case, it is erased in the next procedure), and after the setting is confirmed, The word may be erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds has passed), or may be erased when the setting is confirmed. In the figure, the set values are still displayed.
(7) When the game clerk or the like rotates the setting key switch to the left to turn it off (return it to its original position), the setting change mode ends. Here, since the setting value is still displayed in the previous procedure, the display of the setting value is erased during this procedure. In addition, if the game clerk etc. does not press the RAM clear button and the setting key switch is turned off without confirming the setting, the setting will be the default setting or (because the setting was not changed in the setting change mode (because of this), it is preferable to configure the setting so that it is set before the setting change mode (the same operation as in the setting display mode described later).
(8) The game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. As a result, the game machine becomes ready to play. When the setting is changed, RAM clearing other than the setting storage area is performed, so that the decoration pattern is displayed as "331" on the effect display device SG as a display mode at the time of RAM clearing. As shown in the figure, when the RAM is cleared with the setting change, the setting change is executed by configuring the display mode of the decorative pattern to be a predetermined display mode (combination) such as "331". becomes clear, and it becomes easier for a manager such as a game clerk to manage the game machine. Although not shown, when the setting change mode ends, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is transmitted to the sub control board S side. Furthermore, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM has been cleared is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) (for example, outputting "Settings have been changed"). It should be noted that the game may be configured to be playable from the timing when the setting key switch described in detail in (7) above is turned off.

Next, FIGS. 179 and 180 are transition diagrams showing another setting change method using the setting change button (setting change button formula 2). Since the setting change button type 2 has a configuration similar to that of the setting change button type 1, only different procedures will be described.
Descriptions of (1) to (5) will be omitted because they have the same function as the configuration of the setting change button type 1.
(6) When the game clerk turns the setting key switch to the left to turn it off, the setting is confirmed (end of the setting change mode), and the setting value displayed on the setting value display device of the game machine disappears. erased. It should be noted that the setting value may be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the setting is confirmed.
(7) Close the front frame D14. Incidentally, the configuration may be such that the game can be executed when the setting is confirmed, or the game can be executed when the front frame D14 is closed.

In the setting change button type 2, the setting is fixed simply by turning off the setting key switch (without operating the RAM clear button) by the game clerk, etc., so that the setting is fixed more easily than the setting change button type 1. It is possible.

In addition, when the setting change method is configured as shown in the figure, there is no operation for confirming the set value like the start lever in a reel-type game machine. If the value is fixed and the display of the setting value is erased, there is a concern that the administrator may forget which setting value was selected (fixed). Also, in such a situation, if you want to check the set value, you have to turn the power off and then on again. Under these circumstances, when the setting value can be determined by turning off the setting key switch, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) must elapse after the setting key switch is turned off to determine the setting value. It is preferable to display the determined set value on the set value display device (or ball entry state display device J10). In such a configuration, when the setting key switch is turned off and the set value is determined, a voice saying "The set value has been determined" may be output from the speaker. In addition, in the setting change mode, when the set value is not confirmed, the display of the set value blinks, and after that, when the set value is confirmed, the set value is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). It may be configured to display by lighting. It should be noted that such a configuration can be applied to any configuration that can display the set values according to this example.

Next, FIG. 181 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method in a configuration having a setting change button. The setting confirmation method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like releases the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) The power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on and the setting key switch is off. (3) When a game clerk or the like turns the setting key switch to the right to turn it on, the game machine shifts to a setting confirmation mode (sometimes referred to as a setting display mode), and the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. is displayed. At this time, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is in the setting confirmation mode, it may be configured to output a sound "Confirming settings". is not output (the output of the game sound is stopped), and only the sound "Checking settings" is output, or the game sound and "Checking settings" are output at the same time. It may be configured to be
(4) When the game clerk or the like turns off the setting key switch, the game machine terminates the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting values displayed on the setting value display device is erased. At this time, the configuration may be such that a voice saying "The setting confirmation is finished" is output.
(5) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. In the setting confirmation mode, since the progress of the game (variation of special symbols, etc.) is continued without being paused, even if the front frame is closed during the variation of the special symbols, the effect display device SG Variation of decorative patterns and effect display are continued. In the setting confirmation mode, the progress of the game may be temporarily stopped. In this case, when the setting key switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is entered, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped, and the setting key switch is turned on. When turned off, the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the temporary stop is released, and the game continues to progress.

Next, FIGS. 182 and 183 are transition diagrams showing a setting change method using setting switches. The setting change method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like releases the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14, if the power switch Ea of the game machine is off and the setting switch is off (the arrow of the setting switch is pointing upward), the next procedure is performed. If the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on or the setting switch is on, all are turned off and the process proceeds to the next step.
(3) The game clerk or the like rotates the setting switch to the left to turn it on.
(4) When the game clerk or the like turns on the power switch Ea while keeping the setting switch in the left direction, the game machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to display from the default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), or to display from the setting value of the currently set setting. may be configured. Also, in order to make it possible to grasp that the mode is the setting change mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a voice saying "setting is being changed" is output.
(5) As described above, the setting switch returns to its original position (initial position) when the operator such as a game clerk releases the setting switch itself in the operated state (the state in which it is twisted to the left or right). It is configured. Since this procedure describes the configuration of the setting switch, it can be skipped and the next procedure can be performed.
(6) When a game clerk or the like rotates the setting switch in the right direction (sometimes referred to as twisting), the set value (set value data, also referred to as set value candidate) is changed to the next set value. . Here, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and changed to the setting value 2. That is, each time the setting switch is rotated to the right (every time it is turned on from off), the set value is changed to the next set value. In addition, it may be possible to change (configure to -1) as described in “setting change button formula 1 (5)”. It should be noted that the display of the setting value can be changed here, and the setting is configured to be changed when the confirmation condition is satisfied.
(7), (8) When an operator such as a game clerk releases the setting switch and the setting switch remains in the original position after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the setting is confirmed (end of setting change mode). If the setting switch is turned clockwise again before the predetermined time elapses, the setting value is changed to the next setting value. Specifically, the setting change mode is entered and setting value 1 is displayed → turn the setting switch to the right within 5 seconds → change to setting value 2 → turn the setting switch to the right within 5 seconds → set Change to value 3 -> 5 seconds elapse -> Confirm to setting 3 (end of setting change mode). When the setting is confirmed (a predetermined time has passed), the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. (9) The game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. As a result, it becomes possible to play the game. Since RAM clearing other than the setting storage area is performed when the setting is changed, the decoration pattern is displayed as "331" on the effect display device SG as a display mode at the time of RAM clearing. Furthermore, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM has been cleared is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

Next, FIG. 184 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method using setting switches. The setting confirmation method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like releases the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game clerk or the like opens the front frame D14 when the power switch Ea is on, the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on and the setting switch is off (initial position).
(3) When the game clerk or the like turns the setting switch to the left to turn it on, the game machine shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value of the current setting is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is in the setting display mode, it may be configured to output a sound "Confirming settings". is not output, and only the sound "Checking settings" may be output, or the game sound and "Checking settings" may be output at the same time. In addition, it is preferable that the administrator can distinguish between the setting change mode and the setting display mode. It may be configured such that it is easy to determine whether the mode is in the setting display mode or the setting display mode. Although not shown, when the setting change mode is started (shifted to the setting change mode), information about the start of the setting change mode is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, When the setting display mode is started (shifted to the setting display mode), information about the start of the setting display mode is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) When a game clerk or the like turns off the setting switch (initial position) and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the game machine terminates the setting confirmation mode and sets the setting value displayed on the setting value display device. is erased. If the game clerk or the like turns on the setting switch again (twisting it to the right or to the left) before the predetermined time elapses, the setting value display timer is reset at that time. Further, when the setting switch is turned on again after the predetermined time has passed, the procedure of (3) is performed, so that the set value is displayed on the set value display device.
(5) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. It should be noted that the progress of the game at this time is as described in "Method of confirming settings (5) in a configuration provided with a setting change button".

Next, FIG. 185 is a transition diagram showing a setting change method using the RAM clear button. The setting change method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like releases the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) When the game clerk opens the front frame D14, if the power switch Ea of the game machine is off, the process proceeds to the next step. Incidentally, if the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is on, it is turned off to proceed to the next step.
(3) When a game clerk or the like turns on the power switch Ea while pressing the RAM clear button to turn it on, the gaming machine shifts to the setting change mode, and the set value is displayed on the set value display device. At this time, the setting value display device may be configured to display from the default setting value (for example, setting 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), or to display from the setting value set before the power is turned off. Alternatively, it may be configured not to display the setting value. Also, in order to allow the administrator to recognize that the mode is the setting change mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a voice saying "setting is being changed" is output.
(4) Each time a game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button (every time it is turned on from off), the set value is changed to the next set value. Here, the setting value 1 is incremented by 1 and changed to the setting value 2. That is, each time the RAM clear button is pressed (every time it is turned on from off), the set value is changed to the next set value. Also, the setting value may be changed (configured to be -1) as described in "setting change button formula 1 (5)". If a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without any operation to change the setting (operation of the RAM clear button), the setting is confirmed (the setting change mode ends), and the RAM is cleared again before the predetermined time elapses. When the clear button is pressed, the setting value is changed to the next setting value. Specifically, the setting change mode is entered and the setting value 1 is displayed → the RAM clear button is pressed within 5 seconds → the setting value is changed to 2 → the RAM clear button is pressed within 5 seconds → the setting value is changed to 3 -> 5 seconds have passed -> Setting 3 is confirmed (end of setting change mode). That is, when the RAM clear button is pressed (turned on) again before the predetermined time elapses, the setting value display timer is reset at that time. When the setting is confirmed (a predetermined period of time has elapsed), the display of the set value displayed on the set value display device is erased. It should be noted that the display of the setting value can be changed here, and the setting is configured to be changed when the confirmation condition is satisfied.
(5) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. As a result, it becomes possible to play the game. When the setting is changed, RAM clearing other than the setting memory area is performed, so that the display mode at the time of RAM clearing is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the decoration pattern is displayed as "331". Furthermore, although not shown, an error sound indicating that the RAM has been cleared is output for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds).

In the configuration shown in FIG. 185, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear button turned on, the setting change mode is entered. The setting value may be displayed on the value display device (the setting value may not be displayed on the setting value display device when shifting to the setting change mode).

Next, FIG. 186 is a transition diagram showing a setting confirmation method using the RAM clear button. The setting confirmation method is performed according to the following procedure.
(1) A game clerk or the like releases the front frame D14 from the outer frame D12.
(2) The front frame D14 is opened by a game clerk or the like when the power switch Ea is turned on, and the power switch Ea of the gaming machine is turned on.
(3) When the game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button, the game machine shifts to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value of the current setting is displayed on the setting value display device. At this time, in order to make it possible to grasp that it is in the setting confirmation mode, it may be configured to output a sound "Confirming settings". is not output, and only the sound "Checking settings" may be output, or the game sound and "Checking settings" may be output at the same time. Further, as in the configuration described above, it may be configured such that the progress of the game is stopped during the setting confirmation mode.
(4) When the game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button again, the game machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting values displayed on the setting value display device is erased. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the setting value is displayed, the game machine ends the setting confirmation mode, and the display of the setting value displayed on the setting value display device is erased. In this case, if the game clerk or the like presses the RAM clear button again before the predetermined time elapses, the setting value display timer is reset at that time. Further, when the RAM clear button is pressed again after the predetermined time has passed, the procedure of (3) is performed and the set values are displayed.
(5) A game clerk or the like closes the front frame D14. It should be noted that the progress of the game at this time is as described in "Method of confirming settings (5) in a configuration provided with a setting change button".

<Other configurations related to set values>
In the fifteenth, sixteenth, and seventeenth embodiments described above, various examples of how to change and confirm the set values in a pachinko game machine configured to have set values were illustrated. As a configuration relating to setting values applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example, a configuration described in detail below may be used. It should be noted that one or more of the configurations detailed below can be applied to any of the embodiments described above.

<Configuration 1>
The setting change mode may be entered when "the power switch is turned off, the setting key switch is turned off, and the power switch is turned on" in the setting change mode (the setting key switch is turned on).

<Configuration 2>
In the setting change mode (the setting key switch is on), the power switch is turned off → the setting key switch is turned off → the setting key switch is turned on → the power switch is turned on. good too.

<Configuration 3>
If you turn off the power switch while the RAM clear button is on in the setting change mode (the setting key switch is on) → turn on the power switch while the RAM clear button is on, the setting change mode is entered. may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 4>
Setting change mode when "Power switch is turned off while RAM clear button is on during normal game (not setting change mode or setting confirmation mode) → Power switch is turned on while RAM clear button is on" may be configured to move to

<Configuration 5>
In the setting change mode (with the setting key switch on), turn off the power switch while keeping the RAM clear button on → turn off the setting key switch while keeping the RAM clear button on → turn off the power while keeping the RAM clear button on The setting change mode may be entered when the switch is turned on.

<Configuration 6>
When "open the front frame D14 with the power switch off → turn the setting key switch on → turn the power switch on", the system shifts to the setting change mode and outputs a voice saying "Setting change mode in progress". If the power switch is turned off and the front frame D14 is closed, when the setting key switch is turned on → the power switch is turned on, the setting change mode is entered and the voice of "abnormal operation detected" is heard. may be configured to output

<Configuration 7>
When "open the front frame D14 with the power switch off → turn the setting key switch on → turn the power switch on", the system shifts to the setting change mode and outputs a voice saying "Setting change mode in progress". If the power switch is turned off and the front frame D14 is closed, and the setting key switch is turned on → the power switch is turned on, the message "An abnormal operation was detected" will appear without shifting to the setting change mode. It may be configured to output sound.

<Configuration 8>
During the setting change (setting change mode), each winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, first big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, left general winning opening P10, Even if the game ball enters the right general winning hole P20), the prize ball is not paid out, and the game ball enters each starting hole (first main game starting hole A10, second main game starting hole B10). Even if the special symbol does not start changing, during the setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), each winning opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, first big winning opening C10, second When the game ball enters the large winning opening C20, the left general winning opening P10, the right general winning opening P20), the prize balls are paid out, and each starting opening (first main game starting opening A10, second main game It may be configured so that the variation of the special symbol is started when the game ball enters the starting port B10).

<Configuration 9>
A game ball may not be shot even if the shooting handle D44 is operated while the setting is being changed, and a game ball may be shot when the shooting handle D44 is operated while the setting is being confirmed.

<Configuration 10>
During setting change, it is configured so that error notification due to disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, impact detection, etc. is not performed. It may be configured so that an error notification can be performed by, for example.

<Configuration 11>
Operation of the sub-input button SB and cross key SB-2 is disabled during setting change (volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, etc. are not possible), and operation of sub-input button SB and cross key SB-2 is disabled during setting confirmation. is effective (volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, etc. are possible). Further, the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB may be disabled during both setting change and setting confirmation.

<Configuration 12>
During setting change, operation of the sub-input button SB is disabled, operation of the left button and right button of the cross key SB-2 is enabled (volume adjustment is possible), and operation of the left or right button of the cross key SB-2 is enabled. When the button is operated, the sound volume is changed based on the operation of the left button or right button of the cross key SB-2, but the image display showing the current sound volume is not displayed on the effect display device SG. may be configured as follows. During confirmation of the settings, the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 is valid, and a button operation effect (a new image is displayed on the effect display device SG by making the player operate the sub-input button SB). When there is an operation of the sub-input button SB in the effect of changing the displayed image or gauge), the effect is executed based on the operation of the sub-input button SB, and the cross key SB- When the left button or right button of 2 is operated, the volume is changed based on the operation of the left button or right button of the cross key SB-2, and an image display showing the current volume is displayed on the effect display device. It may be configured to be performed in SG.

<Configuration 12>
During the setting change, the operation of the sub-input button SB is disabled, the operation of the up button and down button of the cross key SB-2 is enabled (light intensity adjustment is possible), and the up button and down button of the cross key SB-2 are enabled. When the button is operated, the amount of light is changed based on the operation of the upper button and the lower button of the cross key SB-2, but the image display showing the current amount of light is not displayed on the effect display device SG. may be configured as follows. During confirmation of the settings, the operation of the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB-2 is valid, and a button operation effect (a new image is displayed on the effect display device SG by making the player operate the sub-input button SB). When there is an operation of the sub-input button SB in the effect of changing the displayed image or gauge), the effect is executed based on the operation of the sub-input button SB, and the cross key SB- When the up button or down button of SB-2 is operated, the amount of light is changed based on the operation of the up button or down button of the cross key SB-2, and an image indicating the current amount of light is displayed on the effect display device. It may be configured to be performed in SG.

<Configuration 13>
During the setting change, it is possible to recognize that the game is not in progress (or the game is not possible) on the effect display device SG, and a display is made so that the user can recognize that the setting is being changed. (or playable state), and furthermore, a display that enables recognition of the fact that the settings are being checked may be provided. For example, during setting change, the background image of the effect display device SG is black, and the characters "setting change in progress" are displayed. is displayed, and furthermore, the text "Confirming settings" may be displayed.

<Configuration 14>
In the seventh embodiment, the processing related to display on the entering state display device J10 is configured to be executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area. , etc.) may be configured to be executed as a process in the second ROM/RAM area. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the first ROM area and the first RAM area required for executing the processing related to the setting value. In addition, in the case where the set value is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10, the process and the set value related to the information related to the ball entry (for example, the base value) to be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 can be comprehensively executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area.

<Configuration 15>
Further, as in the configuration 14, the processing related to the display on the entering state display device J10 and the processing related to the setting value (the above-mentioned setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, etc.) are executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area. When the configuration is such that the RAM clear processing is executed based on the transition to the setting change mode,
(1) Second RAM area related to processing related to display on entering state display device J10 and entire range of second RAM area and first RAM area related to processing related to setting values (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, etc. described above) (2) The entire range of the second RAM area and the first RAM area related to the process related to the setting value (setting change process, setting confirmation process, etc.) may be RAM cleared.
In addition, the RAM check process (process of step 1008) is executed, and if it is determined that the contents of the RAM are not normal, the second RAM area related to the process related to the display on the ball entry state display device J10 and the process related to the setting value (described above). , setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, etc.) may be RAM-cleared in the entire range of the second RAM area and the first RAM area.
By constructing as described above, it is possible to execute RAM clearing for an appropriate range, and to appropriately execute the subsequent game progress.

<Configuration 16>
In the case where it is possible to shift to the setting display mode during the execution of the game (a situation other than immediately after turning on the power, for example, during the execution of the big win, during the pattern fluctuation, during the stop of the pattern),
(1) When shifting to the setting display mode during execution of the big win, after the setting display mode ends, the execution of the big win is resumed from the situation before shifting to the setting display mode.
(2) When the set display mode is entered during the stationary display of the pattern and during the variable fixed time, after the set display mode ends, the variable fixed time is restarted from the situation before the change to the set display mode. Specifically, when the variable fixed time is 3 seconds, if the setting display mode is shifted to after 1 second from the start of the variable fixed time, the variable fixed time ends 2 seconds after the end of the set display mode.
(3) When shifting to the setting display mode during the variable display of patterns, after the setting display mode ends, the clocking and display of the variable display of patterns resumes from the situation before shifting to the setting display mode. Specifically, during the variable display of the symbols whose variation time is 30 seconds, if the setting display mode is entered 10 seconds after the start of the symbol variation, the symbols will stop after 20 seconds from the end of the setting display mode. indicate. In addition, when the setting display mode is entered in a situation in which the patterns in the left column are stationary and the patterns in the middle row and the patterns in the right column are being displayed, the left The symbol variation may be resumed from a situation where the symbols in the row are displayed in a stationary state and the symbols in the middle row and the symbols in the right row are displayed in a variable manner. (4) It may be configured not to shift to the setting display mode while an error is occurring regardless of the error type.
(5) The progress of the game is stopped (entering the first main game start port A10 is invalidated, the symbol variation does not start, etc.). It may be configured such that it is possible to shift to the setting display mode during the occurrence of an error that does not stop the progress (ball tray full error, etc.).
(6) The configuration may be such that the setting display mode can be entered regardless of the error type even during the occurrence of an error.
(7) It may be configured such that the setting display mode is entered while the error is occurring and the display regarding the error is being executed, and the display regarding the error is resumed when the setting display mode ends.
(8) When the setting display mode is entered while an error is occurring and the error display is being executed, and the setting display mode ends, it is determined again whether or not the error has occurred, and the error has been resolved. If it is determined that an error has occurred, the error display may not be displayed, and the error display may be displayed (restarted).

M Main control board, MJ Game information control means MJ10 Ball entry determination means, MJ11-A First main game start entrance ball determination means MJ11-B Second main game start entrance ball determination means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game start Entry ball determination means MJ11-C10 1st big prize entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 2nd big prize entrance ball determination means MJ11-P General winning entrance ball determination means MJ11-C80 Out entrance ball determination means MJ11-C90 total discharged ball confirmation means, MJ11c-90 total discharged ball confirmation number counter MJ10b entry-ball related information temporary storage means, MJ12c start entrance entry-ball number counter MJ13c general entry-ball number counter, MJ20 random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-A 1 main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-B 2nd main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-H auxiliary game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ30 holding control means MJ31 holding digestion control means MJ31j fluctuation start condition satisfaction judgment means MJ32 Symbol reservation means, MJ32-A First main game symbol reservation means MJ32b-A First main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means, MJ32-B Second main game symbol reservation means MJ32b-B Second main game symbol reservation information temporary storage Means, MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation means MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol reservation information temporary storage means, MN Game content determination means MN10 Success/failure lottery means MN11-A First main game success/failure lottery means MN11ta-A For first main game Winning lottery table, MN11-B Second main game winning lottery means MN11ta-B Winning lottery table for second main game, MN11-H Auxiliary game winning lottery means MN11ta-H Winning lottery table for auxiliary game, MN40 Design contents determining means MN41 -A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game Symbol determination means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Variation mode determination means, MN51-A First main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B Second Main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP Game progression means MP10 Display control means, MP 11-C First/second main game symbol control means MP11t-C First/second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20- B 2nd main game starter electric accessory opening/closing control means MP21-B 2nd main game starter electric accessory opening/closing condition determination means, MP22t-B 2nd main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t2 2nd main game start Enter ball standby timer, MP30 Special game control means MP31 Condition determination means, MP32 Special game content determination means MP32ta Special game content reference table, MP33 Special game execution means MP33-C 1st and 2nd big winning mouth electric accessory opening and closing control Means, MP33c Winning sphere counter MP34 Special game time management means, MP34t Special game timer MP34t2 Opening timer, MP34t3 Large winning entrance ball waiting timer MP50 Specific game control means, MP51 Probability variable end condition determination means MP52 Short time end condition determination means, MP52c Time saving number counter MB Game state temporary storage means, MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C First and second main game symbol information temporary storage means, MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB11b -H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MO Maintenance mode control means ME Fraud detection information management means MEb Fraud related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control Means, MT10 Command transmission buffer MG External signal output control means, MH Prize ball payout determination means MHsj Payout information transmission/reception means, MHsjb Payout command temporary storage means MHc Prize ball counter, MHb Unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means A First Main game peripheral equipment, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry detection device, A11s2 1st main game start port confirmation sensor A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display unit A21h 1st main game symbol holding display, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game starter, B11s 2nd main game starter entrance ball detection device B11d 2nd main game starter electric accessory, B20 2nd Main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit, B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device , C11d 1 big winning opening electric accessory C20 2nd big winning opening, C21s 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21d 2nd big winning opening electric accessory, P10 general winning opening P11s general winning opening ball detection device, J10 winning state Display device C80 Out port, C80s Out port entrance ball detection device C90s Total discharge confirmation sensor H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game pattern display device H21g Auxiliary game pattern display Part, H21h Auxiliary game symbol reservation display part S Sub control board, SM Effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM10 Display information receiving means, SM11b Main side information temporary storage means SM20 Effect display control means, SM21 Decorative design display control means SM21n Design display content determination means, SM21ta Design change content determination lottery table SM21b Design related information temporary storage means , SM21t Design change time management timer SM22 Design reservation information display control means SM22b Design reservation information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Advance notice Effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information temporary storage means SM25 Ready-to-win effect display control means SM25n Ready-to-win effect display content determination means SM25b Ready-to-win effect related information temporary storage means SM30 Error notification control means SM31 Error Occurrence determination means SM40 Information transmission/reception control means SS Effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS10 Sub-information transmission/reception control means SS20 Image display control means SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Effect display device SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern Display area, SG12 First suspension display part SG13 Second suspension display part SB Sub-input button, SBs Sub-input button input detection device KH Prize ball payout control board, KE Prize ball payout device MHc-2 Normal time prize ball number counter, SM32 Maintenance mode display control means MJ11c-C91 Normal time total discharge confirmation number counter, MJ11c-C92 Total discharge maintenance counter MHc-3 Prize ball maintenance counter, SN10c Sub-side normal prize ball number counter SJ10c Sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter, SM32t base Measurement timer SJ11c Sub-side starting ball entry counter, SJ13c Sub-side general entry ball counter SRc RAM clear count counter, MHc-4 Non-accessory counter MHc-5 Accessory counter, MHc-6 Continuous accessory counter MJ11c- 91 non-time-saving total emission confirmation number counter, MJ11c-92 time-saving total emission confirmation number counter MHc-7 non-time-saving non-service counter, MHc-8 non-time-saving service counter MHc-9 time-saving non-service counter, MHc-10 time-saving role Thing counter HJ11c-91 payout non-time-saving total discharge confirmation number counter, HJ11c-92 payout time-saving total discharge confirmation number counter HHc-7 payout non-time-saving non-service goods counter, HHc-8 payout non-time-saving goods counter H Hc-9 Short-time payout non-accessory counter, HHc-10 Short-time payout service counter MJ11c-T90 Short-term total discharge confirmation number counter, TMHc Short-term prize ball counter DRt Ball payout rate timer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a ROM, a RAM, and a CPU,
The ROM stores a program that controls commands to the CPU and data that is read according to the program,
The ROM is
a first control area in which a program is stored;
a first data area in which data is stored;
a second control area in which the program is stored;
a second data area in which data is stored;
The RAM is
a first information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the first control area ;
a second information storage area for storing processing result data by the program stored in the second control area ;
has
a first stack area in which data stored in a register can be saved and used for processing in a program stored in the first control area;
A second stack area where data stored in registers can be saved and used for processing in the program stored in the second control area
and
The storage capacity of the programs stored in the first control area is larger than the storage capacity of the programs stored in the second control area. is,
Among the processing by the program stored in the first control area and the processing by the program stored in the second control area, the program stored in the first control area to the program stored in the second control area A process that is performed when called, and is processed in a series of processing routes including saving of predetermined registers used by the program stored in the first control area by the program stored in the second control area. is configured to maximize the usage of the second stack area only when
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images